JP7463691B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko and slot machines, hold a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be played, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is played. In some jackpot lotteries, a lottery is held not only to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a miss, but also whether or not the jackpot is a small jackpot. Here, a small jackpot is a different type of win from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot game is played, and after the small jackpot game is played, the game state before the small jackpot game (probability game state or time-saving game state) is maintained. In games where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery includes a small jackpot in addition to a jackpot, there are gaming machines that increase the number of balls played by consecutive small jackpots in the probability game state between jackpot games.

JP 2018-038790 A

As an amusement machine, it is important to increase the attention and interest of the game, thereby enhancing the player's desire to play.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest of players in the game, thereby enhancing their motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
Equipped with
The benefit to the player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening and closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4 . 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing door, a crane device, and a game ball retention section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 6. A diagram to explain the specific period for which game balls are retained in the game ball retention section, the prescribed period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the seven-segment display section. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B and FIG. 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 of FIG. FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of how numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of how alphabets are displayed on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of display on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 21. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34 . FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a numeral display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of control of a seven-segment display unit and an example of updating a seven-segment display unit control information storage area. 6A and 6B are diagrams for explaining a control example of a seven-segment display unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . A figure showing an example of screen transition during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value suggestion process executed by a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of Figure 48. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display order setting process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51 . FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 11 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of screen transition on the pattern display unit in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62 . FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 64. 6A and 6B are diagrams showing examples of turning on and off a lamp display unit. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during a jackpot game. A figure showing an example of a display screen during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the lamp display unit. FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the main parts of the game board shown in Figure 72. An oblique view showing the crane device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 72. A cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 72 along the portion corresponding to the X4-X4 cutting line in Figure 74. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 72. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sensor detection process in a main timer interrupt process executed by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game processing executed in the main processing of Figure 78. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a condition device operation process executed in the main process of FIG. 78 . 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 81 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game instruction presentation processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 81. FIG. 13 shows an example of a display screen on the pattern display unit during a game explanation presentation. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game instruction presentation processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 81. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion presentation processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 81. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing examples of a game type determination table and an initial point determination table used by the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion presentation processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 81. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion presentation processing executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. Figure 90 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion presentation processing in the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and Figure 90 (B) is a figure showing an example of a compensation point determination table used by the voice lamp control device. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 92(A) is a diagram showing a main portion of the game board shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(B) is an oblique view of a rotating body provided on the game board. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the function of a rotating body. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 94. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the rotating body operation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 94. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the main parts of the game board shown in Figure 97 to explain the function of the distribution member. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 99. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 99. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 99. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 99. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 99. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board to explain a modified example of the game board of a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of a Kluehn device provided on the game board shown in Figure 106. 108(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line in FIG. 107, and FIG. 108(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X6-X6 cutting line in FIG. Figure 109(A) is a diagram showing a portion broken away to explain the second variable winning port, and Figure 109(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X7-X7 cutting line in Figure 109(A). Figure 110(A) is a diagram showing a portion broken away to explain the second variable winning port, and Figure 110(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X8-X8 cutting line in Figure 110(A). Figure 111 (A) is a diagram showing the number of balls paid out from each winning slot, and Figure 111 (B) is a diagram showing the maximum opening time and maximum number of winning balls for each variable winning slot. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a game flow. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 115. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. An enlarged view of the main parts of the game board shown in Figure 122. 124(A) is an enlarged view of the main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124(B) and FIG. 124(C) are cross-sectional views of a distribution device provided on the game board shown in FIG. 122. An enlarged view of the main parts of the game board shown in Figure 122. An enlarged view of the main parts of the game board shown in Figure 122. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for distribution member control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 127. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a flow path regulating member control process executed in the main process of FIG. 127 . 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for flow path regulating member control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 127 . 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a flow path regulating member control process executed in the main process of FIG. 127 .

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Fig. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front/rear, left/right, and up/down used in this embodiment are defined by the front/rear direction D1, the up/down direction D2, and the left/right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) in the gaming hall. Note that in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jan-ball gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operating button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described below depending on whether or not it is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (operated or not operated). This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance that is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a variable game performance executed in a variable game that clearly shows the player the lottery results in a jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position that can be operated by the player. Also, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

In addition, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operation of the touch keys by the player. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or panel 25 during the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic play is performed by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, and is used to store the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described below, and to lead the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed further below the upper tray 23, and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs sound. Note that the installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has built-in light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects by changing the lighting color and flashing modes such as turning on and off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in FIG. 2, the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing the control content are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crane device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a seven-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launching rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may also be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. The back side of the game board 31 is provided with ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the entry of game balls, corresponding to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, respectively. The game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The variable winning hole 316 is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 31, and the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning hole 316. The game balls that pass through the through-hole 316b of the variable winning hole 316 are guided to the crane device 37 by the guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the game balls that pass through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning hole 315.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the cranes device 37 described below, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not the game ball is restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening/closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the game ball from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

5 and 6, the opening and closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting parts 319d for rotatably mounting the opening and closing door 319 to the game board 31, and when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31. As a result, when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it can receive the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend from the left and right edges of the base 319a, preventing the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling out from the left and right sides of the base 319a. In addition, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 has a through-hole 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This through-hole 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the up-down direction D2 and has a lower opening. The game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the crane device 37 via the through-hole 316b and the guide path 316c. The guide path 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 that enters the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the through-hole 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held by the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the round game (unit game) described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R variable jackpot game state) and a 16R variable jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning port 316 is opened for five rounds (unit games) until a predetermined time has elapsed or until an upper limit number (e.g., 9) or more of game balls enter the variable winning port 316. The 16R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play (unit play) are played, and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state, as more prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This pattern display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 performs various image presentations such as a variable display presentation of decorative patterns according to the lottery results in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, and a variable game presentation performed in conjunction with the variable display presentation. In addition, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the decorative pattern changing display performance in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in sequence vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. Also, in this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in variable play, the display of changes in decorative patterns is executed so that the change in all decorative patterns stops after a preset display time has elapsed from the start of the display of changes in patterns in the pattern display section 341. More specifically, in the display of changes in decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns change along a preset direction of change (e.g., horizontally, vertically, etc.), and the change in multiple decorative patterns stops in sequence. Then, when the change in decorative patterns on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of changes in the decorative patterns ends.

When the display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is finished, the decorative patterns are displayed in one or more valid lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative patterns indicates or suggests the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", a "16R jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns of the same type are displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, and it is indicated that there is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns on the valid lines, but this is not necessarily the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a pattern combination indicating a 16R jackpot, is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, or a state in which a combination of the same decorative patterns other than "777" is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", a state in which a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333", other than the combination of symbols indicating a 16R special jackpot or a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a normal jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "miss", a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is lined up on the valid line is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable play, a variable play effect is displayed that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is a "16R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 16R variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 5R normal jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the pattern display section 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

It is also possible to provide a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown) on the game board 31. The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a radio wave is fraudulently input to the ball entry sensor 314a, 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the Kroon device 37 distributes game balls that enter the variable winning opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening and closing door 319, the Kroon device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is an oblique view of the Kroon device 37, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the crane device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 that surrounds the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball port 373 (special discharge port). This special out ball passage 374 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and is provided so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high bottom 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. In addition, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided to the right of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 in the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention section 38.

It is also possible to provide the first guide member 375 with a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10, is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a specified period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably identified with 7 pieces of information. Also, since the game setting value has 6 stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, and therefore all non-set values can be identified with 35 pieces of information. In other words, the game machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a prescribed number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained in a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 a function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to retain a number of game balls 99 that is difficult to achieve using only the game ball retention section 38, using the first guide member 375. This makes it possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various components, even by providing the first guide member 375 with a function to retain game balls 99 as well as the game ball retention section 38, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by using the special out ball passage 374. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period of time, and there is a possibility that the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are retained during a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit to the specified number (to make the limit equal to the specified number). In this case, for example, when a number of pieces of information (individual pieces of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 are presented, information for identifying all non-set values during one specific period may be presented. Also, when a number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that satisfy a specified condition among the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373, for example, the number that wins the lottery, is presented, information on an expected number according to the probability of winning the lottery is presented, and since the expected number of pieces of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values may not be presented. This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being identified by the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball port 373 during one specific period, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot is low).

As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (causing ball clogging) to limit the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball passage 374. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period to a limited number using a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complex configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described below. In other words, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 will not enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316, and will not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 is treated as an out ball when it is no longer expected to enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom 371b constitutes the left side of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. The low bottom 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball port 378. This normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2, except for the portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom 371b, at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that enters through the normal out ball port 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373. In addition, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 that pass through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31, similar to the game balls that pass through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

In such a Krun device 37, the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31 and received by the opening and closing door 319 as described above is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the Krun device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. This delays the flow of the game ball 99 down in the Krun device 37. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enter the normal out ball port 378, for example, by reducing their kinetic energy or by colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the Krun device 37 or other game balls 99. The game ball 99 that enters the normal out ball port 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with other game balls, and enter the special out ball opening 373. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% to 5%, preferably 1% to 3%. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per round of play for 10 rounds is set to, for example, 0.5 to 5, preferably 1 to 3. By setting the ball entry probability or the expected number of balls entering within such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value too early, while making it possible to identify the set value realistically. This makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the set value is identified early, such as when the set value is low, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated due to boredom caused by the inability to identify the set value.

In this embodiment, the special out ball port 373 is provided at the high bottom 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball port 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373, so that the special out ball port 373 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball port 378. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball port 373 by other means. For example, it is possible to provide an obstruction means for obstructing the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball port 373 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle that obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 373, such as a wall portion surrounding the special out ball port 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by spraying air in the periphery of the special out ball port 373 are conceivable.

In addition, an opening/closing section may be provided to open and close the special out ball opening 373, and this opening/closing section may make it difficult for a game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373.

The distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that enter the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crane device 37, and may be other means. For example, the balls may be distributed to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 by adjusting a rotating member such as a switching valve or a rotating member, or the arrangement of nails driven into the game board 31.

As shown in Figures 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period has elapsed. After the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 described below are controlled, and a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 until the specified period has elapsed. Here, Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention unit, the specified period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit.

Note that, in the following, with reference to FIG. 9, the specific period is described as a period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the predetermined period is described as a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted, and the "prescribed period" is described as a period during which all or part of the numbers (specific information) indicating non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "prescribed period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period", "prescribed period", and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of the jackpot game (opening) to the end of the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game (the start of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period. That is, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the start of the ending). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), in the case of winning a normal jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a special jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a special jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), for all jackpot games that are played until the jackpot streak ends with a normal jackpot game when a normal jackpot is won in high probability mode, a specific period is set from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode for that jackpot game. In other words, in a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games played during the jackpot streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which corresponds to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during a specific period of one jackpot game, are controlled to be turned on and off at the end of the jackpot game, which is the specified period. In other words, the specified period is set as a period during which the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers indicating game setting values (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot, based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period.

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, a number specifying a game setting value (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery set in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, according to the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described below. In addition, in the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game, if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. Note that if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is less than seven, no numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, one to five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 described later based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during a specific period, and the set value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-set values. For example, the number 1 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 1 is a non-set value, the number 2 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 2 is a non-set value, the number 3 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 3 is a non-set value, the number 4 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 4 is a non-set value, the number 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 5 is a non-set value, and the number 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 6 is a non-set value. Also, the five numbers 2 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to identify that the non-set values are game set values 2 to 6, and therefore the user can determine that the set value is game set value 1. Similarly, the five numbers 1, 3 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 2, the five numbers 1, 2, and 4 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 3, the five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 4, the five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 5, and the five numbers 1 to 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 6.

It is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control objects. For example, if segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first control object, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, the sixth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control objects. When segment A, the first control object, is turned on, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that the number is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that the number is either "5" or "6". Furthermore, when segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, control for displaying the number of the next priority is not started unless all segments A to G become control targets. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, more specific conditions need to be satisfied than when control for displaying the number of the next priority is started at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped. As a result, the difficulty level until all non-set values are identified and thus the difficulty level for recognizing the set value can be increased, so that the set value is prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly learning the set value, which prevents a decrease in playing time on the gaming machine 10 and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, control to display the number of the next priority may be started. For example, when the priority of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ..., when it is grasped that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is "1" by making segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", the control to display the number "2" of the next priority may be started without making segment G, which is the seventh in the control order, the control. However, when segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be displayed next after all segments A to G become the control target, even if the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become the control target, control of segments A to G to display the number to be displayed next is not started until all segments A to G become the control target. Therefore, even if the player recognizes a number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control target, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, if the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have become the control target, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In contrast, if control to display the next number with priority is started when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, segments A to G that do not contribute to guessing the non-set value will not become the control target after one non-set value is identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot game is ended (the time when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a probability variable jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a jackpot streak is started), the specified period is the period from when the probability variable jackpot game for the first hit that triggers the jackpot streak to start, to when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the jackpot streak to end, is ended. In other words, in the case of a jackpot streak, the specified period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38, and is set to multiple periods according to the number of jackpot games that start within the specified period.

When a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot winning streak. Therefore, a specific period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In addition, a specific period for which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the croon device 37 is cumulatively counted is set from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for the jackpot game for a normal jackpot, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period has elapsed, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37), and information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and at the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot has elapsed, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the specified period. This prevents the game from ending before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or guessed, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed continues playing the game. Therefore, even if a player does not know the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed, the non-set values can be identified or guessed, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior by other players who play aiming for the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed.

In addition, by setting a specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set spanning from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is longer than in the case of a single jackpot, and the more jackpot games are played, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is more likely to be greater than in the case of a single jackpot, and in the case of consecutive jackpots, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more likely the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 will be greater. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the greater the expected value of the game value that can be acquired, and the more information can be obtained to identify or guess the non-set value, making it easier to guess or identify the non-set value and ultimately the set value.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during a jackpot game, and may be the time when the opening and closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends), not limited to the start of the jackpot game. The end of the specific period may be set during a jackpot game, and may be set during the ending to which the game normally transitions after a jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening and closing execution mode for one jackpot game. This allows information for identifying a non-set value to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed, based on the number of specific conditions that are established in response to the game ball 99 entering the variable winning port 316 in the opening and closing execution mode (based on the number of game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37). As a result, in the open/close execution mode, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the open/close execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period of time has elapsed, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on the content displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 and identifying or guessing the non-set value based on the displayed content.

The start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is not limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts, but may be set to the jackpot game. Preferably, it may be the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts (the opening of the first hit ends). In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, a predetermined period is always set for one first hit, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so that at least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value for one first hit is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the specified period is not limited to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, at the ending of the jackpot game, typically at the ending of the normal jackpot game. The end of the specified period may also be the end of the normal jackpot game (the end of the ending of the jackpot), or the end of the time-saving mode to which the mode is switched after the normal jackpot. In addition, although the present embodiment is described assuming a loop probability variable machine, in other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, the specified period may be set according to the type of the machine. For example, in a V-ST machine, if there is no V win on the first hit (normal jackpot), the specified period is set in the same way as for a normal jackpot on a loop probability variable machine, and if there is a V win on the first hit (probable probability variable jackpot), the start of the specified period is the start of the first jackpot game or the start of the open/close execution mode, and the end of the specified period is the end of the open/close execution mode on a jackpot without a V win, or the end of a set number of jackpot draws in the high probability mode.

The specified period may also be set to the period during which variable play is executed (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of a jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the specified period may be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and may be set to the period during which the player stays in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples of the period include a period until a normal winning lottery is drawn, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the general winning port 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The predetermined period may also be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variable play may be the specified period, or a portion of one variable play may be the specified period. When a portion of one variable play is the specified period, the specified period may be the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state, the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when a development performance such as a special ready state begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance ends, the period during which a development performance is executed, etc.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period during which variable play is executed, it becomes possible to identify or guess non-set values and recognize or guess set values even outside of the period during which jackpot play is executed. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of play while identifying or guessing non-set values (set values) during the period during which variable play is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the Krun device 37 may be provided in a position (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning hole 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning hole 314)) where the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is distributed to the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 when a left shot is performed in which the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is shot normally. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed without performing a special shot (right shot that shoots the game ball 99 into the right side area of the game board 31). This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game normally, without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.

The start of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of specific condition. The end of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of specific condition.

The specific condition is that, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by a distribution means such as the Krun device 37 entering the special out ball port 373 during a specified period, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball port 373, such as the game ball 99 passing through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 entering one of the various winning ports 313 to 316.

In addition, the game balls 99 that enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314, or that pass through the through gate 317, may be guided to a distribution means such as the Krun device 37, and a specific condition may be that the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball hole 373. In this case, too, it is possible to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game as usual, without performing any special shooting.

The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. In this case, the specific event may be either an advantageous or disadvantageous circumstance for the player. If the specific event is an advantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefit obtained from the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is an disadvantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events may include, for example, winning the jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), winning a special jackpot or regular jackpot a predetermined number of times (a special jackpot or regular jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), reaching a predetermined number of consecutive jackpots (winning a special jackpot a predetermined number of times in succession before winning a regular jackpot), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot draws before winning a jackpot, winning more than the upper limit of 99 balls (over-winning) during a round of play in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, etc.

The specific event may be the execution of a specific effect that is set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to any of a non-reach effect and a reach effect, and may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect, and an ending effect. Typically, the specific effect may be a premium effect in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed in a variable game effect, or an effect that indicates that a reserved consecutive win will be executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (the reserved wins include the lottery result of the jackpot at a specific time point of the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the open/close execution mode, the end of the open/close execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game). Furthermore, the specific event may be a stop display or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) of a decorative pattern in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped at "777", when it is stopped at a specific out-of-reach number such as "767", when it is stopped at a specific non-out-of-reach number (variable number) such as "367", and when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, such as "7 development 7", where the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed as the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the specific condition may be the occurrence of multiple specific events of a specific combination.

The specific condition may also be satisfied in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and may be satisfied, for example, when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described below. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value, for example, based on whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the specified period during which the specific information or a part of it (special information) indicating a non-set value is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied is not limited to being set for each ending of a jackpot game, and may be set at other times, depending on the relationship with the specified period, the relationship with the specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the specified period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game, in which the end of the specified period is typically set after the passage of a specified period as described in the second embodiment below, or may be other than a jackpot game, for example, after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the specified period is set to the execution period of a variable game, the specified period may be, for example, the start of the change of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the timing of the temporary stop display when the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the timing when the development performance such as the super reach performance or the special reach performance starts, or during the execution of the development performance. In other words, the specified period may be set to the period during which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which a variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of a big win lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by displaying a changing decorative symbol, it is also possible to simultaneously display specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable game by displaying the specific information.

Here, Fig. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in Fig. 8, Fig. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Fig. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described below is in the upper limit position, and Fig. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Fig. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described below with reference to Figs. 6 and 8 in addition to Fig. 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 that has stayed in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that the game ball 99 has been retained in the retention lane 381, and also makes it possible to visually confirm the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently using resin or the like. This makes it easier to grasp the number of game balls 99 that have been retained in the retention lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, or by displaying an image on the pattern display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is connected to the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

In addition, the discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out ball sensor 384. This special out ball sensor 384 detects the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 when they move along the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384, so that the MPU 41 determines whether the game balls 99 have moved along the discharge lane 382. In addition, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a game ball 99, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the setting value (see the command determination process of FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40).

The special out ball sensor 384 may be, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, but the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). The special out ball sensor 384 may also be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the upper limit position, it is possible to retain the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position, it is possible for the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (see FIG. 10(C)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is then guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game ball 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for allowing the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, and may be other means such as a stopper portion that can move forward and backward, or a stopper portion that can rotate between an upright state and a prone state. Also, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by configuring the retention lane 381 to be movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which it is discharged. For example, the retention lane 381 may be configured to wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game ball 99, while the retention lane 381 may be configured to move to a higher position than the discharge lane 382 to move the game ball 99 to the discharge lane 382. Alternatively, an opening may be provided in the game board 31 through which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position where the game ball 99 can be discharged from the opening to the rear side of the game board 31. Also, instead of the retention lane 381, a box-shaped movable body may be moved to set the game ball 99 in a state where it can be retained in the movable body and a state where it can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a seven-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabets displayed on the seven-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the seven-segment display unit 39 is made up of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and can display at least the numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B), and at least the letters A to F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of the multiple (six) game setting values (numerical information) corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B)) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, by turning on or off each of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the seven-segment display unit 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, the segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, when the non-set value is the game setting value 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, when the non-set value is the game setting value 3, the segments A to G are lit to display the number 3, when the non-set value is the game setting value 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are lit to display the number 4, when the non-set value is the game setting value 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the non-set value is the game setting value 6, the segments A, C to G are lit to display the number 6. In this embodiment, when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, the dot point DP is lit to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

In addition, the numbers corresponding to non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order that is determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as described below (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as described below, the control order for turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

In the seven-segment display unit 39, the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, as described below, and a number or a part of a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but indicates a part of specific information indicating a non-set value, and corresponds to an indication of special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using a part of the multiple segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) on the seven-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify the non-set value when a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, but also can guess the non-set value based on the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, players can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the number, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, whether or not each segment A to G is a control target in the seven-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, it is easier to guess the set value compared to when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, so a method is adopted that does not clearly indicate that each segment A to G is a control target, making it difficult to guess the set value. When it is clearly indicated to the player that each segment A to G is a control target, for example, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by flashing the segment to be controlled, or to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by lighting it in a color different from when the segment to be controlled is lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying the non-set value with an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, the letter A may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 1, the letter B may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 2, the letter C may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 3, the letter D may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 4, the letter E may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 5, and the letter F may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, which are located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing normal symbols (normal symbols), and displays the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, which is triggered by winning through the through gate 317 and determines whether or not to open the electric role 315b, by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pairs (displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner) when a player wins through the through gate 317, and displays the result of the normal symbol winning lottery by turning on or off each LED after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the first winning slot 314, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the first special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the first winning slot 314, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the second winning slot 315, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the second winning slot 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special chart, which is displayed in a variable manner due to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special chart, which changes in display due to a winning entry into the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3 , the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 also has a built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 41 determines whether balls have entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and whether the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317, based on the detection signal from the ball entry sensor 313a-317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the shot control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot play start command, a round play start command, a round play end command, an ending start command, a jackpot play end command, a special out ball detection command, and a setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process in FIG. 26 described below, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described below, when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the varying patterns. The variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N or the hold number M when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described below increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described below when there is an increase in the hold number N or the hold number M (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process in FIG. 22 described below).

The shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/lose information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has shifted when the reserved number N or reserved number M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 23 described below when transitioning to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, by receiving the jackpot game start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can know that not only the jackpot game is about to start, but also that the opening is about to start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice and lamp control device 5 may know that the opening is about to start by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process in FIG. 23 described later. Note that the sound lamp control device 5 can know that the opening ends and the open/close execution mode starts by the round game start command, but it is also possible to set an opening end command at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, or to set an open/close execution mode start command at the start of the open/close execution mode. Also, a command indicating the round number of the round game that is about to start may be set separately from the round game start command at the start of the round game, and the command may be sent to the sound lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the corresponding round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in the jackpot play control process in the main process in Figure 23 described below.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the cranes device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a specified period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content in the 7-segment display unit 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the changed setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts and executes the main timer interrupt process described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that the oscillator circuit and divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for the processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. The RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Now, referring to FIG. 13, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 performs the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the reserved storage area 412b, and the electric role reserved area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used to select a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of miss. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 that determines the variable display time in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341. The lottery counter 412a also includes a normal win random number counter C4 used to select whether the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an open electric role state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will be simply referred to as counters.

Counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when drawing big wins and setting the variable display time, etc.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable play in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the first special symbol display unit 362 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol play. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on the values stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a variable and stationary display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The winning/losing information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing a process according to the control program. In addition, a lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for 19 variable games that are executed based on the win/lose information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variable display time) of the variable pattern display displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/losing information is stored in an available area in the order of priority from the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. The number of holding areas NAA in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315, the winning/losing information is stored in the free area in the order of priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. The number of holding areas REB1 to REB4 in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number M in the holding number storage area NAB.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved jackpots in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing the winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the display of changing patterns in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341 begins. Specifically, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and when there is no winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the reserved number memory area NAB is 0, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In addition, in another embodiment, if the difference between the reserved number M stored in the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA and the reserved number N stored in the reserved number memory area NAB of the second reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one round of variable play, the MPU41 performs a lottery for a big win based on the numerical information stored as win/lose information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/lose information stored in the second reserved area REA2 shifts to the first reserved area REA1, the win/lose information stored in the third reserved area REA3 shifts to the second reserved area REA2, and the win/lose information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 shifts to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/losing information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is set to two types, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is a guaranteed jackpot state, according to the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area in ROM 411. Here, FIG. 14(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B), a plurality of win/lose tables are provided as a low probability mode win/lose table and a high probability mode win/lose table, in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) varies according to the game setting value. The low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table each include six win/lose tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, in that order, which is advantageous for the player.

At game setting value 1, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 2, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that will result in a jackpot lottery result for a jackpot between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that will result in a jackpot are not the same. Also, the random numbers that will result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Although six low probability mode win/lose tables and six high probability mode win/lose tables are provided corresponding to the six game setting values, it is sufficient if there is at least one win/lose table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode win/lose tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable play is the first special symbol play triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable play is the second special symbol play triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of fourth random numbers that will result in a 16R jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop jackpot machine in which the probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol play and the second special symbol play is the same. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R jackpot is set higher in the second special symbol game than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric role 315b), the expected value of winning game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric role 315b).

In this embodiment, an individual allocation table is set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible that the allocation probability of the jackpot type is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and it is also possible to configure it as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, type 1 and type 2 mixed machine, etc.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure jackpot", a "16R sure jackpot", a "5R normal jackpot", or a "miss".

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R or 16R guaranteed jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a guaranteed jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning the jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric roler 315b. In this embodiment, the guaranteed jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R guaranteed jackpot", a "16R guaranteed jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the game is in a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and in a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times, have been notified to the player, or ends when the player is informed that the results of the jackpot lottery have been a jackpot before the specified number of times have elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game during the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, as another embodiment, a lottery for falling from the probability variable game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state can be considered in variable play. Note that if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, there is no transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described as having three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, the invention is not limited to this, and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round regular jackpot, and a 16R regular jackpot, may also be considered.

The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of miss types: a front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a non-front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a complete miss in which no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in variable play in which a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, or a 5R regular jackpot is won, that is, in variable play that transitions to an open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the term "reach" refers to a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbols are displayed in two of the three stop positions on the pay line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display section 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the display of the variable symbols in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The electric reel opening counter C4 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The electric reel opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric reel holding area 412c in the RAM 412 when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric reel 315b will be opened for a predetermined time, based on the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 stored in the electric reel holding area 412c. For example, a win is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and a loss is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the pattern variation display displayed on the pattern display unit 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the rough variation game presentation type such as high-speed variation presentation (basic presentation, non-reach presentation), normal reach presentation, super reach presentation, and special reach presentation according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern by referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a special jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table prestored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a special jackpot fluctuation table and a miss fluctuation table. As shown in Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the special jackpot fluctuation table and the miss fluctuation table, a fluctuation pattern is previously associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU41 refers to the normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the special jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot", and the miss fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "miss", respectively, to identify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(A) and FIG. 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the guaranteed jackpot fluctuation table, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 30 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a normal reach performance. Also, when the fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the super reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 60 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern), and executes the special reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the miss fluctuation table, the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is determined for each stop type at the time of miss (reach of miss before and after, reach other than reach of miss before and after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of miss is reach of miss before and after or reach other than miss before and after, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of miss is complete miss, one of the fluctuation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a fluctuation display time of 7 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "04", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol without a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol accompanied by a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, when the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05" is executed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

The types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). In addition, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach presentations with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach presentations executed in the normal reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach presentations selected from among them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than in the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and one of the special reach effects selected from among them is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

In addition, the presentation patterns corresponding to the variation patterns may include player participation type operation presentations, such as an operation presentation in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, for example, a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the rapid-fire operation of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long press operation presentation in which the operation of the player long-pressing the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Also, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 16R guaranteed jackpot. If the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "05," indicating that it is a miss. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and performance type, displayed on the pattern display unit 341, based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, plays a sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the fluctuation mode actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of fluctuation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", "number of balls paid out from the second winning port", "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port", "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and "number of consecutive misses". Of this game information, "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lotteries" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls that have been released onto the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the general winning port 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the general winning port 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play state, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the variable winning port 316 during a jackpot game state. When a winning into the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the variable winning port 316 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "setting value" is used to select the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (hit/miss determination). In other words, the "setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low probability mode hit/miss tables (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode hit/miss tables (see FIG. 14(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared as described below. The "setting value" is updated during the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described below.

"Base information" is information about the "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid balls of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game mode. The "base" can be expressed mathematically as "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning port") / "number of balls out". "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of Figure 28 described below (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out balls two balls before that reaches 60,000 balls is the second previous 60,000 ball base B2, and each is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "second-previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep three or more past 60,000 ball bases as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information relating to the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable feature port to the total number of balls paid out from all the feature ports (general feature port 313, first feature port 314, second feature port 315, and variable feature port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable feature port" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 times) are performed in normal game mode, or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "functionality ratio information" is information on the "functionality ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "functionality ratio" can be expressed as a formula: "functionality ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port") / "total number of balls paid out." The "functionality ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "functionality ratio information" is stored as the cumulative functionality ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "function ratio information" may be the function ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "successive function ratio information" may include both the cumulative function ratio and the function ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws that have been performed in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) since the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times that the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 has been executed in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in the normal game mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is incremented by one each time the pattern change display of the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the change start process in FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw is received triggered by winning the first winning slot 314 (the number of times the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) per a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls", and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the general winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning slot" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 is displayed (the number of times a jackpot draw is received) on average for 1000 yen when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen at a game hall. The "unit number of jackpot draws" may be the number of times a jackpot draw is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 1,000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws in a certain period may be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws".

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that a jackpot has been drawn in a jackpot lottery that has been held since the gaming machine 10 was started up before the opening of the amusement hall until the present. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the gaming state is transitioned to a jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 of the main processing in FIG. 23, which will be described later. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of consecutive misses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. When the pattern change display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the "number of consecutive misses" is incremented by one, and if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to 0. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive misses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. It is preferable that the performance display monitor 43 is provided in the main control device 4, but it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit up to display "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit up to display "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0." Additionally, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also conceivable to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

The performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays 431-434, of which the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 display the abbreviation for the current base BL, "BL", as "8." and "L", while the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 display the base value "31" as "3" and "1". In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" from the left, respectively.

The performance display switch 44 is operated to switch the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four seven-segment displays 431 to 434) on and off collectively by pressing it, and is provided in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, electricity is supplied to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, electricity is cut off to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be provided somewhere other than the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431-434 are turned off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 18(B) to FIG. 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the "base information" is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the current base BL is 28%, in the example shown in FIG. 18(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18(D), the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program to calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program to display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a seven-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned setting values for selecting the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the setting value may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off when pressed, and when the power of the 7-segment display is on, it allows the set value to be changed by rotating the unit. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by pressing the unit, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by rotating the unit (by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the display on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is decreased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and the power supply of the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power supply was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the method may involve rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the set value, repeatedly or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45, or inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a state in which it is visible from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen unless the game board 31 is opened, and the player is prevented from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to ball jamming on the gaming machine 10 or the like.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the number corresponding to the setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the gaming hall, by opening the gaming board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and the setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours, while allowing the setting value to be changed outside business hours with a simple operation.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The sound lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 using the MPU 51, and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game presentation and the big win game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display change pattern command and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may also be configured such that the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Another embodiment may also be configured such that the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the flashing mode of the illumination unit 27, the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like, based on commands input from the main control device 4. The MPU 51 controls the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, so that a state in which the game ball (special out ball) that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. In addition, the MPU 51 controls the lighting or extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In addition, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, it is also possible to control image game effects executed on the pattern display unit 341, audio output effects in which sound is output from the speaker 26, and lamp effects based on the blinking pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands such as the variation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, and the shift command input from the main control unit 4.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (decorative pattern stop pattern combination (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(B))) and presentation pattern type (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 37(C)) based on the variation pattern command, sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process in FIG. 37), and starts the pattern variation display in the pattern display unit 341. At this time, in the case where the variation pattern command indicates a miss, the pattern display unit 341 displays the decorative pattern combination corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a display variation pattern command input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing the pattern variation display and the performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 and the like. Some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores a control program and a number of types of images, including changing patterns such as decorative patterns used in the changing pattern display of the pattern display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, big win effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each changing display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the changing display time of the changing pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the pattern display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the changing display pattern command, thereby realizing the changing pattern display and effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processes executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built in.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects the game balls being paid out individually. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island equipment together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 can pay out a number of game balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10, and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to pay out the predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an IC chip built in. The ball lending device 100 may also be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash inserted by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 to supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents the launch handle 22 from being fixed in a rotating state, for example, and prevents the player from playing in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power supply switch 90 for turning the power supply of the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power supply switch 90 is operated to turn on the power with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control they are currently executing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In addition, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects the entrance of a game ball into any of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. When an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. When a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with a win in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the launch control process is a process that enables the launch of the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process is also a process that disables the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of the game ball is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process in which a normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high frequency support mode is not in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. In addition, when the high frequency support mode is in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. When the MPU 41 determines that a normal win has occurred in the through gate process, the electric device 315b is opened for a predetermined period of time, which allows a win in the second winning hole 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 to which the electric device 315b is arranged.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to Fig. 21.

<Step S1101>
21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the first winning port 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a prize has not been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of judgment of winning/losing of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a first reserved command setting process to set the first reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first reserved command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in Fig. 20. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), which is updated in the main processing described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 before the winning/losing information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a second reserved command setting process to set a second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first reserved command" with the "second reserved command" and the "reserved number N" with the "reserved number M" in the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 22.

[First Pending Command Setting Process]
Here, Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first reserved command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 21. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserved command, and information such as the type of the first reserved command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved commands N. Hereinafter, the first reserved command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the reserved number N from the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, and if the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode in a game state change process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when the mode is changed from the high probability mode to another game state such as a big win game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the high probability mode hit/miss table. Meanwhile, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the low probability mode hit/miss table.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read out, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning/losing information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the winning/losing information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. The reserve area in which the winning/losing information is stored in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to on in the first hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp contents similar to the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of variable play and big win play is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a regular processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Fig. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process in Fig. 20 to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313, the variable prize winning opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313 or the first prize winning opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize winning opening or the first prize winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current prize winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the sure-win game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning port 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the big win game state, if a win occurs in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned big win lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for the pattern variable display by the pattern display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on each value of the big win random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interruption process in FIG. 20, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 executes a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, by controlling the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319, the number of times corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game five times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R variable jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412, and when starting an ending, an ending start command is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which an open/close execution mode is executed, a sure-variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the like.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state after the variable game that notifies the result of the lottery ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Also, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a variable jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lotteries has finished during the time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

In addition, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state, it sets the flag for the game state before the transition to off, while setting the flag for the game state after the transition to on. For example, when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to off, while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from a high probability game state to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to off, while setting the jackpot game flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of a setting value, or change of a setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it may be executed only during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the period from the start-up process until the launch of game balls begins. This prevents the setting value from being changed after the player has started playing until the next time the power is turned on, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information from among game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit big win lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process is executed for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process from S1301 onwards. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of Fig. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Fig. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 judges whether the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game or not, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated, and if it is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being executed is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 23.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern change is being displayed, and if the pattern change is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the pattern change is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the pattern change is being displayed is judged based on a change display flag that is set to ON at the start of the change display in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, and is set to OFF in step S1405 of the change game control process when the change display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the pattern variable display. If it determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it transitions to step S1404, and if it determines that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), it terminates the variable game control processing.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not both the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are 0 (step S1406). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), it ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either one of the reserved number N and the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the winning/losing information data stored in the reserved storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 ends the process in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for making the symbol display unit 341 execute a change display based on the winning/losing information, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting process]
Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in Fig. 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1501>
25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA (step S1502) and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is performed when both or either of the reserved number M and the reserved number N is not 0 in step S1406 of Fig. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the reserved number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the winning/losing information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved patterns displayed on the pattern display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in Fig. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in Fig. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is in the high probability mode. Whether the game state is in the high probability mode is judged based on whether the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process in Fig. 23, is set to ON. If the game state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, if the game state is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal big win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal big win variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Also, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a sure-win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the sure-win variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the miss variation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes the pattern variation display by the pattern display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "A01" to "A03" obtained by adding "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. When the lottery result is a "5R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "B01" to "B03" obtained by adding "B" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R sure-change jackpot. When the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "C01" to "C03" obtained by adding "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R sure-change jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "08" with the letter "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command as to whether the result is a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variable start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it sets a variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referenced in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether the main display unit 36 is displaying a variable pattern. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "accumulated number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "consecutive number of misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and when the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "consecutive number of misses" to 0.

[Setting value change process]
Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in Fig. 23. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Fig. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress, and if the pattern variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the pattern variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress is judged based on the variation display in progress flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in Fig. 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state is judged based on a jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the pattern change display nor the big win game state is in progress (steps S1701 and S1702 are No), the MPU 41 judges whether the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), i.e., whether the operation to turn on the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. That is, in this embodiment, when the pattern change display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the big win game state is in progress (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag, which indicates that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, to on (step S1706), and ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), i.e., if the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power supply is not turned on, the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether a rotation operation for changing a setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S1709) to change the display on the set value display unit 45. For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 causes a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed, and conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 causes a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed.

When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid setting value. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 with the number corresponding to the desired setting value being displayed on the setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not an operation to turn off the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the set value change operation unit 46. If the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. Note that if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power supply to the seven-segment display is cut off in the set value display unit 45, so that the numbers indicating the set value are turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off, and ends the setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) are selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. In other words, a win/lose table with the same setting values is selected for the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table, so the setting values can be easily changed. However, it is also possible to make it possible to change the setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode individually. In this case, it becomes possible to set different levels (numerical values) of setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode to "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of Fig. 23. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
28, the MPU 41 reads the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and judges whether the read number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls does not reach 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning port + number of balls paid out from the first winning port) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(A) and FIG. 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls from the general winning port, the number of payout balls from the first winning port, and the number of out balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update process. The specific performances in this case are, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws, the consecutive role ratio, the role ratio, etc.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of Fig. 23. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Fig. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in Fig. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in Fig. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 before last, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 in Fig. 30 (step S1908), and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Fig. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 in Fig. 31 (step S1917), and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919) and displays the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "2", "3", "2" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 32% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "2", "3", "3" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain period of time for which the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Fig. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of Fig. 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 47.

In addition, in another embodiment, some or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started, and NMI interrupt processing during a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
34 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game presentation process (step S2003), a big win game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display sequence setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 determines and stores (sets) the sequence of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, with reference to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the setting value suggestion process is executed in the big win game in the predetermined period, so that five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value are displayed in a predetermined sequence on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, in the display sequence setting process, the sequence of displaying the five numbers specifying the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display sequence setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display sequence determination table referred to in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35. Details of the display sequence setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 judges whether the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set value in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. In addition, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub timer interruption process is executed by allowing the sub timer interruption process by the start-up process of the sound lamp control device, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

Incidentally, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display sequence setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the set value change flag is set to on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that a game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to on in step S2121 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 described later. If the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag to off (step S2013) and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period is set. In this way, when the set value is changed, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set, so that the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value, and therefore, the presentation of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires a setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and a number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display sequence determination table, the display sequence of numbers is determined by a random number value selected for each game setting value 1 to 6 (setting value 1 to 6) that is set to determine the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 random numbers selected from 0 to 119, and one display sequence is associated with each random number value, and the selection probability of each display sequence is the same. The display sequences include display sequences A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display sequences B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display sequences C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, display sequences D1 to D120 selected for setting value 4, display sequences E1 to E120 selected for setting value 5, and display sequences F1 to F120 selected for setting value 6, and 120 display sequences corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-setting values are set for each setting value 1 to 6.

The display sequence A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 specifies the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 are displayed (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the setting value is 1 and one of the display sequences A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2 stipulate the order in which the set values "1," "3" to "6," and the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the set values 2 to 6 are displayed other than the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the set value is 2 and one of the display sequences B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1," "2," and "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed, other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" that specifies the setting value 3 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences D1 to D120 selected when the setting value is 4 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed, other than the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences E1 to E120 selected when the set value is 5 stipulate the order in which the set values 1 to 4 and the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying the set value 6 are displayed, other than the number "5" specifying the set value 5 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" specifying the set value 5 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "5" specifying the set values 1 to 5 are displayed, other than the number "6" specifying the set value 6 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" specifying the set value 6 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

When the sequence of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 has been set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display sequence setting flag to OFF (step S2016) and ends the display sequence setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the sequence of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that are set to determine the probability of a jackpot on the gaming machine 10.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the setting value. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a specified order for a specified period when a specified condition (e.g., power is turned on or the setting is changed). In gaming halls, the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before opening, so the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In the display sequence setting process of this embodiment, the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when the setting value is changed, but the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment described later, and examples of the predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the start of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game. Even when the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed, so that the same information is prevented from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display sequence determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same for the same set value, but the probability that the number display sequence is selected does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display sequence determination table may be set so that the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected is different from other number display sequences for the same set value. That is, it is possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific display sequence harder to select. If the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected according to the set value is set to be different from other number display sequences, it is also possible to make a specific number display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific number display sequence harder to select according to the set value. That is, unlike the case where the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same, it is also possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value and, conversely, to make it harder to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high set value and the likelihood of a low set value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high set values (for example, set value 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the low set value being a high set value until the end, the player is made to have expectations of the high set value, while preventing the player from identifying the low set value early. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and can suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low set values (for example, set value 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high set value and the numbers corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the set value is identified as a high set value, and the possibility of the low set value remains until just before the player grasps that the high set value. This allows the player to focus on whether the setting is a high setting that is advantageous to the player, or a low setting that is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the setting is a high setting. In addition, regardless of the setting value, it is also possible to make it easier to select the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-setting values, for example, the slowest display order. In this case, since the number indicating the non-setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous non-setting value for the player and a non-setting value that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last number is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine 10 and to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to set the number display order so that numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later in the number display order. For example, it is possible to set a number display order so that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later in the number display order. Even in this case, until the player grasps the setting value, there is a possibility that the setting value is a high setting value that is advantageous to the player, and a possibility that the setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, so the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether the setting value is a high setting value or a low setting value until the player grasps the setting value.

In addition, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value 6), it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value is delayed. For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set value in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the set value is higher than the actual set value until just before the set value is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting that the set value is high until just before the set value is grasped. Conversely, it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values lower than the set value is delayed, except when the set value is the lowest set value (set value 1). For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value in this way, the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to game set values lower than the set value are left as hidden numbers just before the set value is grasped. This makes the final candidates for the set value the actual set value and a game set value (non-set value) lower than that set value. As a result, the game set value that is more advantageous to the player is ultimately grasped as the set value, improving the enjoyment when the set value is grasped.

It is also conceivable to set the number display order so that, regardless of the setting value, the number display order is made later in the sequence of numbers corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting value 5 or higher). Conversely, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order is made earlier in the sequence of numbers corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting value 2 or lower) is made earlier. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later, higher setting values are displayed later. This makes it possible to make the player expect that the setting value is likely to be advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the setting value, and thus allows the player to enjoy guessing non-setting values (setting values) while hoping that the setting value may be high.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 executes updates of the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variable display counter, etc. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the performance type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Also, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the change display counter, it is possible to know the remaining change display time, whether a change is occurring, whether the change display of the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, if the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command judgment process ends. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in an unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that, if it is judged in step S2101 that the command has been received and is to be processed, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area and stored in, for example, a processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbols and the presentation type (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the variation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the presentation type table (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the presentation type counter stored in the RAM 512. Also, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, sets the 5R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, and sets the 16R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

The decorative symbol stopping pattern combination consists of a first stopping pattern, a second stopping pattern, and a final stopping pattern. The first stopping pattern is the first decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stopping pattern is the second decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the final stopping pattern is the last symbol to be stopped and displayed. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a normal reach (see FIG. 39(A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a super reach (see FIG. 39(B)), and a special reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a special reach (see FIG. 39(C)).

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), the first stop symbol selection table prescribes the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341. Note that FIG. 38(A) is based on the premise that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9", "333" is a symbol combination indicating a sure chance jackpot (either a 5R sure chance jackpot or a 16R sure chance jackpot), "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R sure chance jackpot, and any other repeat number besides "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R sure chance jackpot, or a 16R sure chance jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", there is no allocation of "3" and "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combinations "333" or "777", which indicate a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot (special jackpot), will not be displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R special jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R special jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R normal jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," if a decorative symbol other than "3" and not "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability jackpot promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", all the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 5R jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop display result. And, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R jackpot promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop pattern if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop patterns to be the same as the first stop pattern that was previously determined. This determines the combination of stop patterns that will be displayed on the pay line of the pattern display unit 341 in that game round.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a "miss", all of the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss", it determines the second stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (Fig. 14 (D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front/rear miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front/rear miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol and the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop pattern is determined to be a pattern different from the first stop pattern, and the final stop pattern is determined regardless of the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern. The stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop pattern may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop pattern and the final stop pattern may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are determined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach presentation pattern". Also, the variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result is "5R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach presentation pattern", and the variation pattern command "C03" in which the lottery result is "16R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90 s" and the variation type "special reach presentation pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with a variation display time of "7 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern," and the variation pattern command "D05" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table. The presentation pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 39(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 39(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 39, the performance type table for when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are set as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, and miss). Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, presentation pattern X1 to presentation pattern X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative pattern reaches a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. Note that the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance and a super reach performance are executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further, as the final individual performance type, it develops into a special reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance or the super reach performance and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may include a special reach performance pattern that develops into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and the super reach performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table, and the performance type counter, and the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern type) to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns and the variation type (presentation pattern type) determined in step S2103. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the presentation image of the decorative patterns corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the presentation display in the pattern display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns, the variation type, and the presentation type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to stop varying in sequence. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

When the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable play performance flag to ON. This variable play performance flag is a flag that indicates that a variable play performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of a jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game presentation determination process is a process for determining presentations to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening presentation, an ending presentation, and an opening/closing execution mode presentation to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The big win game presentation start flag is a flag for starting a big win game presentation (opening presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening presentation start process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is started in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the big win game control process in step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kleun device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending performance process in the big win game performance process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The ending performance start flag is also referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process of Fig. 40.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation end flag to ON and ends the command judgment process. The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The big win game presentation end flag is also referred to when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segments in the 7 segment display unit 39 in step S2301 in the 7 segment display unit control process of Fig. 41.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of Fig. 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command judgment process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 of the display sequence setting process in FIG. 35 and is referenced to determine the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 34, in the variable game presentation processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, in a variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, when a variable pattern command is received, a variable game presentation in accordance with the presentation pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination processing of Figure 37 is executed by the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the big win game presentation process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process, the opening presentation, the ending presentation, and the opening/closing execution mode presentation determined in the big win game presentation determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of Fig. 37 are executed. In the ending presentation, in this embodiment, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Fig. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display portion 39 is controlled. Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process, a process is executed in which an ending additional image showing the display result on the seven-segment display portion 39 in the big win game is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 as an ending presentation of the big win game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Fig. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting an ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for starting an ending performance based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the timing of starting the ending performance. As a result, if a game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 being moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets a stopper portion lowering flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is lowering to ON (step S2203). The stopper portion lowering flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a lowering time counter corresponding to the time required to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S2205), thereby terminating the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the stopper unit lowering flag, which is set ON in step S2203, is set ON (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is a timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, when the stopper unit lowering flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207, and when the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper part lowering flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the special out ball sensor 384 has detected a game ball, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win game are retained in the game ball retention section 38. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referred to in order to control the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process in FIG. 41 described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined based on whether or not a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, i.e., whether or not the special out ball detection flag has been off for a certain number of times in succession. If the condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is that a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are a large number of special out balls, the special out balls can be counted accurately.

If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212. If the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 up from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). This causes the game ball retention portion 38 to return to a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39. That is, for each big win game, at the ending of the big win game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device during the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game. Details of the seven-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game. This ending additional image control process makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 also on the symbol display unit 341. Details of the seven-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to Figs. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper part moving flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the big win game presentation end flag is set to on (step S2216). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation, and is set to on in step S2118 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the big win game presentation (ending presentation) by the big win game presentation end flag. Here, when the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2217>
If the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, when the jackpot game presentation ends, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. Therefore, the player can obtain information for identifying or guessing the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is played. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value each time the jackpot game is played, and therefore the player can enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information for identifying or guessing the non-set value for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of consecutive jackpot games increases, it becomes possible to grasp all (five) non-set values, and in that case, it becomes possible to grasp the set values. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the identified non-set value, and therefore it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, which increases the interest in the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game presentation end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R variable jackpot flag, 16R variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the setting value suggestion presentation.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 (step S2301), and judges whether the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 ends the 7-segment display control process since it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display 39.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads out the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display control information read out from the 7-segment display control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control contents (step S2305). Details of the determination and control of the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display unit control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control sequence memory area is an area that stores the order of numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated), and the control target order of segments A to G when displaying each number. This control sequence memory area includes a number display sequence memory area and a segment control sequence memory area.

The number display sequence memory area stores the sequence of numbers (number display sequence) to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode to the end of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display sequence is determined in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) set for a set value that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In the number display sequence memory area of the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), the display sequence A1 is set based on the number display sequence determination table for the set value 1 in the above-mentioned number display sequence setting process, and "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" are stored as the display sequence of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. In other words, unless the setting is changed during the business hours of the game hall, a fixed sequence is determined as the number display sequence for each business day, and the number display sequence for a predetermined period during the same business day is fixed. In this way, since the number display order is fixed during a predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the same order every time the predetermined period starts, so that numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display. For example, when the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so that "2" and "3" are easily displayed, but "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to predict and specify the setting value while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows players to enjoy predicting and specifying the setting value. In addition, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display, for example, when the setting value is low (when the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent a player from recognizing that the setting is low with a small number of first wins. This prevents players from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 they are playing, and helps prevent a decline in the operating rate of that gaming machine 10.

In addition, the more specific periods in a given period (the more consecutive jackpots), the more numbers are expected to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more information can be obtained to identify non-set values, and the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, by having 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a given period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, the set value can be recognized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all non-set values, that is, to recognize the set value, and can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots will continue (whether the jackpot type is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot), which increases the interest of the game.

The number display order is not limited to being fixed to the order set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the settings are changed, but may be determined when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode. In this way, the number display order is determined when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, so that the number display order is determined, for example, for each predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the number display order, and therefore reduces the variation in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of first wins, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values early. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 will be displayed, taking into account the numbers that have been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, with the aim of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values.

Meanwhile, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when displaying numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as follows: segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the settings are changed, or a jackpot is won, but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to grasp the number that is scheduled to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of segments A to G, which increases the fun of the game.

The segment control order, like the number display order, is fixed for the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but it is also possible to determine it for each business day. In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 compared to when the segment control order is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so that, for example, when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 that he is playing.

The segment control order may also be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode starts (when a specified period starts), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already-displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about numbers that have already been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, numbers that are in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been targeted for control. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not a number has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This already-displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already-displayed flag, a number 2 already-displayed flag, a number 3 already-displayed flag, a number 4 already-displayed flag, a number 5 already-displayed flag, and a number 6 already-displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, and when the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, and when the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 2 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 3 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 3 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 3 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 4 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 4 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 4 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 5 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time, and when the number 5 is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed as a non-set value on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time. When the number 6 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time, and when the number 6 is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not a number is a display target number on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 2 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the number 2 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 3 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 3 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 3 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 4 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 4 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 4 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 5 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 5 is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 6 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 6 is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. This already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-targeted flag, a segment C already-targeted flag, a segment D already-targeted flag, a segment E already-targeted flag, a segment F already-targeted flag, and a segment G already-targeted flag. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment A of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment A already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment B of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment B already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment B is set to off, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment C already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment C has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment C is set to off, it indicates that the segment C is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment D already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment D is set to off, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment E already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment E is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment F of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment F already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment F is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment G already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment G is not a control target.

In the initial state, all flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already targeted segment flag information are set to off in the already displayed information storage area. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside the specified period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in low probability mode (the start of a specified period in which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated). In this embodiment, all flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 described later when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), that is, when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the specified period is set.

Here, Figs. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area. Below, with reference to Figs. 43 to 45, examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the seven-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the seven-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the seven-segment display 39 is controlled at the ending of the big win game according to the control content (step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are determined according to the value of the special out ball counter (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 41. For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42 (C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, some of the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 5), when the contents of the control sequence storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all flags are set to off), the five segments A to E of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. When the contents of the control sequence memory area are as shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is turned on, segment B is turned on, segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. As a result, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the fully turned off state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state in which segments A, B, D, and E are turned on as shown in FIG. 43(B).

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by turning on or off each of segments A through E as the controlled objects in turn. Furthermore, when turning on or off each of segments A through E as the controlled objects in turn, the segments A through E that are the controlled objects may be made to flash, for example, to clearly indicate that they are the controlled objects. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate which segments are the controlled objects.

On the other hand, when the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF to the contents shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E out of segments A to G are controlled, and segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed, all flags including the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, the number 3 already-displayed flag, the number 4 already-displayed flag, the number 5 already-displayed flag, and the number 6 already-displayed flag are maintained as OFF. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2, for which the five segments A to E are the control targets, is set to on. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, and segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to on.

Also, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the seven-segment display control process in FIG. 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) exceeds seven, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 10), a total of ten segments A to G are subject to control on the seven-segment display unit 39. In other words, the seven (all) segments A to G are subject to control to be turned on and off on the seven-segment display unit 39, so that the first display order number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and further, three segments A to C are subject to control to be turned on and off for the second display order number. Specifically, when the contents of the control sequence storage area are as shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state as shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the number 2 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, the seven-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state in which segments A, B, D, E, and G are turned on and segments C and F are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(B) and the seven-segment display unit 39 displays the number 2, and further changes from the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second number to be displayed is 3, so segments A to C are turned on.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C. Furthermore, when sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C, the segments being controlled may be made to flash to clearly indicate that they are being controlled. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the segments being controlled.

In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags are set to off shown in FIG. 42(C), through the contents shown in FIG. 45(A) and FIG. 45(B), to the contents finally shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, all segments A to E of the segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on. Then, when all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on, the control to display the number 2 is completed, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), in the already-displayed number flag information, the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, and in the currently-displayed number flag information, the currently-displayed number 2 flag is set to off while the currently-displayed number 3 flag is set to on. After that, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to off. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the already-displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, segment B already-targeted flag, and segment C already-targeted flag for segments A to C are set to on. In other words, every time all the already-targeted flags in the already-displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time the seven segments A to G are set to the control target), the already-displayed flag for the number that was the display target in the already-displayed number flag information is set to on, the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the currently-displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the number that will be the next display target is set to on.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set values based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, to recognize the set values.

Incidentally, some gaming machines, like gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, have multiple setting values with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the setting value can be selected by the gaming hall. In this case, the gaming hall will want to set the setting value low in order to lower the expected value of balls dispensed. And when the setting value is set low, there is a tendency to prefer a gaming machine whose setting value is not known to players, in order to avoid players quitting play because they realize that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players want gaming machines with set values to be able to guess (narrow down to multiple set values) or recognize the set values, so that they can play on gaming machines 10 with a higher expected value for ball payout. In this way, gaming parlors and players tend to have conflicting expectations regarding gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate game set values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning port 316, the game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the specific period has elapsed is counted, and the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 that correspond to the count number are controlled. In other words, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game is transitioned to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are not controlled or lit. Therefore, the set value is not inferred or recognized unless the game is transitioned to a jackpot game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game balls 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37, and for example, one to two game balls 99 are expected to enter for one 16R jackpot game (about one for 10R of round game). Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult for the 7-segment display unit 39 to identify or guess the non-set value. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game (the start of the ending). In other words, if the first hit is a sure-variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot streak in the high probability mode continues, but will continue until the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends when a normal jackpot is won. That is, in this embodiment, the game has a feature that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and therefore the set value, but the longer the consecutive big wins in the high probability mode continue, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the more accurately the non-set value (set value) can be guessed, and when 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 in a specified period, the non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, information that allows the setting value to be guessed according to the number of specific conditions that are established in a specified period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, is displayed, and in the case of a single big win, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 is low, so the game has a feature that makes it difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive big wins, if the number of consecutive wins is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (setting value), but as the number of consecutive wins increases, the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 increases, so the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (setting value) decreases. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be guessed by identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the gaming machine 10 meets the wishes of the store by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), while also meeting the wishes of the player by enabling more accurate guessing of the non-set value (setting value) through consecutive big wins. This provides a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store and the player.

In conventional slot machines, images suggesting or indicating the set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which game performance is performed. Images suggesting or indicating the set value are displayed, for example, on a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as an ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate the set value, a screen that suggests or indicates, with a certain probability, that the set value is equal to or higher than a specific set value (for example, equal to or higher than an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6)), that the set value is high (for example, set value 5 or 6), that the set value is odd (for example, set value 1, 3, or 5), that the set value is even (for example, set value 2, 4, or 6), that the set value is not a specific set value (for example, the negation of set value 1), that the set value is the highest set value (for example, set value 6), etc. are presented.

However, in the case of suggesting or indicating a setting value in a conventional slot machine, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a setting value is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or indicates a setting value is set low, so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player, or indicating that a specific setting value is being indicated is set low. In addition, the reliability of suggesting an odd setting value or an even setting value tends to be low, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, in a slot machine, even if a high setting value is suggested or indicated, there is no suggestion or indication that denies a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and in particular no suggestion or indication that denies the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, in a slot machine, information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denial of a high setting value, is not presented.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, as described above, information (non-set values) that allows the set value to be inferred is displayed as numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specified period, i.e., the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period. In other words, by displaying the numbers for the non-set values one by one on the seven-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, making it possible to infer the set value, and by displaying the numbers for all of the non-set values, all of the non-set values can be recognized, making it possible to identify the set value.

In this way, this embodiment is fundamentally different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate, and allows the user to recognize a set value by identifying multiple non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In addition, this embodiment clearly indicates or suggests a non-set value (set value) depending on the number of specific conditions (balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during a jackpot game in a specified period of time, and in this respect it is also different from conventional gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate. Furthermore, this embodiment is also different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value in the sense that the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases as the number of consecutive jackpots increases.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during jackpot play in a specified period of time. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for identifying the set value is presented does not decrease. Instead, as long as the specified period continues (as long as consecutive jackpots continue), the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues, making it even more fun to guess the set value, and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all non-set values can be identified. In other words, regardless of the high or low non-set values, all non-set values, including information disadvantageous to the player, are presented to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where a set value is suggested or clearly indicated in a conventional slot machine, even information disadvantageous to the player is presented so as to deny the highest set value, etc. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for identifying or guessing the set value, and can determine whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) is delayed is set so that it is easy to select. Conversely, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) is early is set so that it is easy to select. In this way, the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value is early and the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value is late, so that a higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to anticipate the possibility that the set value will be a high value that is advantageous to the player until the player is aware of the set value, allowing the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while hoping that the set value may be high.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, in step S2401, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41, i.e., already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information updated due to the passage of the current specific period, and determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the big win game based on this information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image that allows a non-set value to be specified or estimated (see FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending performance. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending performance.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a sure-variant jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a normal jackpot game. Also, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are example screens (example setting value suggestion screens) of the pattern display section 341 during the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of a special jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a high probability mode and high frequency support mode will be entered after the special jackpot game ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of a normal jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time-saving mode) will be entered after the normal jackpot game ends. In addition, in the first half of the ending presentation, in addition to an image that indicates the game mode to be entered after the jackpot game ends, images that indicate the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed are displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter half of the ending performance of the big win game, an image including an additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a result of the Kloon game using the Kloon device 37. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), an additional image including an image imitating the display state on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47 (B1) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) via FIG. 44(C), an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance, as shown in FIG. 47(B2). Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the predetermined period, an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the state in which each number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In this case, it is possible to specify that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during that predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the ending and recognize or guess the set values based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

In addition, whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the ending performance of a jackpot game on the pattern display unit 341 is a design matter, and it is also possible to not display an additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance. In this way, if an additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number that has been displayed in the past during the predetermined period, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and even to guess or recognize the set value. In other words, by not displaying an additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess the non-set value (set value), so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is prevented from being recognized as not being a high set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2305, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 ends the ending additional image control process.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or to increase the accuracy of the guess, it is necessary to have more game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, for the game hall, there is an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or guessed. In addition, the set value can be specified or guessed by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the guess of the set value increases with the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (consecutive jackpots), and in some cases, the set value can be recognized, which can give the gaming machine 10 a gaming feature. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

In addition, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will be ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in the high probability mode, the game will not be ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, by setting the predetermined period to the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. This prevents a player who does not know the timing (end of the predetermined period) when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed from ending the game just before the non-set value (set value) becomes specified or guessable, even if the player proceeds with the game and does not know the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or recognized. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play aiming for the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the specified period is the start of the jackpot game triggered by the first jackpot win in the low probability mode, not only is it necessary to win at least one jackpot before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, but even if the specified period has started, the hurdle of being able to specify the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired onto the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be taken until the non-set value (set value) is guessed or specified to some extent. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, it is highly likely that the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of receiving a jackpot draw) has also reached a stage where it is possible to sufficiently judge. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 during play, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, making it possible to decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to continue playing. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to abandon playing.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or guessing non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check information about non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy the progress of the game by recognizing or guessing the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game, but the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be made displayable during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed, it is possible to display the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 by a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it becomes possible to check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39 when they have been forgotten. This makes it possible to identify or guess the non-set value based on the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 during standby or other times will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment below.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., there is an advantage that it is possible to check the display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the past when the display contents have been forgotten. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., anyone can check the display history by performing a specified operation on an empty gaming machine 10. In other words, it becomes possible to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, which allows so-called hyena behavior. In contrast, in this embodiment, it is not permitted to check the display history for a specified period on the seven-segment display unit 39 after the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In other words, the display of specific information indicating the non-set value, including the display history for the specified period, is restricted outside the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena behavior of identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the first hit is a special jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, but the predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game regardless of whether it is a first hit or a consecutive hit. In this case, the predetermined period begins at the start of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode, and ends at the end of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode.

In this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, numbers or letters corresponding to non-set values may be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect may be executed in the symbol display unit 341 to indicate the non-set value. As a non-set value indicating reach effect, it is possible to stop and display a decorative pattern with, for example, a repeating number corresponding to a non-set value when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect is executed in which the non-set value is indicated on the symbol display unit 341, so that the player can enjoy the variable game not only by checking whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the variable game, but also by focusing on the numbers and the like stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and by focusing on the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Also, when the non-set value indicating reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, it is also conceivable that in the reach of the decorative symbols of the numbers corresponding to the set value, the numbers are not displayed as a set of double numbers, but are displayed as a miss. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative symbols can stop and be displayed as "222," "333," "444," "555," and "666," but not "111," and a reach with a decorative symbol of 1 is guaranteed to be a miss. In this way, by not displaying the repeated numbers corresponding to the setting value, it is usually desirable for the decorative symbols to stop and be displayed as repeated numbers, but it is also desirable not to display the repeated numbers 5 or 6, which negate the high setting value, so it becomes possible to enjoy the reach performance from a different perspective than before.

It is also conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value explicit reach effect, can be executed only at specific timing. In this way, by limiting the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to specific timing, or executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the variable game executed at the specific timing.

The specific timing may be, for example, a timing when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 notify the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in a variable game performed in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, the reserved amount is consumed at high speed by the high frequency support mode, and the player can enjoy a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, which tends to be monotonous. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state or the time-limited game state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). That is, the non-set value may be indicated or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to the guaranteed variable play state, or when a player is stuck in a state where there are many variable play times before a jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or as a relief from being stuck. The predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable play times executed after transitioning to the time-saving play state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving play state (e.g., 90 to 100 times). In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or for a jackpot just before the time-saving play ends.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. Note that it is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any desired combination.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode in the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and based on the number of specific conditions satisfied (the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the roon device 37 within the specific period), at the ending of the jackpot game for which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Now, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period in the jackpot consecutive wins. Therefore, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of a jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, if the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first is not stored or recorded, it becomes difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first. That is, if the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded in the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to accurately memorize or record the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, which may result in the player giving up on identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). This undermines the significance of increasing the interest of the game by being able to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above, and specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience of presenting specific information multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is eliminated. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once for one predetermined period after the end of the predetermined period, so there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. As a result, the player can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once for one predetermined period, and is freed from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the specified period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball mouth of the Kluen device. Also, in one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the specified period) in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. In other words, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending additional image control process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game starts (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 40), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the control of the up and down movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 that receives the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the process of counting the number of game balls 99 that are retained in the game ball retention part 38 during the predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes), control of the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 and a process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 during a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213), and the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also executed on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes) based on the stopper portion down movement flag (step S2203), which is set on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played, for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

[7-segment display control process]
The seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the open/close execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the seven-segment display control process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order of the seven-segment display control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42), only the control order of the seven-segment display control information is read (step S2504). That is, in the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information) only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period, so there is no need to read the already-displayed information to control the seven-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in Fig. 50, the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 46), but step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is executed in response to a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Fig. 48), the initialization of the already displayed information storage area is executed in step S2405 without even determining that it is a 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information previously presented in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which all or part of specific information (numbers) for identifying or guessing a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a big win game) based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. Also, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to a number display order (see FIG. 36 ) that is determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when a set value is changed. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the number display order is fixed when numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In the first embodiment described above, when the multiple numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the set value is changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is changed, and the control order of segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding specified period, only a smaller amount of specific information than the already presented information is obtained, and new specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, there is a concern that interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, the number of specific conditions satisfied, and the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which the specific information is presented (the order in which the numbers are displayed and the order in which the segments are displayed) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which the specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding given period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a given period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and it is also possible to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) according to the number of specific conditions satisfied.

Note that the predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented can be, for example, winning a jackpot, the opening of a jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is played. This prevents the order in which the specific information is presented from becoming fixed, and prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly presented, or the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information each time a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to generate interest in the order in which the specific information is presented in a jackpot game, for example, and thus to increase interest in the jackpot game.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a jackpot in a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening/closing execution mode, or starting the ending of a jackpot game. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the number of times the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information is presented in relation to the specific information presented earlier, it becomes more difficult to identify all non-set values (identify the set values), and it is possible to prevent all non-set values from being identified early (identify the set values). This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set values are low.

The predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined or specific period. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) for each predetermined or specific period. It is therefore expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the order in which the specific information is presented, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be that a specific presentation is determined or executed as a variable game presentation. In this case, the specific presentation may be set to either a non-reach presentation or a reach presentation. Typically, the specific presentation may be a premium presentation in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed among the variable game presentations. Furthermore, the specific presentation may be a decorative pattern displayed in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341, or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display). For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed as "777" on the pattern display unit 341, or may be displayed as a specific reach-out number such as "767", or may be displayed as a specific non-reach-out number (variable number) such as "367", or may be displayed as a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that a development presentation will be executed when a development presentation such as a super reach presentation or a special reach presentation is executed as a reach presentation. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, a "7 Development 7" is displayed in which the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach state and a symbol such as "Development" is temporarily displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined period or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Other possible predetermined conditions include multiple consecutive single jackpots, or multiple consecutive presentations of the same specific information. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new specific information. This makes it easier to obtain new specific information, reducing the sense of boredom when new specific information is not available, and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the specified conditions are satisfied before the start of the specified period, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied first may be prioritized, or the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied last may be prioritized.

In one example of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values as specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is started (a specified period is started, a first jackpot game is started), and in accordance with these display orders, all or part of the numbers for identifying the multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the specified period has elapsed), when the end of the specified period is set.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. 51. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in Fig. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the jackpot game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game presentation start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game presentation is to be started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the jackpot game presentation start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and if the jackpot game presentation start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game presentation start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game presentation is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period is to start. Whether the jackpot is in the low probability mode can be judged by, for example, including probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low probability mode or the high probability mode in the jackpot game start command when the jackpot game is started, and by setting a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low probability mode to on or off based on the probability mode information in the command judgment process of FIG. 37 when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, and by checking the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command separate from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the jackpot is in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that starts a specified period), the MPU 51 transitions to step S2603. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not in low probability mode (step S2602: No), i.e., if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 obtains the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and terminates the display order setting process.

The display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36, similar to step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. The determined number display order is stored in the RAM 512.

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on a control order determination table for segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. 52. In this control order determination table, multiple control orders for segments A to G are defined by the value of the control priority type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. The control order of segments A to G is determined to be the same for each number from multiple control orders depending on the value of the control priority type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. The determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order for each number may be different. In other words, the control order for segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to third embodiments described above.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has elapsed).

However, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the specified period, it is expected that the player will wish to reconfirm the specific information in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by taking into account the specific information displayed in the past. It is also expected that when a player is replaced, the new player will wish to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, if the specific information is presented during the specified period, it is not presented outside the specified period, and so the new player will not be able to reconfirm the specific information.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during a special period other than the prescribed period, all or part of the specific information previously presented can be presented. In this way, by being able to present specific information previously presented during a special period other than the prescribed period, the player can check the specific information previously presented during the special period. That is, if the player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the prescribed period, the player can recheck the specific information previously displayed, and when a player is replaced, the new player can check the specific information presented to the previous player. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the specific information presented to the previous player, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, an example of a special period is a standby period (a state of waiting for customers) in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed. By having the special period be a standby period in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information previously presented in a state in which play is not being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of various effects performed by the pattern display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable play effects and jackpot play effects, from being obstructed.

When making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the standby state, it is also possible to make it a condition that a specific input operation, such as a password input operation or a command input operation, is performed on a specific display screen to which the player can move during the standby state. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the pattern display unit 341 at the ending or the like during a jackpot game in which the end of a specific period is set. The password or command may also be made available by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 during the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone, thereby transmitting it from an external server to the mobile device, so-called mobile linkage.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state on the condition that a specific input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, only players who can enter a password or command, i.e., only players to whom all or part of the specific information has been presented, can check all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and freeloading, whereby all or part of the specific information is checked by other players.

It is also possible to use a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be accessed in standby mode, thereby causing the mobile device to present all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past.

The special period may also be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the open/close execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during a jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented without the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being clearly indicated or suggested. This makes it possible to prevent the clear indication or suggestion of the result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since a jackpot game is played after the result in the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated as a jackpot through variable play, player interest tends to decrease, but by presenting specific information that was previously presented during such a jackpot game, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

The special period may also be set during variable play. In this case, the theoretical value is that the total time during which the game is played (the time during which the power is on in the gaming machine 10 minus the time in standby mode) is that the execution time of the variable play is longer than the execution time of the jackpot variable play. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during variable play, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during variable play, it is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state in which a reach presentation is not being executed as a variable play presentation, or when the change time is short. This makes it possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stopped display of the decorative pattern from being hindered.

In addition, the presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's discretion.

When past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. This makes it possible to impart an element of surprise to the gaming machine 10. In addition, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player having to perform any operations on the gaming machine 10, even a player with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can learn specific information that has been presented in the past. This ensures fairness between players.

Here, examples of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the execution of a specific reach performance at a certain rate (including 100%) when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, and determining to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery performed at a specific timing of a variable game or a big win game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select a gaming machine 10 for executing a game from vacant machines while taking into consideration the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting a gaming machine 10 for executing a game is improved. Also, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of a specific reach performance when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, the presentation of the past specific information serves as a pre-notification performance for the execution of the specific reach performance, so that the interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable that the presentation of past specific information in variable play can be performed as an expectation suggestion effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the expectation (reliability) in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation (reliability). In this case as well, interest in variable play is increased. Furthermore, when past specific information is presented by a lottery performed at a specific timing in variable play or jackpot play, the past specific information is presented at a specific random timing determined by the gaming machine 10, which can add a special element of surprise to the game. Furthermore, when the player knows the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the presentation of past specific information during a special period is executed at the player's will, the player does not have to passively wait for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, but can actively check the past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference during the special period. Therefore, when multiple non-set values (set values) are identified or inferred in consideration of past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information reflects the player's will without being restricted by the gaming machine 10, improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of past specific information during a special period being executed at the player's will is the presentation of previously presented specific information when a player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the like during a special period set in standby mode, during variable play, or during a jackpot play.

In one example of this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game (prescribed period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the multiple non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed, and during the standby period (special period), by performing a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the end of the last three jackpot games is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Note that in this example of the embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or command.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, FIG. 53 is an oblique view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that, when pressed by the player in a standby state described below, changes the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen during the standby state screen transition process in Figs. 61 and 62 described below (see Fig. 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d that switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 as shown in Fig. 54. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described below. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts player operations on the touch keys may be provided as an operation means. Furthermore, in place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a translucent touch panel that accepts player operations may be provided on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a jog dial may be provided. Although the selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact switches, they may be, for example, piezoelectric elements as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player.

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt process of this embodiment, in addition to the same processes (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above, an operation detection process (step S2701) and a standby state screen transition process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), a decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and a decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first detection flag to the third detection flag as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two states prior is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Figs. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to ON. If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is set to ON, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times that the operation button operation continuation command is transmitted in succession. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button presentation based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is on, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, the operation states of the operation button 20 three times are reflected, so that erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag, and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an up selection button operation process, a down selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation process>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the up selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "lower selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three operations. Since the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the decision button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the decision button 21B has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed at 2702 of the sub timer interrupt process, in the standby state where neither variable play nor big win play is being executed, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is transitioned in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B, and a process is executed that enables the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the symbol display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the display of the changing decorative symbols is stopped, if the reserved number N and reserved number M are "0" and the game does not transition to a jackpot game state, the change stop screen in which the changing of the decorative symbols has stopped is maintained. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the change stop screen is displayed, the display screen transitions from the change stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a destination display screen and include multiple selectable items (destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen displayed as "7-segment display history," a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a character selection screen displayed as "character selection," a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displayed as "character customization," and a change stop screen transition image for transitioning to a change stop screen displayed as "back."

The cursor image is an image that indicates which of multiple selectable items is currently tentatively selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image to the right of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is the tentatively selected item. In the example shown in FIG. 60, it indicates that "7-segment display history" is tentatively selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the tentatively selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the other screen transition images to emphasize that it is tentatively selected. Note that the tentatively selected item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, the provisionally selected item (destination display screen) is confirmed by operating the decision button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to that item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history," operating the decision button 21B causes the display screen to transition from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display history selection screen is a screen that can be switched to a history screen on which the contents of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a specified period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the last three specified periods, and includes a 1-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period one period ago are displayed, a 2-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period two periods ago are displayed, and a 3-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period three periods ago are displayed. Each history screen includes a history image in the same form as the additional image (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending of a jackpot game. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one specified period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that imitate the 7-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that the number 2 was displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a game ball 99 entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the previous specified period, and segments A to C were then lit up.

The 7-segment display history selection screen also includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection, a 1-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 1-back history screen displaying "History 1 (1 back)," a 2-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 2-back history screen displaying "History 2 (2 back)," a 3-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 3-back history screen displaying "History 3 (3 back)," and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to a fluctuation stop screen displaying "End." Then, by operating the decision button 21B on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen) is decided, and a transition is made to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, when the player provisionally selects the 1-back history screen transition image of "History 1 (1 back)," and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1-back history screen. Furthermore, when "History 2 (2 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen. Furthermore, when "End" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, the player can select to move from the 7-segment display history selection screen to either the previous history screen, the previous two history screens, or the previous three history screens. In other words, the player can check the history information he or she desires by moving to the history screen he or she desires. This allows the history to be checked effectively while avoiding checking history information that has been checked previously or information with a small amount of information, thereby making history checking efficient.

In addition, in this embodiment, information for identifying non-set values at the end of a big win game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the pattern display unit 341, where the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when information for identifying non-set values is displayed, the visibility of the image effects executed on the pattern display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, which is different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the pattern display unit 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the pattern display unit 341. In addition, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to check the history information by performing the same operations as those for performing various settings, and the convenience of checking the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, the player can move from multiple history screens to a history screen that is selected by the player, but it is also possible to have multiple pieces of history information displayed simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since a large amount of history can be checked at once, the presented content can also be checked efficiently.

In addition, when the character screen transition image of "character selection" is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen transitions to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "character customization" is selected, the display screen transitions to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc., of the character.

In addition, if the "Back" image for transitioning to the stop-change screen is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the stop-change screen.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the display history on the seven-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods can be confirmed by operating the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state. This allows the player to reconfirm the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a big win game, and also allows the new player to check the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 when a player is replaced. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, Fig. 61 and Fig. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55. Below, the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 judges that it is in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37, is set to OFF (step S3101: No) and the big win game presentation flag, which is set to ON when the display variable pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 in the big win game presentation process of step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. 34, is set to OFF (step S3102: No). On the other hand, the MPU 51 judges that it is not in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or the big win game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the screen is in a standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3103, and if the screen is not in a standby state (steps S3101 or S3102 are Yes), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 described later when the display screen is shifted from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the variable stop screen is shifted to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in Fig. 62 described later, when the display screen is shifted from the one-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the one-back history screen processing of step S3113, when the display screen is shifted from the two-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the two-back history screen processing of step S3115, and when the display screen is shifted from the three-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-back history screen processing of step S3117. Note that the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the display of the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3108 in FIG. 62.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the operation button 20 has been performed when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to a top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen and the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag to ON, indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), sets the change-stop screen flag to OFF, indicating that the display screen is the change-stop screen (step S3107), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in Fig. 62, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Fig. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen process, the provisionally selected item is changed in response to an operation of the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen process, when the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted to a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character customization screen. In addition, when the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the shift destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is a 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. The details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the one-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a two-back history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the two-back history screen is set to ON (step S3114). The two-back history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the two-back history screen in step S3215 of the seven-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the two-back history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115, and if the two-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the second previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the 3-previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3-previous history screen is set to ON (step S3116). The 6-previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3-previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the 3-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117, and if the 3-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the other screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen shift processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to ON (step S3120) and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all screen flags are OFF, the state transitions from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, and it can be determined that the display screen is the variable stop screen, so the variable stop screen flag is set to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, a process is executed to transition the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to a fluctuation stop screen, a one-time history screen, a two-time history screen, or a three-time history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Fig. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second up selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the up selection button 211 has been started, and is set to ON in the up selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing in Fig. 56. If the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and if the second up selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when an operation of the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started, and is set to ON in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of Fig. 56. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the decision button operation detection pattern judgment process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208, and if the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the provisionally selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (1 previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2 previous history screen flag to on (step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 times back)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the provisionally selected item is "History 3 (3 times back)", and therefore changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 times back history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), sets the 3 times back history screen flag to on (step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to any of the 1-back history screen, 2-back history screen, and 3-back history screen, and all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 for the past three predetermined periods can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he/she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game, and when the player is replaced, the new player can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable play is executed by shooting the game ball 99, the display screen will not be switched from the history screen (the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen) to another screen such as a variable stop screen, unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation. Therefore, the player can carefully and carefully check the specific information that was previously displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at his own pace by stopping the shooting of the game ball 99 and maintaining the standby state, without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at the end of a big win game. This allows the player to carefully consider at his own pace when identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information that can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. In other words, it may be possible to check the specific information for the past one, two, or four or more predetermined periods.

Furthermore, the display of past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as the display means has a display function. For example, past specific information may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, or on a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the seven-segment display unit 39, such as a display unit provided separately for displaying past specific information. Furthermore, if there is a display unit provided for executing part of a presentation such as a variable game presentation, separate from the symbol display unit 341, it is also conceivable to display past information on that display unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, to the extent applicable, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to fourth embodiments described above.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed during a prescribed period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

When the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values, all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become control targets, so that the numbers (non-set values) that are to be displayed can be identified. It is also possible to grasp the numbers that are to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. Also, when segment A, the first control target, is turned on, the candidates for the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". When segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is either "5" or "6". When segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. When segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player can recognize the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, control of the segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed is not started until all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed is started. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the end of a jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values are dispensed in small amounts each time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to one of the non-set values is displayed in a specific period that has already elapsed, it is possible that the number will be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the set value from the multiple non-set values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a number of information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display unit displays information (numbers) that identifies the non-set value. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighted state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (lighted out state) in which specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. In this way, when the information display unit is in either of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and information that can infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

There are no particular limitations on the non-set value display means, but examples include a display device having a group of lamps that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having multiple 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, and a plasma display. Also, as a non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means that displays a variably decorated pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is displayed, and the information display section that was previously displayed in at least the specified period is displayed until the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. For example, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period. In this way, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period, so that it can be confirmed at any time during at least the specific period in the specified period. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the specific period earlier in the same specified period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and when identifying or inferring a set value.

The information display section that is in a displayed state during a specific period may be kept in a constantly displayed state for the specified period and until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period, or may be kept in a displayed state only during the jackpot game, or may be kept in a displayed state only for the specific period.

In one example of this embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units numbered 1 to 6, by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the special out ball hole of the Kluen device during a specific period, the individual lamp units numbered with a number corresponding to a non-set value are turned on at the point where the lamp lighting lottery is won, without having to wait for the specific period to pass. Then, during the specified period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 64 to 71. Note that Figures 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the lighting on and off of the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A instead of the gaming ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the gaming board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment described above.

The special out ball discharge unit 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration in which the stopper unit 383 is omitted in the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention unit 38 except that the stopper unit 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge unit 38A, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that identifies non-set values, and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (line) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. As can be seen from FIG. 66, this allows the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on and off individually.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1, and when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 1, and game setting value 1 is negated as the set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 2, and game setting value 2 is negated as the set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 3, and game setting value 3 is negated as the set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 4, and game setting value 4 is negated as the set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 5 is negated as the set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value 6 is negated as the set value.

In other words, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351-356 that are turned on correspond to multiple non-set values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as the set value. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351-356 that corresponds to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to the one individual lamp unit 351-356 that is turned off corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352-356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 2-6 and the set value is identified as 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353-356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 3-6 and the set value is identified as 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354-356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 2, 4-6 and the set value is identified as 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Hereinafter, the procedure of the set value suggestion process will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Fig. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting an ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for starting an ending performance based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356. That is, every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

In the first embodiment described above, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In order to display five numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39, the seven segments A to G must be controlled five times each, so a specific condition must be met 35 times (7 x 5 times) or more. In other words, 35 game balls 99 must enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes, the on state and the off state. Therefore, in order to make the lamp display unit 35 display the five non-set values so that the set value can be recognized, it is sufficient that the specific condition is satisfied five or more times. Also, in this embodiment, a crane device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Therefore, if the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the non-set values will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

In this embodiment, the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is that the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and that the lamp lighting lottery is won. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of achieving the specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values is adjusted. This adjusts the difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35, and prevents the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., the set values from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351-356 is the same or approximately the same as the degree of difficulty for displaying five numbers by the seven-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, or the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 may be different from the other individual lamp units 351-356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit is stabilized, and a game feature is provided in which the probability is stabilized. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 x (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% to 20%). This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, so that in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, if the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery to light one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the multiple non-set values is a lottery condition that is different from the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set according to the difficulty of achieving this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set low, and the higher the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set. In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the difficulty of achieving a specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as a lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, a game feature is provided in which there is variation in the probability that the individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, it is possible to set the winning probability lower for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is later in the control order. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is earlier in the control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305. If the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value process.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already-lit lamp information is information related to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are currently lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in FIG. 68(B) and FIG. 68(C). The already-lit lamp flag information is composed of a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit or not, a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit or not, a third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit or not, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit or not, a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit or not, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit or not. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when they are not lit. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second already-lit lamp flag is set to ON, and the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF, indicating that the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 judges whether all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, when all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the setting value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, when there is an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If the already-lit lamp information includes an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control sequence is set by a procedure similar to that of the display sequence setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed, the lamp control sequence is determined by referring to the lamp control sequence determination table based on the setting value stored in RAM 412. This lamp control sequence determination table is similar to the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display sequence determination table can be thought of as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display sequence A1 is determined, the control sequence of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the number display sequence determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display sequence will be selected is the same, and in the lamp control sequence determination table in this embodiment, the probability that each lamp control sequence will be selected is also the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but may also be set when a specified period begins. Also, the lamp control order does not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the already-lit lamp information is set to all already-lit lamp flags off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. 68(B), if the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit up, the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on as shown in FIG. 68(C).

In this way, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In other words, in this embodiment, even before the specific period has elapsed, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In this way, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set to one of two states, a lit state and an unlit state, making it possible to identify a non-set value by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify a non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356, and information that can infer a non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

<Step S3311>
If the ending presentation start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and if the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 if any of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit (step S3313), and further clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off in the case of a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, specific information that specifies a non-set value. As a result, there is no risk of forgetting previously presented specific information during the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

In this embodiment, when the player wins the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values in the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. However, the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values may be turned on when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment described above. In this way, when the lamp lighting lottery is not performed, it is possible to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by increasing the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, or by dividing the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 into a route detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in this embodiment, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 that present non-set values are in one of two states, a lit state or an unlit state, and information identifying the non-set value is presented based on the type (number) of the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351-356, and information that can infer the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the lit individual lamp units 351-356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period, the specific information that identifies the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same specified period will not be forgotten, and the convenience of identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and therefore identifying or guessing the set value, is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 include winning the lamp lighting lottery in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37. This adjusts the difficulty of achieving the specific conditions according to the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and adjusts the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values. Therefore, the difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

The lamps are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, but the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37) is clearly displayed to the player, the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. 69(B2), and further, information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 is clearly displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as shown in FIG. 69(C1) or FIG. 69(C2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 may be lit, that is, an image is displayed to draw attention to the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is being executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the pattern display unit 341, even if the game ball 99 has been missed entering the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 allows the player to understand that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be lit.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that will be turned on is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In the example shown, it is displayed that the second individual lamp unit 352 will be turned on. In this way, by displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to know whether the individual lamp units 351-356 will be turned on not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the pattern display unit 341, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open/close execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit is continuously displayed. That is, the individual lamp sections 351-356 of the individual lamp sections 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display section 341. Note that, for example, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit during the jackpot game (at least during the open/close execution mode) may be displayed until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the specified period is set.

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, an image is displayed indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, while a jackpot game is being played (at least while the open/close execution mode is being played), information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is continuously displayed by the pattern display unit 341, so that the lit individual lamp units 351-356 can be confirmed on the pattern display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35, improving convenience.

The specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display unit 341, rather than in the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the pattern display unit 341. In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the presentation in the pattern display unit 341 related to the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (open/close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for identifying a non-set value may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, an image imitating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed as an ending additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), it is clearly indicated that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit on the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in FIG. 70(B), it is clearly indicated that the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit on the lamp display unit 35, and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. In this way, the pattern display unit 341 displays the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35 in the ending of the jackpot game, so that the on/off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit up until the jackpot game can be confirmed, improving convenience.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 is configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line), but the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other configurations can also be used. For example, it is possible to use a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), or a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B). Furthermore, the lamp display unit 35 may be configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

In addition, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which multiple seven-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, etc. may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

Sixth embodiment
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a case was described in which at least a part of non-set values other than the set values that determine the jackpot probability at the ending of a jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 depending on the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Klue device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game.

In some gaming machines, the continuous device for operating special features is activated when a conditional device is activated by the decorative symbols stopping and displaying in a winning combination during variable play, and the continuous device for operating special features activates a special electric feature in succession, making it possible to win a large number of game balls.

Here, a "condition device" refers to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of a reel successive operation device, and which is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed (a combination corresponding to a jackpot (for example, a repeating number) and decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state). A "reel successive operation device" refers to a special device that can continuously operate special electric reels. The "condition device" and "reel successive operation device" are comprehensive conceptual devices, and in this embodiment are realized by, for example, the MPU 41 (which executes control to realize the device) of the main control device 4, the ROM 411 (which stores the control program to realize the device), the RAM 412 (which is used for control to realize the device), and various devices driven by the control program.

The term "special electric device" refers to an electric device that opens or enlarges the entrance to the large prize opening. In this embodiment, the "special electric device" includes, for example, the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable prize opening 316.

In addition, there are gaming machines that have a relatively long time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "preparation time") from the activation of the condition device when decorative symbols are displayed in a winning combination during variable play to the activation of the consecutive reel operation device (start of the winning play or opening and closing execution mode).

However, if the preparation time is long, i.e. if the time between when the decorative symbols stop and when the opening and closing execution mode starts is long, it will be a waste of time for the player, and it is expected that interest in playing such a gaming machine will decrease. In particular, if the closing time of the gaming hall is approaching or there is a limit to the amount of time that can be played due to personal circumstances, a slow start of the opening and closing execution mode may cause feelings of irritation and discomfort, resulting in a negative impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a first moving path and a second moving path are provided that have different times (difficulty of operating the consecutive device) from the launch of the game ball to the activation of the consecutive device. The player can select whether to move the game ball along the first moving path or the second moving path. The player can select the first moving path or the second moving path by, for example, adjusting the launch strength of the game ball. When the first moving path is selected, the consecutive device can be activated in a short time from the launch of the game ball. On the other hand, when the second moving path is selected, the activation of the consecutive device by the game ball launched along the second moving path is delayed, for example, by a delay means that limits or delays the fall of the game ball on the game board. A significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive device between the first moving path and the second moving path. In this way, the player can select whether to move the game ball along the first or second moving path, which can provide a significant difference in preparation time. By selecting a moving path that can shorten the preparation time (the consecutive operation device of the role object can be immediately operated), the time from when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state to when the opening and closing execution mode is started can be shortened at the player's will. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the opening and closing execution mode is started, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the player's playing time is limited, by selecting a moving path that can shorten the preparation time, it is possible to suppress feelings such as irritation and discomfort due to the delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents a bad impression of the game machine. In addition, the delay means that limits or delays the fall of the game ball on the game board can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball passes through (is entered into) a first predetermined area (first ball entry area) provided on the first moving path or a second predetermined area (second ball entry area) provided on the second moving path in a specified game state, a jackpot game is generated after a specified determination process is performed.

Here, the predetermined game state includes a state in which a jackpot game can occur, and is determined to be, for example, a state in which the condition device is operating, a state in which the detection of the passage (entry) of the game ball in the first predetermined area (first entry area) is not restricted when the game ball passes (enters) the first predetermined area (first entry area), a state in which the detection of the passage (entry) of the game ball in the second predetermined area (second entry area) is not restricted when the game ball passes (enters) the second predetermined area (second entry area), a state after the game ball is detected in the first movement path or the second movement path, a state after a jackpot is announced by a presentation means such as a pattern display unit (for example, a state after a combination of jackpot patterns is displayed statically in the pattern display unit, a state after a rainbow lamp presentation is executed in the illumination unit, a state after a jackpot confirmation sound or confirmation voice is output from a speaker), a state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being executed, etc.

In addition, the predetermined judgment process may be, for example, a judgment process for judging whether or not a jackpot game can be generated. Specifically, the predetermined judgment process judges whether or not a condition device is activated, whether or not the generation of a jackpot game is restricted by the passage of a game ball through a first predetermined area (first ball entry area) when the game ball passes through (enters) the first predetermined area (first ball entry area), whether or not the generation of a jackpot game is restricted by the passage of a game ball through a second predetermined area (second ball entry area) when the game ball passes (enters) the second predetermined area (second ball entry area), whether or not the flow of the game ball is delayed for a predetermined time or more by a delay means such as a Krun device, whether or not a combination of jackpot patterns is displayed in a stopped state on the pattern display unit, whether or not a variable game is being played, whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and the like.

In this way, the predetermined judgment process is a process for judging whether or not a jackpot game can be generated, so that when a game ball enters the first predetermined area (first ball entry area) or the second predetermined area (second ball entry area), a jackpot game is generated when a jackpot game can be generated, and unnecessary occurrence of a jackpot game is restricted when a jackpot game cannot be generated.

In particular, when the specified judgment process is a judgment process of whether or not the occurrence of a jackpot game is restricted by the passage of a game ball through a first specified area (first ball entry area) when the game ball passes (is entered) through a first specified area (first ball entry area), or whether or not the occurrence of a jackpot game is restricted by the passage of a game ball through a second specified area (second ball entry area) when the game ball passes (is entered) through a second specified area (second ball entry area), if the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected in a state in which a jackpot game can be generated, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the other moving path is restricted, thereby preventing a jackpot game from being generated by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the generation of a jackpot game by the passage of the game ball into a specified area (ball entry area) provided on one moving path. This prevents a special game from being generated by a game ball traveling along a path contrary to the player's will after the path that will cause the special game to occur has been selected, i.e., prevents the special game from being generated at an unintended time (timing).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a player selects a travel route in which the operation of the consecutive device operation device is delayed, it is possible to use the preparation time to cause various events to occur. In this way, when a player selects a travel route that requires a long preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing the player to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest to the player, by generating events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the continuous operation device of the accessory can be operated by shooting a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) on the second movement path where the movement of the game ball is delayed, while the continuous operation device of the accessory can be operated by shooting more game balls (for example, four to five balls) on the first movement path than on the second movement path. In this way, since the continuous operation device of the accessory can be operated by shooting a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) on the second movement path, a decrease in the "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), is prevented, and as a result, a disadvantage caused by the player selecting the second movement path R2 is prevented. On the other hand, since the continuous operation device of the accessory can be operated by shooting more game balls (for example, four to five balls) on the first movement path than on the second movement path, the continuous operation device of the accessory can be operated within a few seconds from the start of shooting the game balls. This allows the continuous operation device of the accessory to be activated in a short time after the ball is shot onto the first moving path, eliminating the frustration and stress caused by the long wait time for the continuous operation device to be activated. In addition, in order to prevent the generation of wasted balls, the shooting of the game balls is stopped after each ball is shot, a so-called stop shot, which can be used to minimize the generation of wasted balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player can select either the first movement path or the second movement path by adjusting the launch strength (launch strength) of the game ball. In this way, by allowing the player to select whether the game ball will be moved to the first movement path or the second movement path, the player can select the length of the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the role continuous operation device. Also, by allowing the player to select either the first movement path or the second movement path depending on the launch strength of the game ball, the length of the preparation time can be easily selected.

It is also possible to prevent the player from selecting whether to move the gaming ball along the first or second moving path, and have the gaming machine 10 select the path instead. In this way, the gaming machine 10 selects whether to move the gaming ball along the first or second moving path, and the preparation time from the operation of the condition device to the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role, i.e., the time until the jackpot game starts, is determined by the gaming machine 10. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the timing when the jackpot game starts, increasing the interest of the game.

Here, examples of events executed during the preparation time include the granting of a bonus, the granting of the right to grant this bonus, the execution of a predetermined effect such as a special effect, and the activation of game settings. Examples of the bonus granted include the presentation of performance information that is an index of the ball-out performance described above (for example, a set value, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, and the explicit or suggested number of unit jackpot lottery draws) (presentation of information that allows game information to be recognized or guessed). By presenting performance information that is an index of ball-out performance such as information that allows game information to be recognized or guessed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the ball-out performance such as a set value, which increases the interest of the game. Examples of special effects (predetermined effects) include, for example, a replay of the jackpot effect executed in the variable game that triggered the activation of the condition device, the appearance of a premium character, the display of an image that allows game information to be recognized or guessed, and a game explanation effect for the progress of the game during the preparation time. Examples of game settings that are enabled include selection settings for various effects executed in a jackpot game, such as selection of music to be output from the speaker 26 during a jackpot game and adjustment of the volume of the music, and selection of characters that appear during a jackpot game. In this way, by enabling the settings for various effects executed during a jackpot game, the need to configure various game settings during a jackpot game can be reduced, making it possible to fully enjoy the jackpot game effects.

In addition, an event executed during preparation time may be generated when a specific condition is met during a specific time (event generation right grant period) set during preparation time, or an event of a level or content may be generated according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the specific time. In this way, by making the satisfaction of a specific condition during preparation time a condition for an event to occur, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is met during preparation time, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In particular, by generating an event of a level or content according to the number of specific conditions that are met during preparation time, it is possible to focus not only on whether or not a specific condition is met, but also on the number of specific conditions that are met, thereby further increasing the interest in the game. In addition, when an event of a level or content according to the number of specific conditions that are met during preparation time is generated, the event content can be diversified, making it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

Examples of specific conditions include the passage of the game ball 99 through a specific area (e.g., a predetermined area set in a special device such as the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the through gate 317, or a special device such as a crane device or a rotating body), and the acquisition of rights that can be acquired through a right acquisition performance (predetermined performance) executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc. Examples of the number of specific conditions that are met include the number of game balls 99 that pass through a specific area, the number of balls dispensed, the points that can be acquired through a right acquisition performance, etc., the number of coins, money, power, game level, distance, the number of characters, and other numerical indicators that can be correlated to numbers. Examples of right acquisition performances include numerical indicator acquisition performances (predetermined performances) such as point acquisition game performances executed in the pattern display unit, etc. Examples of point acquisition game performances include performances in which a coin acquisition game, a mission achievement game, a battle game, a quiz game, a prediction game, etc. are executed. There is only need to be a correlation between the numerical index and the number of times a specific condition is met. For example, it may correspond to the situation where one specific condition is met for one point, or the situation where one specific condition is met for each specific point other than one point. By correlating the number of specific conditions with the numerical index in this way, the content of the event can be diversified, and for example, the event can be executed as a point acquisition presentation such as a game presentation. This can further increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, events executed during the preparation time (predetermined effects such as special effects and rights acquisition effects) are forcibly terminated based on the passage (entry of a ball) of a game ball through a predetermined area (entry area) where a jackpot game can be generated by the passage (entry of a ball) of the game ball. Specifically, a game effect as a predetermined effect is forcibly terminated when the role continuous operation device is activated (a jackpot game occurs) by the passage (entry of a ball) of a game ball through the second role consecutive operation gate as the second predetermined area (second entry area). In this way, events such as a predetermined effect are terminated by the operation of the role continuous operation device, so that a jackpot game effect can be executed appropriately without being disturbed by the execution of an event such as a predetermined effect. In addition, a player can terminate an event such as a predetermined effect at the player's will by passing (entering) a game ball through the predetermined area (entry area) to activate the role continuous operation device. This allows players to end the event early and activate the continuous role-playing device (to generate a jackpot) at various times, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if an event such as a predetermined performance is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive role operation device (occurrence of a big win game), the event may be re-executed if a predetermined condition is met. In this case, the re-execution of the event such as the predetermined performance may be performed from the continuation of the forcibly terminated part, and the event may be re-executed until the end of the scheduled event. In this way, by re-executing the event such as the predetermined performance from the continuation of the forcibly terminated part until the end, the event is executed until the end, and the profit that the player should have obtained is guaranteed. Of course, when an event is forcibly terminated, the event may be re-executed from the beginning and executed until the scheduled end. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the event in a continuous manner without interruption. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game by the predetermined performance.

In addition, events such as predetermined effects may be executed during a specific period set from the end of notification that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot through variable play (decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state with a combination of jackpot symbols) until the game ball passes through a specific area, and may be re-executed when a jackpot game occurs. In this way, events such as predetermined effects are executed during a specific period, and the event is re-executed when a jackpot game is executed, making it possible to execute events such as predetermined effects in jackpot games. In other words, if an event such as a predetermined effect is interrupted midway due to the game ball passing through the specified area, it becomes possible to execute the event in the jackpot game that is generated by the game ball passing through the specified area. This makes it possible to re-execute the event immediately after the end of the event when the event such as the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, shortening the time that the event such as the predetermined effect is interrupted, and even if the event is forcibly terminated midway, the event is executed without any discomfort, just as if it were executed continuously to the end.

In addition, examples of the predetermined conditions for replaying a forcibly terminated event include a specific jackpot game generated by the operation of the continuous accessory operation device. Specifically, the specific jackpot game generated by the operation of the continuous accessory operation device as a predetermined condition is, for example, a guaranteed jackpot game, a 16R (guaranteed guaranteed) jackpot game (a jackpot game with a long play time (a specified number of rounds (e.g. 7 to 10) or more are played)), a 5R guaranteed jackpot game, or a (5R) normal jackpot game.

When a specific jackpot game is played, an event such as a predetermined performance is replayed, and the predetermined performance is replayed as a bonus for playing the specific jackpot game. Furthermore, when the specific jackpot game is a guaranteed jackpot game, it is possible to further grant the bonus of replaying an event such as a forcibly terminated predetermined performance as a bonus for a jackpot game that is favorable to the player. Furthermore, when the specific jackpot game is a jackpot game in which many (a specified number or more) rounds of play are played, such as a 16R guaranteed jackpot, it is possible to effectively replay an event such as a predetermined performance by utilizing the length of the play time. Furthermore, when the specific jackpot game is a normal jackpot game, it is possible to replay an event such as a predetermined performance as a bonus for a jackpot game that is unfavorable to the player.

The re-execution of an event such as a predetermined effect may be performed at the opening, open/close execution mode, or ending of a jackpot game, and may be performed across two or more of these periods. Of course, the re-execution of an event such as a predetermined effect may be performed at a time other than a jackpot game. Also, possible predetermined conditions for re-executing an event such as a predetermined effect include the passing (entering) of a game ball through a predetermined area (entering area) where a jackpot game can be generated by the passing (entering) of the game ball, or the cessation of shooting of game balls 99 for a certain period of time. By setting these as the predetermined conditions for the re-execution of a predetermined effect, it becomes possible for the player to intentionally re-execute a predetermined effect, etc.

In addition, when the specified presentation as an event is a numerical indicator acquisition presentation such as a game presentation, if the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed again, the numerical indicators acquired during the specific period may be carried over, or the numerical indicators may be acquired from 0.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 72 to 88.

In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a condition device is activated by displaying decorative symbols in a jackpot combination in a variable game, and when the condition device is activated, a game ball passes through a first consecutive role operation gate G1 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first consecutive role operation gate") or a second consecutive role operation gate G2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second consecutive role operation gate") described below, which activates a consecutive role operation device, and a jackpot game in which a large number of game balls can be won is executed by continuously operating the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning port 316 due to the operation of this consecutive role operation device. In other words, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a jackpot game based on the passage (entry) of a game ball 99 through the first consecutive role operation gate G1 or the second consecutive role operation gate G2, which are a predetermined area (ball entry area).

Here, FIG. 72 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the main part of the game board shown in FIG. 72. In addition, in the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, the crane device 37 and the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above are omitted. In addition, in the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, the variable winning opening 316 is provided below the second winning opening 316 (below the center of the game board 31), and the main display section 36 is provided in the lower right part of the game board 31, but the roles and functions of the variable winning opening 316 and the main display section 36 are basically the same as those in the first embodiment described above. However, while the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316 in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable that the game balls 99 shot into at least the left area of the game board 31 and shot into the third movement path R3 can enter the variable winning opening 316 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. Of course, among the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31, game balls 99 shot into at least one of the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2 described below may also be allowed to enter.

As shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a branching section 48 is provided between the decorative section 310 provided above the pattern display section 341 and the outer rail 312. The branching section 48 defines the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2 as the movement path of the gaming ball 99 that is shot into the right area of the gaming board 31. The decorative section 310 and the branching section 48 are formed by, for example, assembling a member made of resin or the like to the gaming board 31. The gaming machine 10 further includes a first role-linked operation gate G1 through which the gaming ball 99 moving on the first movement path R1 can pass, a second role-linked operation gate G2 through which the gaming ball 99 moving on the second movement path R2 can pass, and a one-hole crane device 60 arranged above the second role-linked operation gate G2.

The first moving path R1 is defined between the decorative part 310 and the branching part 48, and defines the moving path of the game ball 99 that is launched with a relatively low strength among the game balls 99 that are launched into the right area of the game board 31. The first moving path R1 is further defined by a separation nail 481 and a guide nail 482 on the downstream side of the moving direction of the game ball 99, and the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 guide the game ball 99 moving on the first moving path R1 to the first role-linked operation gate G1. The separation nail 481 is arranged in a row from the downstream position of the end on the downstream side of the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the branching part 48 to the upper left of the one-hole crane device 60 described later, which is the lower right of the first role-linked operation gate G1. The guide nail 482 is arranged in a row from the downstream position of the end on the downstream side of the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the decorative part 310 to the upper left of the first role-linked operation gate G1. In addition, the guide nail 482 is provided with a drop portion 483 that is spaced apart from the diameter of the game ball 99. Therefore, if the game ball 99 moving along the first moving path R1 does not pass through the drop portion 483, it passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1, and if it passes through the drop portion 483, it does not pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1. In other words, the game ball 99 shot out along the first moving path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Note that instead of the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482, a resin member or the like can be used to perform the same role as the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the game balls 99 that pass through the first role link operation gate G1 and the game balls 99 that pass through the drop portion 483 without passing through the first role link operation gate G1 among the game balls 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 is set, for example, from a range of 1:1 to 1:10, preferably from a range of 1:2 to 1:5, and typically set to about 1:3 to 4. In other words, the probability that the game balls 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 pass through the first role link operation gate G1 is set, for example, from a range of 1/2 to 1/11, preferably from a range of 1/3 to 1/6, and typically set to about 1/4 to 1/5. By setting the probability that the game balls 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 pass through the first role link operation gate G1 to such a range, when the game balls 99 are shot out continuously, the game balls 99 can pass through the first role link operation gate G1 in about a few seconds. This allows the game ball 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 to pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1 while suppressing stress on the player, and the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1. In addition, by performing a so-called stop shot, which stops the shooting of the game ball 99 after each game ball 99 is shot in order to suppress the generation of wasted balls, it is possible to minimize the generation of wasted balls and enjoy the game by focusing on whether a single game ball 99 moving on the first moving path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1.

The drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 may be omitted. In other words, the probability that the game ball 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 may be set to 100%. In this way, by setting the probability that the game ball 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 to 100%, it becomes possible to pass the game ball 99 through the first role-linked operation gate G1 by shooting at least one game ball 99. This allows the role-linked operation device to be operated without generating wasted balls, preventing a decrease in the "base", which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). As a result, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring when the player selects the first moving path R1.

Also, the general winning opening may be located at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter. In this way, by locating the general winning opening at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter, the wasted balls that occur when the game ball 99 shot out on the first moving path R1 passes through the drop portion 483 without passing through the first role link operation gate G1 can be compensated for by the prize balls (e.g. 5 to 10 balls per win) for the game ball 99 entering the general winning opening. This prevents the base from decreasing, and as a result, prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage by selecting the first moving path R1.

In addition, a first route detection sensor Rs1 is provided on the first movement path R1 upstream of the first role-linked operation gate G1. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the first movement path R1. This first route detection sensor Rs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (high-frequency transmission type sensor, electrostatic capacitance sensor, magnetic sensor), etc. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). In other words, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the first movement path R1 based on the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1.

However, in this embodiment, as described later with reference to FIG. 77 as the sensor detection process in the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control unit 4, the MPU 41 detects that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement path R1 when the condition device is activated (the condition device activation flag is set to on) and neither the first role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag nor the second role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is on. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement path R1 if the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before it is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2.

The first role-linked operation gate G1 provides an opportunity for the game ball 99 to pass through and activate the role-linked operation device. This first role-linked operation gate G1 penetrates vertically to allow the game ball 99 to pass through the first moving path R1. The first role-linked operation gate G1 has a first role-linked operation gate sensor Gs1 (hereinafter also referred to as the "first role-linked gate sensor") that can detect the passage of the game ball 99. The first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (high-frequency transmission type sensor, electrostatic capacitance sensor, magnetic sensor), etc., and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 based on the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1.

Here, in the sensor detection process executed by the main control device 4 in FIG. 77 described later, when the condition device is activated and the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is not set to on, the MPU 41 judges whether the game ball 99 has passed through the first role gate operation gate G1 when the first role gate sensor Gs1 detects the passage of the game ball 99. That is, when the condition state is activated, the MPU 41 judges whether the game ball 99 has passed through the first role gate operation gate G1 on the condition that the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2. Then, when the game ball 99 is shot out on the first moving path R1, the game ball 99 passes through the first role gate operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Therefore, it is possible to pass the game ball 99 through the first role gate operation gate G1 in a short time (for example, about a few seconds) from the start of the shot of the game ball 99 on the first moving path R1, and to operate the role continuous operation device. As a result, if the player selects the first movement path R1, it becomes possible to start the jackpot game in a short time from the start of the shot. In other words, by selecting the first movement path R1, the player can start the jackpot game early after the variable game ends when the condition device is activated by the jackpot pattern combination being displayed stationary on the pattern display unit 341. As a result, by selecting the first movement path R1, the player can secure more opportunities to receive the jackpot lottery without wasting the remaining game time, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching or there is a limit to the game time due to personal circumstances. Also, even if the player does not wish to execute the setting value suggestion performance described later (speculation of the setting value), the player can start the jackpot game early without wasting time by selecting the first movement path R1.

On the other hand, the second moving path R2 is defined between the branching section 48 and the outer rail 312, and defines the moving path of the game ball 99 that is launched with high strength, such as maximum strength, among the game balls 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31. The downstream side of the moving direction of the game ball 99 of this second moving path R2 is further defined by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484, and the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 guide the game ball 99 moving on the second moving path R2 to the one-hole Kroon device 60. As described above, the separation nail 481 is arranged in a row from the downstream position of the end portion on the downstream side of the moving direction of the game ball 99 at the branching section 48 to the upper left part of the one-hole Kroon device 60. The guide nail 484 is arranged in a row from a predetermined position of the outer rail 312 to the upper central part of the one-hole Kroon device 60 (above the through hole 605 described later). That is, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 are guided to the left side of the through hole 605 (see Figures 74 and 75) in the one-hole Kroon device 60. In this way, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 guide the game ball 99 to the left side of the through hole 605 (see Figures 74 and 75), i.e., to a position avoiding the through hole 605, thereby preventing the game ball 99 from directly entering the through hole 605. In addition, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 are arranged without forming a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through, and the game ball 99 passing through the second moving path R2 is always guided to the one-hole Kroon device 60. In this way, the game ball 99 passing through the second moving path R2 is always guided to the one-hole cranes device 60, so that it is possible to pass the game ball 99 through the second role-linked operation gate G2 by shooting one game ball 99 into the second moving path R2. This prevents the base from lowering, and as a result, prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage by selecting the second moving path R2. Note that instead of the guide nail 484, a resin member or the like can also be used to perform a similar role to the guide nail 484.

The first moving path R1 and the second moving path R2 are defined by a branching section 48 and a separating nail 481, and these branching sections 48 and separating nails 481 are provided in a series without any gaps through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 launched on the first moving path R1 is prevented from changing its moving path to the second moving path R2 during its movement on the first moving path R1, and conversely, the game ball 99 launched on the second moving path R2 is prevented from changing its moving path to the first moving path R1 during its movement on the second moving path R2. In other words, the mutual movement of the game ball 99 between the first moving path R1 and the second moving path R2 is restricted. This prevents the moving path selected by the player from being changed against the player's will, and makes it possible to reliably reflect the player's will regarding the selection of the moving path.

In addition, in the second moving path R2, the game ball 99 is always guided to the one-hole Kroon device 60 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484, but the game ball 99 guided to the one-hole Kroon device 60 always passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2 (second role-linked operation gate sensor Gs2) when released from the one-hole Kroon device 60 as described below. In contrast, in the first moving path R1, as described above, the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 with a predetermined probability, for example, a probability set from a range of 1/2 to 1/11, by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482. In other words, the game ball 99 shot out on the second moving path R2 passes through the role-linked operation gate with a higher probability than the game ball shot out on the first moving path R1. As a result, in the second moving path R2, in which the operation of the role-linked operation device is delayed, the role-linked operation device can be operated by shooting out fewer game balls 99 than in the first moving path R1. Therefore, the second movement path R2 has the advantage of being able to reduce the generation of wasted balls compared to when a game ball 99 is shot out along the first movement path R1 to activate the continuous operation device of the role.

In addition, a second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided on the second movement path R2 above the one-hole cloone device 60. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed along the second movement path R2. This second route detection sensor Rs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (high-frequency transmission type sensor, electrostatic capacitance sensor, magnetic sensor), etc. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). In other words, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed along the second movement path R2 based on the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2.

However, in this embodiment, as described later with reference to FIG. 77 as the sensor detection process in the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control unit 4, the MPU 41 detects that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement path R2 when the condition device is activated (the condition device activation flag is set to on) and neither the first role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag nor the second role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is on. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the MPU 41 detects that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement path R2 when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before it is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1.

The one-hole Kroon device 60 delays the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the second moving route R2 to the operation of the role-linked operation device. Specifically, the one-hole Kroon device 60 restricts (delays) the fall of the game ball 99 on the game board 31 by rolling and rotating the game ball 99 in the Kroon section 601 described later, thereby ensuring a predetermined time or more from the time the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2 located below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole Kroon device 60. This predetermined time is set, for example, in the range of 1 minute to 20 minutes, preferably in the range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes, and typically about 10 minutes. By setting a predetermined time (dwell time, delay time) within such a range, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest (at least partially display) numerical information such as the ball output performance, including the set value, while the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the single-hole Krun device 60. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting game information related to the ball output performance, such as the set value, while the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the single-hole Krun device 60, the player can enjoy the preparation time (the time from when the condition device is activated to when the role continuous operation device is activated), which tends to be boring and of low interest for the player, by recognizing or guessing the ball output performance, such as the set value. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Here, FIG. 74 is a perspective view showing the single-hole Kroon device 60, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 31 taken along the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, the single-hole Kroon device 60 comprises a Kroon section 601 and a release section 602.

The crane portion 601 is a bottomed cylinder having a bottom wall portion 603 and a peripheral wall portion 604. A through hole 605 is provided in the center of the bottom wall portion 603. The peripheral wall portion 604 extends upward from the peripheral portion of the bottom wall portion 603, preventing the game ball 99 from flying out from the bottom wall portion 603. In this crane portion 601, the game ball 99 guided by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 revolves around the peripheral wall portion 604 on the bottom wall portion 603, and enters the through hole 605 by, for example, reducing the radius of the revolving ball 99 due to attenuation of the moving speed. The release portion 602 is formed in a hollow shape having a lower opening 606, and its inside is connected to the through hole 605. That is, the release portion 602 has a closed cross-sectional structure (structure surrounded by the periphery) with respect to the release direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99. In this release section 602, game balls 99 that enter the through holes 605 are released one by one below the game board 31. This prevents multiple game balls 99 from being released at the same time in the Kluen device 60, and makes it possible to release game balls 99 one by one.

It is also possible to configure the one-hole Kroon device 60 so that only one game ball 99 is guided. Specifically, a front-rear through hole that moves the game ball 99 to the back side of the game board 31 above the second route detection sensor Rs2, and a through hole opening and closing door that opens and closes this front-rear through hole and guides the game ball 99 to the front-rear through hole when the front-rear through hole is opened are provided, and the front-rear through hole is opened at least from the time the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second role linked operation gate G2, and the game ball 99 is guided to the back side of the game board 31 by the through hole opening and closing door and the front-rear through hole. In this way, by configuring so that only one game ball 99 is guided to the one-hole Kroon device 60, even if multiple game balls 99 are continuously shot out to the second moving path R2, only one game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole Kroon device 60. As a result, by guiding multiple game balls 99 to the single-hole Krun device 60, for example, mutual interference between multiple game balls 99 can be prevented, and when the second moving path R2 is selected, the delay time of the operation of the continuous operation device of the role in the single-hole Krun device 60 can be made uniform. Also, even when multiple game balls 99 are continuously shot out to the second moving path R2, only one game ball 99 is guided to the single-hole Krun device 60, so that ball clogging in the single-hole Krun device 60, which may occur when multiple game balls 99 are guided to the single-hole Krun device 60, can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 moving along the second moving path R2 is guided to the crane part 601 of the one-hole crane device 60 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484, but the game ball 99 moving along the second moving path R2 may be guided to the crane part 601 by moving it above the crane part 601 to the back side of the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 75, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is disposed below the lower opening 606 of the release section 602 of the one-hole crane device 60, allowing the game ball 99 released from the lower opening 606 to pass through.

The second role-linked operation gate G2, like the first role-linked operation gate G1, provides an opportunity for the game ball 99 to pass through and activate the game device continuous operation device. This second role-linked operation gate G2 is shot out to the second moving path R2 and penetrates vertically to allow the game ball 99 released from the one-hole Krun device 60 to pass through. The second role-linked operation gate G2 is also provided directly below the release section 602 of the one-hole Krun device 60, and the game ball 99 released from the release section 602 always passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. The second role-linked operation gate G2 also has a second role-linked operation gate sensor Gs2 (hereinafter also referred to as the "second role-linked gate sensor") that can detect the passage of the game ball 99. The second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (high-frequency transmission type sensor, electrostatic capacitance sensor, magnetic sensor), etc., and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked gate G2 based on the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

Here, in the sensor detection process executed by the main control unit 4 in FIG. 77 described below, the MPU 41 determines whether the game ball 99 has passed through the second role link operation gate G2 when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the second role link gate sensor Gs2, provided that the condition device is activated and the second role link gate sensor detection invalid flag is not set to on. In other words, when the condition state is activated, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role link operation gate G2 if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1.

When the game ball 99 is shot onto the second moving path R2, the game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole Kloon device 60 by shooting one game ball 99, and the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2 by being released from the one-hole Kloon device 60 after remaining in the one-hole Kloon device 60 for a predetermined time or more. In this way, the game ball 99 can be passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 by shooting one game ball 99, so the minimum number of game balls 99 required to operate the role-linked operation device is one ball, and the generation of wasted balls in operating the role-linked operation device can be suppressed.

In addition, when the second moving path R2 is selected, the consecutive operation device of the reel is not operated immediately after the start of the operation of the condition device as in the case where the first moving path R1 is selected, and the consecutive operation device of the reel is not operated at least from the time when the game ball 99 is moved to the one-hole Kroon device 60 until the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole Kroon device 60. Therefore, by selecting the second moving path R2, the player can delay the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel and delay the start of the big win game. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 after the operation of the condition device as described later, numerical information for recognizing or estimating the ball output performance including the set value is clearly indicated or suggested on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the condition device is activated by the stop display of the jackpot symbol combination on the symbol display unit 341, by selecting either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2, which have different times until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, it is possible to select whether to start the jackpot game immediately after the activation of the condition device, or to obtain information (benefits) that allows the user to guess numerical information on the ball output performance, including the set value, even though the time until the start of the jackpot game is longer. By selecting the first movement path R1 and starting the jackpot game immediately after the activation of the condition device, it is possible to secure more opportunities to receive the jackpot lottery without wasting the remaining game time, even if, for example, the closing time of the game hall is approaching or there is a limit to the game time due to personal circumstances, etc. Furthermore, even if there is no need to guess numerical information on the ball output performance, for example, if the set value, etc. is already recognized or there is no interest in the set value, by selecting the first movement path R1, it is possible to secure more opportunities to receive the jackpot lottery within the same time. On the other hand, if the operation of the continuous reel operation device is delayed by selecting the second movement path R2, the player can enjoy playing the game by guessing numerical information related to ball output performance and the like during the time until the continuous reel operation device is activated.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 80, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
The main timer interrupt process executed by the main control unit 4 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment described above in the content of the sensor detection process (see step S1001 in FIG. 20).

[Sensor detection process]
In the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the process when the condition device is operated is different from the first embodiment described above, and based on the detection results of the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first hand-linked gate sensor Gs1, the second route detection sensor Rs2, and the second hand-linked gate sensor Gs2, various flags related to these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, and Gs2 are set to on or off, and commands related to the detection results of the hand-linked gate sensor Gs1 and the second hand-linked gate sensor Gs2 are set. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sensor detection process of this embodiment.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3401). The condition device operation flag is a flag indicating that the condition device, which is a necessary condition for the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role, is operated, and is set to ON when it is judged that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol in step S3605 of the variable game control process in FIG. 79 described later. Then, if the condition device operation flag is ON (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402, and if the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S3401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3415.

<Step S3402>
When the condition device operation flag is on (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3402). The first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is a flag that invalidates the detection of the game ball 99 at the first role gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 is detected at the first role gate sensor Gs1, and is set to on when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 in step S3409 described later. Then, when the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3411, and when the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
When the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403). The second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is a flag that invalidates the detection of the game ball 99 at the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 when the game ball 99 is detected at the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, and is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2 in step S3405 described later. Then, when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413, and when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
When the second-role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the first-route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404). The first-route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by the first-route detection sensor, and is set to ON when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the output from the first-route detection sensor Rs1 in step S3415 described later. Then, when the first-route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3405, and when the first-route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3407.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
When the first role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag and the second role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag are set to off (No in both steps S3403 and S3404), and when the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3404: Yes), i.e., when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 sets the above-mentioned second role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag referenced in step S3403 to on (step S3405), sets the first route detection sensor detection flag to off (step S3406), and transitions to processing in step S3415.

<Step S3407>
When the first and second role gate sensor detection invalid flags are set to OFF (steps S3403 and S3404: No), when the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), that is, when the game ball 99 is not detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 judges whether the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407). The second route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by the second route detection sensor, and is set to ON when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2 in step S3415 described later. Then, if the second route detection sensor detection flag is set on (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3408, and if the second route detection sensor detection flag is set off (step S3407: No), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3415.

<Steps S3408 to S3510>
When the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407: Yes), that is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 sets a second route detection command (step S3408). The second route detection command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the second moving route R2 has been selected after the condition device is activated, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second route detection command, it starts a setting value suggestion performance process that suggests a setting value to the pattern display unit 341 and the 7-segment display unit 39.

Next, the MPU 41 sets the first link gate sensor detection invalid flag referenced in step S3402 to on (step S3409), sets the second route detection sensor detection flag to off (step S3410), and transitions to step S3415.

<Step S3411>
When the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411). The second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, that is, that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2. This second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON when the output of the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 is ON in the judgment process based on the ON/OFF of the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G1 in the other sensor detection process of step S3415 described later. In other words, the MPU 41 judges whether the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1. If the second role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3412, and if the second role linked gate sensor detection flag is set off (step S3411: No), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3415.

<Step S3412>
If the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3412) and moves the process to step S3415. The second role-linked gate sensor detection command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 when the second moving path R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second role-linked gate sensor detection command, it ends the setting value suggestion performance process that suggests the setting value in the pattern display unit 341 and the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S3413>
When the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413). The first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1, that is, that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1. This first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON when the output of the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 is ON in the judgment process based on the ON/OFF of the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 in the other sensor detection process of step S3415 described later. In other words, the MPU 41 judges whether the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2. If the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3414, and if the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set off (step S3413: No), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
If the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first combination gate sensor detection command (step S3414) and moves the process to step S3415. The first combination gate sensor detection command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the first combination gate G1 when the first moving path R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the first combination gate sensor detection command, it ends the game explanation performance on the pattern display unit 341.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 41 executes other sensor detection processing and ends the sensor detection processing. In the other sensor detection processing, in addition to the sensor detection processing executed by the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, when the game ball 99 is executed by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first hand-linked gate sensor Gs1, the second route detection sensor Rs2, and the second hand-linked gate sensor Gs2, a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, and Gs2 is set to on, and when the first route detection sensor detection flag or the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to on, a process is executed to set these flags to off. Note that the first hand-linked gate sensor detection flag and the second hand-linked gate sensor detection flag are referred to in the condition device operation processing of FIG. 80 described later, so even if these flags are set to on, they are not set to off in this step S3415.

In the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the MPU 41, on the condition that the condition device is activated (the condition device activation flag is set to on), determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 based on the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. Conversely, when the condition device is activated, the MPU 41, on the condition that the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 based on the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

In this way, on the condition that the condition device is activated, the MPU 41 detects that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 based on the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2. Therefore, even if the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 when the condition device is not activated, the MPU 41 does not detect the movement of the game ball 99 along the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 based on the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2, and does not detect the passage of the game ball 99 through the first role link operation gate G1 and the second role link operation gate G2. This prevents the role link operation device from being activated when the condition for activating the role link operation device is not met, and prevents the variable winning opening 319 from being opened.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is activated, if the gaming ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before it is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the first role linkage operation gate G1 is detected and the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the second role linkage operation gate G2 is not executed, whereas if the gaming ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before it is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the second role linkage operation gate G2 is detected and the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the first role linkage operation gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 before the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99, the passage of the game ball 99 through the second role interlocking operation gate G2 is restricted from being detected, while when the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99, the passage of the game ball 99 through the first role interlocking operation gate G1 is restricted from being detected. Therefore, the role continuous operation device is prevented from being operated by the game ball 99 moving along the second movement route R2 after the first movement route R1 is selected, while the role continuous operation device is prevented from being operated by the game ball 99 moving along the first movement route R1 after the second movement route R2 is selected. As a result, when the second moving path R2 is selected, the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one-hole crane device 60, and the operation of the consecutive role device is delayed, even if the game ball 99 shot out to the first moving path R1 passes through the first consecutive role operation gate G1, the consecutive role operation device is prevented from being activated. Therefore, for example, when the operation of the condition device is delayed, numerical information regarding the ball output performance, including the setting value described below, is prevented from being terminated midway by the game ball 99 passing through the first consecutive role operation gate G1.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
The main processing executed by the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in the content of the variable game control (see FIG. 79). In addition to the main processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23), the main processing in this embodiment executes a condition device operation processing (see FIG. 78). Here, FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 78.

[Variable game control process]
As shown in FIG. 79, in the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the execution of variable play is restricted while the condition device and the role continuous operation device are operated, and a process is executed to operate the condition device after the end of variable play in the case where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

<Steps S3601 and S3602>
In the variable game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether the condition device operation flag is set to on (step S3601), and if the condition device operation flag is set to off (step S3601: No), judges whether the consecutive operation device operation flag is set to on (step S3602). Here, the consecutive operation device operation flag is a flag for continuously operating the opening and closing door 319 of the variable winning port 316, and is set to on when the passage of the game ball 99 through the first consecutive operation gate G1 or the second consecutive operation gate G2 is detected when the condition device is operated in step S3707 in the condition device operation process of FIG. 80 described later.

If both the condition device operation flag and the reel continuous operation device operation flag are set to OFF (steps S3601 and S3602 are both No), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above (steps S1401 to S1408). Note that if either the condition device operation flag or the reel continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON, the variable game process is terminated.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, that is, when the variable game is ended, the MPU 41 judges whether the jackpot type flag is set to ON (step S3603), and if the jackpot type flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the jackpot type flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the variable game control process is ended. Here, the jackpot type flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and is a flag indicating whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R variable probability jackpot, or a 16R variable probability jackpot, and includes a 5R normal jackpot flag, a 5R variable probability jackpot flag, and a 16R variable probability jackpot flag. The jackpot type flag is set to ON when setting the first hold command or the second hold command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the first hold command setting process or the second hold command setting process of FIG. 21, for example.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the big win type flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), a condition device operation command is set (step S3604), the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3605), and the variable game process is terminated. The condition device operation command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the condition device is operated, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the condition device operation command, it causes the pattern display unit 341 to start a game explanation presentation.

[Condition device operation processing]
The condition device operation process of this embodiment is a process executed when the condition device is operated, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag or the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to on, a process is executed to operate the role-linked continuous operation device. Here, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the condition device operation process executed in the main process of FIG. 78.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the condition device activation processing of this embodiment, first it is determined whether or not the condition device activation flag is set to on (step S3701). If the condition device activation flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3702. If the condition device activation flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the condition device activation processing is terminated.

<Step S3702>
If the condition device operation flag is set on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on or not (step S3702), and if the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3703, and if the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set off (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3709.

<Steps S3703 and S3704>
If the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first combination gate detection flag to off (step S3703) and judges whether the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3704). If the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the condition device operation process, and if the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3704: No), the process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
If the first hand-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the second hand-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3705). If the second hand-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second hand-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag to off (step S3706), and then proceeds to step S3707. On the other hand, if the second hand-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets the consecutive operation device operation flag to ON, and sets the condition device operation flag referred to in step S3602 in the variable game control process of Fig. 79 and in step S3701 in the condition device operation process to OFF (step S3708), and ends the condition device operation process. In other words, when the condition device is operating and the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2), when the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 (when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1), the consecutive operation device for continuously operating the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning port 316 is operated.

<Step S3709>
If the first role linked gate sensor detection flag is set off (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on or not (step S3709), and if the second role linked gate sensor detection flag is set on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3710, and if the second role linked gate sensor detection flag is set off (step S3709: No), the MPU 41 terminates the condition device operation processing.

<Steps S3710 and S3711>
If the second hand gate sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second hand gate detection flag to off (step S3710) and judges whether the second hand gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3711). If the second hand gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the condition device operation process, and if the second hand gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3711: No), the process proceeds to step S3712.

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the second role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3712). If the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3712: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag to off (step S3713) and then shifts the process to step S3707. On the other hand, if the first role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to off (step S3712: No), the process shifts to step S3707. Here, in step S3707, the role object continuous operation device operation flag is set to on, and the condition device operation flag is set to off (step S3708), and the condition device operation process is terminated. In other words, when the condition device is operating and the first role linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set on (when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1), when the game ball 99 is detected by the second role linked gate sensor Gs2 (when the game ball 99 passes through the second role linked operation gate G2), a role continuous operation device is operated which continuously operates the opening and closing door 319 which opens and closes the variable winning opening 316.

In the condition device operation process of this embodiment, when the condition device is operating, if the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2), when the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 (when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1), a role-linked continuous operation device that continuously operates the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 316 is operated. Conversely, when the condition device is operating, if the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1), when the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 (when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2), a role-linked continuous operation device that continuously operates the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 316 is operated.

In this way, the consecutive role operation device is operated on the condition that the condition device is operated, so that even if the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 when the condition device is not operated, the MPU 41 does not detect the passage of the game ball 99 through the first consecutive role operation gate G1 and the second consecutive role operation gate G2. This prevents the consecutive role operation device from being operated when the condition for operating the consecutive role operation device is not met, and prevents the variable winning opening 319 from being opened.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is activated, if the gaming ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before it is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the first role linkage operation gate G1 is detected and the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the second role linkage operation gate G2 is not executed, whereas if the gaming ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before it is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the second role linkage operation gate G2 is detected and the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the first role linkage operation gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 before the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99, the passage of the game ball 99 through the second role interlocking operation gate G2 is restricted from being detected, while when the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99, the passage of the game ball 99 through the first role interlocking operation gate G1 is restricted from being detected. Therefore, the role continuous operation device is prevented from being operated by the game ball 99 moving along the second movement route R2 after the first movement route R1 is selected, while the role continuous operation device is prevented from being operated by the game ball 99 moving along the first movement route R1 after the second movement route R2 is selected. As a result, when the second moving path R2 is selected, the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one-hole crane device 60, and the operation of the consecutive role device is delayed, even if the game ball 99 shot out to the first moving path R1 passes through the first consecutive role operation gate G1, the consecutive role operation device is prevented from being activated. Therefore, for example, when the operation of the condition device is delayed, numerical information regarding the ball output performance, including the setting value described below, is prevented from being terminated midway by the game ball 99 passing through the first consecutive role operation gate G1.

In the condition device operation process of this embodiment, the passage of the game ball 99 through the first and second combination gate sensors Gs1 and Gs2 is determined when the condition device operation flag is set to on, but it may also be determined whether the condition device is activated or not when the passage of the game ball 99 through the first and second combination gate sensors Gs1 and Gs2 is detected. In other words, when the passage of the game ball 99 through the first and second combination gate sensors Gs1 and Gs2 is detected, it may be determined whether a jackpot game can be generated based on the condition device operation flag, etc.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 88, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
In the sub timer interruption process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, instead of the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 34) of the sub timer interruption process in the first embodiment described above, a setting value suggestion effect process is executed (see FIG. 81). In addition to the sub timer interruption process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment described above, the sub timer interruption process of this embodiment also executes a game explanation effect process (see FIG. 81). In addition, in the sub timer interruption process of this embodiment, the content of the command determination process is different from that of the sub timer interruption process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 82).

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, in addition to the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not a command required for starting or ending a game instruction presentation process and a setting value suggestion presentation process described later has been received. Here, FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Fig. 82, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a condition device operation command has been received (step S3901). The condition device operation command is a command indicating that the condition device is to be operated, and is set in step S3604 in the variable game control process of Fig. 79 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the condition device operation command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when the condition device operation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the process proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the condition device operation command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game instruction presentation start flag to ON (step S3902) and ends the command judgment process. The game instruction presentation start flag is a flag for starting the game instruction presentation (see FIG. 84) described later, and is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to start the game instruction presentation in step S4001 of the game instruction presentation process in FIG. 83 described later. In other words, the game instruction presentation is started when the condition device is operated, that is, when a combination of big win symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3903>
If the condition device operation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second route detection command has been received (step S3903). The second route detection command is a command indicating that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the condition device has been operated, and is set in step S3408 in the sensor detection process of Fig. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. If the MPU 51 has received the second route detection command (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904. If the MPU 51 has not received the second route detection command (step S3903: No), the process proceeds to step S3905.

<Step S3904>
When the second route detection command is received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value suggestion presentation start flag to ON (step S3904) and ends the command determination process. The setting value suggestion presentation start flag is a flag that ends the game instruction presentation described later and starts the setting value suggestion presentation, and is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to end the game instruction presentation in step S4007 of the game instruction presentation process in FIG. 83 described later, and to determine whether or not to start the setting value suggestion presentation in step S4101 of the setting value suggestion presentation process in FIG. 86 described later. In other words, when the condition device is operated, if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, when the second moving route R2 is selected, the game instruction presentation is ended and the setting value suggestion presentation is started.

<Step S3905>
If the second route detection command has not been received (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the first role-linked gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3905). The first role-linked gate sensor detection command is a command indicating that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 when the first moving route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is set in step S3414 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Then, if the MPU 51 receives the first role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3905: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3906, and if the first role-linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3905: No), the process proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3906>
When the first role consecutive gate sensor detection command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation presentation end flag to ON (step S3906) and ends the command judgment process. The game explanation presentation end flag is a flag that ends the game explanation presentation described later, and is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to end the game explanation presentation in step S4006 of the game explanation presentation process in FIG. 83 described later. In other words, the game explanation presentation is ended when the game ball 99 passes through the first role consecutive operation gate G1 when the first moving path R1 is selected after the condition device is operated, that is, when the role consecutive operation device is operated.

<Step S3907>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3907). The second role-linked gate sensor detection command is a command indicating that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 when the second moving path R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is set in step S3412 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Then, if the MPU 51 receives the second role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3907: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3908, and if the second role-linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3907: No), the process proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
When the second role consecutive gate sensor detection command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value suggestion effect end flag to ON (step S3908) and ends the command determination process. The setting value suggestion effect end flag is a flag that ends the setting value suggestion effect described later, and is referenced by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to end the setting value suggestion effect (display on the 7-segment display unit 39) in step S4129 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 88 described later. In other words, the setting value suggestion effect (game effect and display on the 7-segment display unit 39) is terminated when the game ball 99 passes through the second role consecutive operation gate G2 when the second moving path R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, that is, when the role consecutive operation device is activated. The setting value suggestion effect end flag is also referenced by the MPU 51 in step S4112 in the setting value suggestion process described later to determine whether or not to end the game effect with the setting value suggestion effect. In other words, if the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination gate G2 during the game presentation, the game presentation is forcibly terminated.

<Step S3909>
If the second-function linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3909) and ends the command determination processing. The processing based on other commands is, for example, the processing executed in the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above.

[Game Explanation Presentation Processing]
In the game instruction presentation process of this embodiment, a game instruction presentation (see FIG. 84) is executed to explain the game progress when the first moving route R1 is selected and the game progress when the second moving route R2 is selected (see FIG. 84). Here, FIG. 83 and FIG. 85 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game instruction presentation process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 in the game instruction presentation.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 83, in the game instruction presentation process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether the game instruction presentation start flag is on or not (step S4001). The game instruction presentation start flag is a flag for starting the game instruction presentation, and when it is judged that the condition device operation command is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 82 (step S3901: Yes), it is set to on in step S3902 of the command judgment process. That is, the MPU 51 starts the game instruction presentation when the combination of big win symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (the variable game indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery is ended when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win) and the condition device is operated. Then, when the game instruction presentation start flag is on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4002, and when the game instruction presentation start flag is off (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4005.

<Steps S4002 to S4004>
If the game instruction presentation start flag is ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the game instruction presentation (step S4002). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game instruction presentation flag indicating that the game instruction presentation is being executed ON (step S4003), sets the game instruction presentation start flag OFF (step S4004), and ends the game instruction presentation process.

Here, the game explanation performance is a performance that explains the game progress content when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game progress content when the second movement route R2 is selected, and is executed in the pattern display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 84, in the game explanation performance, a game board image in which the upper half of the game board 31 is viewed from the front and a text image (text image of "Hit right! Choose a route!") that encourages a right hit and encourages the selection of either route A (first movement route R1) or route B (second movement route R2) are displayed on the pattern display unit 341. The game board image includes an image (broken arrow image) that explains route A (first movement route R1) and route B (second movement route R2), and an explanation image (text image of "If you choose route A, the jackpot game will start immediately" and "If you choose route B, you may be able to find out the setting value") that explains the advantages of selecting each route displayed in the part corresponding to the pattern display unit 341.

In this way, by executing the game explanation presentation, the player can learn the advantages of choosing route A (first movement route R1) and choosing route B (second movement route R2). Therefore, the player can refer to the game explanation presentation to select the route that will give him or her the advantages that he or she wants to enjoy.

The game explanation performance is started when the condition device is operated, that is, when the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, by stopping the shooting of the game balls 99 before or immediately after the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to secure time to fully understand the game progress content by the game explanation performance. In particular, when a performance in which there is a high possibility that a combination of jackpot symbols will be displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display unit 341 is executed, the shooting of the game balls 99 is generally stopped to prevent the generation of wasted balls, and similarly, in order to prevent the generation of wasted balls, the shooting of the game balls 99 is generally stopped for a certain period of time until the opening of the variable winning port 316 is started without immediately starting the shooting of the game balls 99 after the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state in order to prevent the generation of wasted balls. In this way, when a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display unit 341, the shooting of the game balls 99 is often stopped for a certain period of time, so in this respect too, it is possible to secure time to fully understand the game progress content by the game explanation performance.

The explanatory images, the route A selection explanatory image explaining the advantages of selecting route A (first movement route R1) and the route B selection explanatory image explaining the advantages of selecting route B (second movement route R2), do not need to be displayed simultaneously, and may be switched between the route A selection explanatory image and the route B selection explanatory image, for example. Also, when the route A selection explanatory image and the route B selection explanatory image are switched between, they may be switched automatically at regular intervals, or may be switched by the player operating the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) or the multiple selection buttons 21A and decision button 21B (see FIG. 53) of the selection decision unit 21.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game explanation presentation starts unconditionally when the condition device is activated, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, the game explanation presentation starts when the first movement path R1 (route A) is selected, and the setting value suggestion presentation starts without executing the game explanation presentation when the second movement path R2 (route B) is selected.

<Step S4005>
83, if the game instruction effect start flag is OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the game instruction effect flag set to ON in step S4003 is set to ON (step S4005). If the game instruction effect flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4006, and if the game instruction effect flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4010 in FIG.

<Step S4006>
When the game explanation performance flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the game explanation performance end flag is set to ON (step S4006). The game explanation performance end flag is a flag for ending the game explanation performance, and when it is determined that the first role consecutive gate sensor detection command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 82 (step S3905: Yes), it is set to ON in step S3906 of the command determination process. That is, when the game ball 99 passes through the first role consecutive operation gate G1 when the first moving path R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, that is, when the role consecutive operation device is activated, the MPU 51 ends the game explanation performance. Then, when the game explanation performance end flag is ON (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4007, and when the game explanation performance end flag is OFF (step S4006: No), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation performance process.

In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game explanation performance is started by the operation of the condition device (the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination of jackpot symbols on the symbol display unit 341), and is ended when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked gate Gs1, or when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1. However, without starting the game explanation performance when the condition device starts to operate, a right-hit request performance that requests the player to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 (to hit to the right) when the condition device starts to operate may be executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. In this case, if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 after the condition device is operated (when the game ball 99 is guided to the crown device 60), the right-hit request performance may be ended, and the game explanation performance may be executed while the operation of the role-continuous operation device in the crown device 60 is delayed. The game instruction presentation may be similar to the game instruction presentation described above with reference to FIG. 84, or may be different from the game instruction presentation described above. However, the game instruction presentation must be a presentation that makes the player aware that at least either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 can be selected, and that the presentation explains the respective advantages of selecting the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2.

Incidentally, in gaming machines that use right-hand shots when decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of winning symbols on a display device such as a symbol display unit, many players shoot the gaming ball with maximum strength into the right area of the gaming board. Therefore, if a player does not fully understand the game content of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, it is expected that the player will unconditionally shoot the gaming ball 99 with maximum strength, as in conventional gaming machines.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the gaming ball 99 is shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 with maximum strength, the gaming ball 99 moves along the second movement path R2, and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed. Therefore, if the right hit request performance is executed when the condition device starts to operate, and the game explanation performance is executed when the second movement path R2 is selected, if a player who does not fully understand the game content of the gaming machine 10 shoots the game ball 99 with maximum strength when the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination of jackpot patterns on the pattern display unit 341, the game content can be understood by the game explanation. In other words, even if the player does not fully understand the game content, when the game ball is shot unconditionally with maximum strength, at least the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2 can be selected, and the player can understand the respective advantages of selecting the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2. As a result, after the next big win (when the decorative symbols stop and display in a big win combination on the symbol display unit 341), the player can understand the game content and select either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 according to his or her preference. In particular, since the second movement path R2 is a movement path in which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed, it is possible to devote sufficient time to explaining the game when the second movement path R2 is selected, and therefore it is possible to more reliably inform the player of the game content.

The right-hit request display when the condition device starts to operate and the game explanation display when the second movement path R2 is selected are applied when the condition device is operated in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode is a jackpot (so-called first win), and when the condition device is operated in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is a jackpot (so-called consecutive win), it is preferable to execute the game explanation display by operating the condition device and execute the setting value suggestion display when the second movement path R2 is selected.

<Steps S4007 to S4009>
If the game instruction presentation end flag is ON (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game instruction presentation (step S4007). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game instruction presentation flag, which indicates that the game instruction presentation is being executed, to OFF (step S4008), sets the game instruction presentation end flag to OFF (step S4009), and ends the game instruction presentation process.

<Step S4010>
When the game instruction presentation flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to ON as shown in FIG. 85 (step S4010). The setting value suggestion presentation start flag is a flag that ends the game instruction presentation and starts the setting value suggestion presentation described later, and is set to ON in step S3904 of the command judgment process in FIG. 82 when it is judged that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes). That is, when the condition device is activated, the MPU 51 ends the game instruction presentation when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, when the second movement route R2 is selected. That is, the game instruction presentation is started after the condition device is activated, and is ended when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game ball 99 passes through the first role linked operation gate G1, and when the second movement route R2 is selected and the setting value suggestion presentation is started.

Then, if the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to on (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4011, and if the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to off (step S4010: No), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation presentation process.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
If the setting value suggestion effect start flag is ON (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game instruction effect (step S4011). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game instruction effect flag indicating that the game instruction effect is being executed to OFF (step S4012), and ends the game instruction effect process.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion presentation process of this embodiment, when the second moving route R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, a game presentation is executed on the symbol display unit 341, and a 7-segment presentation is executed in which a non-set value other than the set value that determines the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is displayed or suggested on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the points acquired in this game presentation (the number of specific conditions that are met). Here, Figures 86 and 88 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion presentation process executed in the sub-timer interruption process of this embodiment.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 86, in the setting value suggestion presentation process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to ON (step S4101). The setting value suggestion presentation start flag is a flag for starting the setting value suggestion presentation, and when it is judged that the second route detection command has been received in the command judgment process of FIG. 82 (step S3903: Yes), it is set to ON in step S3904 of the command judgment process. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 51 starts the setting value suggestion presentation when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, when the second moving route R2 is selected. Then, when the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4102, and when the setting value suggestion presentation start flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), it shifts the process to step S4107.

<Step S4102>
When the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the type of game effect to be executed by the symbol display section 341 (step S4102).

The game presentation of this embodiment is a game in which points can be earned, and the points earned in this game presentation correspond to the number of specific conditions that are fulfilled. In other words, the game presentation provides an opportunity to fulfill a specific condition in a specific period, and in this game presentation, one specific condition is fulfilled each time one point is earned in the game presentation. By providing an opportunity for a specific condition to be fulfilled in a specific period (executing a presentation such as a game presentation), it is possible to focus attention on the opportunity provided in the specific period and increase interest in the progress of the game during the waiting period from the operation of the condition device to the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role. In particular, by providing an opportunity for a specific condition to be fulfilled as a presentation such as a game presentation, it is possible to further increase interest in the number of specific conditions that are fulfilled in a specific period (points earned).

In addition, in this embodiment, there are six game setting values, 1 to 6, and the five game setting values excluding the setting values are non-set values. On the other hand, the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers using seven segments A to G. Therefore, seven specific conditions must be met in order to know one non-set value, and 35 specific conditions must be met in order to know all non-set values. Therefore, in the game presentation, one non-set value can be known for every seven points earned, and all non-set values can be known by earning 35 points or more, and as a result, the set values can be known.

Here, Figure 87 (A) shows an example of a game type determination table used by the voice lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines the game type based on this game type determination table.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), in the game type determination table, five game types are defined by a game type lottery counter: coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E). The MPU 51 selects a game according to the value of the game type lottery counter.

Here, in the coin acquisition game (game A), for example, coins displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are acquired by selecting the direction of travel of the character, and points are awarded according to the value of the acquired coins. In the mission achievement game (game B), for example, multiple missions are given to the player in sequence, and points are awarded according to the number of missions accomplished and the level of achievement. In the battle game (game C), for example, the player's ally character is made to face off against an enemy character, and points are awarded according to the number of enemy characters defeated by the ally character and the strength of the enemy. In the quiz game (game D), for example, questions and multiple answers are presented, and points are awarded according to the number of questions the player answers correctly and the difficulty level. In the prediction game (game E), for example, points are awarded according to the number and value of gems contained in a treasure chest selected by the player from multiple treasure chests.

In this way, a game for acquiring points (the number of times a specific condition is met) for indicating or suggesting a non-set value on the seven-segment display unit 39 is selected from a number of games with different methods for acquiring points. This reduces loss of interest in the game presentation caused by the same game being played repeatedly. In addition, when the same game is played repeatedly, there is a concern that players may easily beat the game, but by setting multiple games, it is possible to increase the difficulty of beating the game, and it is prevented that the non-set value is easily discovered.

In addition, in the game type determination table, the five games, coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E), are configured as, for example, a player participation type game and a scenario management type game. A player participation type game is a game in which the progress and result of the game (the number of points acquired) are determined by the player's operation of the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21. The coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E) are easy to configure as player participation type games. In a player participation type game, the progress and result of the game are determined by the player's operation, so it is easy to increase interest in the game. On the other hand, a scenario management type game is executed according to a scenario in which the progress and result of the game (the number of points acquired) are predetermined, and the coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), and battle game (game C) are easy to configure as scenario management type games. In a scenario-managed game, points corresponding to the scenario selected from multiple scenarios are always awarded to players who are not actively participating in the game. Therefore, the non-set value is displayed or suggested on the seven-segment display unit 39 even to players who are not interested in the game.

The game type lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 149, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. The coin acquisition game (game A) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 0 to 49, with a selection rate of 33.3%. The mission achievement game (game B) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 50 to 89, with a selection rate of 26.7%. The battle game (game C) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 90 to 119, with a selection rate of 20.0%. The quiz game (game D) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 120 to 139, with a selection rate of 13.3%. The prediction game (game E) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 140 to 149, with a selection rate of 6.7%. Thus, the five games, coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E), have different selection rates, with the highest selection rates being coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E).

The five games, coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D) and prediction game (game E), each have a different difficulty level for acquiring points. The difficulty level for acquiring points is, for example, the magnitude of the expected value of points acquired in the game, and the lower the expected value, the higher the difficulty level for acquiring points, and conversely, the higher the expected value, the lower the difficulty level for acquiring points. The difficulty level for acquiring points may be specified including the initial points (see FIG. 87(B)) described later, but in this embodiment, the initial points are not included. The difficulty level for acquiring points may also be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the start of the game presentation. The difficulty level for acquiring points is displayed, for example, by the number of star images or the like correlated to the difficulty level. The difficulty level for acquiring points is highest in the order of coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D) and prediction game (game E). Meanwhile, the selection rate is lowest in the order of difficulty of point acquisition for the coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E). In this way, by setting multiple games with different difficulty of point acquisition, each game is characterized by its difficulty of point acquisition, which increases interest in the game presentation and allows players to enjoy playing by paying attention to which game is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the higher the difficulty of earning points, the higher the selection rate, while the lower the difficulty of earning points, the lower the selection rate, and so there is a contradictory relationship between the difficulty of earning points and the high selection rate. In this way, the higher the selection rate for games with higher difficulty of earning points, the easier acquisition of many points is prevented, and the non-set value (set value) is prevented from being easily grasped. On the other hand, the lower the selection rate for games with lower difficulty of earning points, the lower the selection rate, and so in exchange for the low selection rate, many opportunities for point games are given when selected, and opportunities to grasp the non-set value (set value) are provided, and a decrease in interest in the game presentation caused by the repeated selection of games with low difficulty of earning points is suppressed. Therefore, the contradictory relationship between the difficulty of earning points and the high selection rate makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game presentation while preventing the non-set value (set value) from being easily grasped.

In this embodiment, the selection rate and point acquisition difficulty of each game are set to be non-uniform, but at least one of the selection rate and point acquisition difficulty may be set to be uniform. In addition, the number of games is not limited to five and may be other numbers, and the types of games are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 87(A).

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 86, in step S4103, the MPU 51 sets the initial points, and further sets the initial points as the value of the point counter (step S4104). The initial points are points that are given to the player at the start of the game, separate from the points acquired in the game. In this way, since the initial points are given, points can be acquired outside the game, and therefore, even if a game with a high degree of difficulty in acquiring points is selected, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to acquire points in the game.

Here, Figure 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an initial point determination table used by the voice lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines the initial points based on this initial point determination table.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), in the initial point determination table, the initial point lottery counter specifies the initial point for each game type, and the MPU 51 selects the initial point according to the game type and the value of the initial point lottery counter. In this way, by setting the initial point for each game type, each game is characterized not only by the difficulty of acquiring points but also by the initial point, which can further increase interest in the game presentation, and also allows the player to enjoy playing by paying attention to which game is selected.

The initial point lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 299, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 299. In the coin acquisition game (game A), the initial points are selected from 0 points, 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, and 5 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, with the highest initial point being 5 points, the lowest of all games, and the higher the initial point, the less likely it is to be selected. In the coin acquisition game (game A), the expected value of the initial points is 1.4 points, the lowest of all games. In the mission achievement game (game B), the initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, with the highest initial point being 8 points, which is relatively high, but the higher the initial point, the less likely it is to be selected. In the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of the initial points is 2.6 points, the second lowest of all games. In the battle game (game C), the initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial points are relatively high at 8 points, so that the higher initial points are relatively likely to be selected. In the battle game (game C), the expected value of the initial points is 3.8 points, which is an intermediate value among all games. In the quiz game (game D), the initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial points are relatively high at 8 points, so that the higher initial points are relatively likely to be selected. In the quiz game (game D), the expected value of the initial points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest among all games. In the prediction game (game E), the initial points are selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points, and 10 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial points are relatively high at 10 points, which is the highest among all games, so that the higher initial points are relatively likely to be selected. Additionally, in the prediction game (Game E), the expected initial point value is 6.9 points, the highest of all games.

As described above, the higher the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, the harder it is to select high points as initial points and the lower the expected value of initial points. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, the easier it is to select high points as initial points and the higher the expected value of initial points. There is a contradictory relationship between the difficulty of points acquisition and the high initial points and expected value. In this way, the higher the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, the harder it is to select high points as initial points and the lower the expected value of initial points, which prevents many points from being easily acquired and prevents non-set values (set values) from being easily grasped. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, the easier it is to select high points as initial points and the higher the expected value of initial points, which provides opportunities for many point games, making it easier to grasp non-set values and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game presentation caused by repeated selection of games with low difficulty of points acquisition. Therefore, there is a contradictory relationship between the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, the difficulty of points acquisition in a game, and the high initial points and expected value, which prevents non-set values (set values) from being easily grasped and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game presentation.

In this embodiment, the difficulty of acquiring points is in a contradictory relationship with the initial points and the expected value, but the difficulty of acquiring points may be correlated with the initial points and the expected value. That is, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points, the easier it is to select high points as initial points and the higher the expected value of initial points, while the lower the difficulty of acquiring points, the harder it is to select high points as initial points and the lower the expected value of initial points. By specifying the relationship between the difficulty of acquiring points and the initial points and the expected value in this way, for example, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points, the higher the initial points are, but the harder it is to accumulate points during the game, and the game is given a tendency to be a start-dash type in terms of point acquisition. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty of acquiring points, the lower the initial points are, but the easier it is to accumulate points during the game, and the game is given a tendency to be a finish-up type in terms of point acquisition. In this way, the correlation between the difficulty of acquiring points and the initial points and the expected value makes it possible to characterize the increase in acquired points (time passage) according to the type of game. This allows players to enjoy the point acquisition process according to the type of game, which further increases the interest in the game.

In addition, the initial points do not have to be set for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability in all games, or the selection rate of each initial point may be uniform. Also, initial points do not necessarily have to be awarded, and the points earned in the game presentation may start from 0 points.

The acquired (selected) initial points may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the player can grasp the initial points at the start of the game, and therefore can accurately grasp the acquired points, including the initial points. On the other hand, the initial points do not have to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the player cannot grasp the initial points at the start of the game, and therefore cannot accurately grasp the acquired points, including the initial points. However, in step S4103, the initial points are internally added to the point counter value, and therefore, for example, if a high point is selected as the initial point, an unexpectedly large number of segments A to G are targeted for control in the 7-segment presentation described below, giving the player a sense of surprise.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 86, in step S4105, the MPU 51 sets a game presentation time counter indicating the remaining time of the game presentation, and further starts the game presentation and sets a game presentation flag indicating that the game presentation is being executed to ON (step S4106), and ends the setting value suggestion presentation process. The value of the game presentation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting the minimum time required to display all non-set values as the 7-segment presentation of the setting value suggestion presentation from the design time (theoretical value) from when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second role linked operation gate G2 arranged below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole cloon device 60. The minimum time is the time required to control the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 five times each for a total of 35 times, and is 17.5 seconds when the time required to control one segment is 0.5 seconds, for example.

<Step S4107>
If the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the game effect flag set to ON in step S4106 is set to ON, i.e., whether or not the game effect is being executed (step S4107). If the game effect flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4108, and if the game effect flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4119 in FIG.

<Step S4108>
If the game presentation flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), a game presentation progress process is executed. In this game presentation progress process, for example, an image is changed or a screen is switched. The image is changed or the screen is switched in response to, for example, the remaining time of the game presentation or an operation of the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21 by the player. In addition, in the game presentation progress process, if the player has acquired points between the end of the setting value suggestion presentation process in the previous sub timer interrupt process and the setting value suggestion presentation process in the current sub timer interrupt process, a process is executed to store these points in the RAM 512.

<Step S4109>
In step S4109, the MPU 51 executes a process of updating the value of the point counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds the points acquired by the player from the end of the setting value suggestion presentation process in the previous sub timer interruption process to the setting value suggestion presentation process in the current sub timer interruption process, based on the points stored in the RAM 512 in step S4108, to the value of the point counter.

<Steps S4110 and S4111>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the game presentation time counter indicating the remaining time of the game presentation. The MPU 51 then determines whether the value of the game presentation time counter after the subtraction is 0, i.e., whether it is time to end the game presentation (step S4111). If the value of the game presentation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to S4113, and if the value of the game presentation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to S4112.

<Step S4112>
If the value of the game presentation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), that is, if the execution time of the game presentation remains, it is determined whether or not the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to ON (step S4112). The setting value suggestion presentation end flag is a flag that ends the setting value suggestion presentation, and if it is determined in the command determination process of FIG. 82 that the second role link gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3907: Yes), it is set to ON in step S3908 of the command determination process. That is, in a situation where the game presentation time remains, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second role link operation gate G2 by being discharged from the one-hole Krun device 60. Then, if the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4116 of FIG. 88, and if the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to OFF (step S4112: No), it ends the setting value suggestion presentation.

<Steps S4113 to S4115>
If the value of the game presentation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), i.e., if it is the time to end the game presentation, the 7-segment presentation start flag is set to on (step S4113), and the game presentation flag is set to off (step S4114), and the game presentation end process is executed (step S4115), and the setting value suggestion presentation process is terminated.

The 7-segment presentation start flag is a flag that starts a 7-segment presentation that indicates or suggests a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39, and is referenced by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to start a 7-segment presentation in step S4119 of FIG. 88 described below.

<Steps S4116 to S4118>
If the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set on (step S4112: Yes), as shown in FIG. 88, the MPU 51 clears the value of the game presentation time counter (step S4116), and further sets the setting value suggestion presentation end flag to off (step S4117), and executes game presentation end processing such as setting the game presentation flag to off (step S4118), thereby terminating the setting value suggestion presentation processing.

However, the residence time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole Krun device 60 is not constant, and for example, variations occur depending on the entry angle and position of the game ball 99. Also, when multiple game balls 99 are simultaneously present in the one-hole Krun device 60, it is assumed that the game ball 99 will be released from the one-hole Krun device 60 in a time shorter than the design time (theoretical value) due to mutual interference between the game balls 99. In other words, it is assumed that when there is time left for the game presentation, the game ball 99 will be released from the one-hole Krun device 60 and pass through the second role consecutive operation gate G2, thereby activating the role continuous operation device. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the residence time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole Krun device 60 is shorter than the design time, the game presentation is forcibly terminated. This prevents the game presentation from being executed in the pattern display unit 341 after the big win game has started, and makes it possible to properly execute the big win game presentation.

When the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the continuous reel operation device, the 7-segment presentation start flag is not set to on, unlike when the game presentation ends due to the timing for the game presentation to end (the value of the game presentation time counter is 0). In other words, when the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the continuous reel operation device, the setting value suggestion presentation ends without executing the 7-segment presentation. This makes it possible to end the setting value suggestion presentation before the continuous reel operation device is activated.

In addition, even if the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel, it is possible to execute the 7-segment presentation. For example, by not using the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game presentation, it is possible to execute the 7-segment presentation even after the start of the jackpot game. In other words, by not using a display device for indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the set value suggestion presentation in the jackpot game presentation, it is possible to indicate or suggest a non-set value on the display device even if the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel. In this way, by indicating or suggesting a non-set value on a display device not used in the jackpot game, even if the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel, information indicating or suggesting a non-set value can be provided to the player, and the player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the non-set value even after the start of the jackpot game. In addition, if the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel, information indicating or suggesting a non-set value may be provided on the pattern display unit 341 during the execution of the jackpot game. This information can be provided in the opening, open/close execution mode, or ending of a big win game, but can be provided, for example, by displaying an additional image in the opening or ending that includes five setting value suggestion images that mimic the seven-segment display unit 39, similar to the setting value suggestion screen (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) described in the first embodiment above.

In addition, even if an event (predetermined performance), such as a game performance, is forcibly terminated by the operation of the consecutive role operation device, the event (predetermined performance) may be executed again if a predetermined condition is met. In this way, by re-executing the event (predetermined performance), it is possible to ensure many opportunities to view the event (predetermined performance). This makes it possible to increase interest in the game by re-executing the event (predetermined performance), and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, a predetermined condition for re-execution when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation is forcibly terminated may be, for example, that the event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation is terminated before the timing for the end of the event (predetermined effect) arrives. That is, when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation is terminated before the arrival of the event (predetermined effect), the event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation is re-executed. In this way, even if an event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation is interrupted midway, the event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation can be executed to the end as compensation. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game by re-executing the event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation, and when a privilege is granted by the event (predetermined effect) such as a game presentation, the period for obtaining the privilege is not interrupted midway and is compensated to the end.

In addition, an example of a predetermined condition that is re-executed when an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance is forcibly terminated is the execution of a jackpot game. In this way, since the predetermined condition is the execution of a jackpot game, it becomes possible to execute an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance in a jackpot game. In other words, if an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance is interrupted midway due to the passage (entry of a ball) of a game ball through the first role link operation gate G1 (first predetermined (entry of ball) area) or the second role link operation gate G2 (second predetermined (entry of ball) area), it becomes possible to execute an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance in a jackpot game that is generated by the passage (entry of a ball) of a game ball through the first role link operation gate G1 (first predetermined (entry of ball) area) or the second role link operation gate G2 (second predetermined (entry of ball) area). This makes it possible for an event such as a game presentation (predetermined presentation) to be immediately replayed after the end of the event such as a game presentation (predetermined presentation), shortening the time that the event such as a game presentation (predetermined presentation) is interrupted, and even if an event such as a game presentation (predetermined presentation) is forcibly terminated midway, the predetermined presentation is executed without any awkwardness, just as if the event such as a game presentation (predetermined presentation) had been executed continuously to the end.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be limited to a specific jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the specific jackpot game may be limited to, for example, a probability variable jackpot game, a 16R (probability variable) jackpot game (a jackpot game with a long play time (a predetermined number (e.g., 7 to 10) or more rounds are executed)), a 5R probability variable jackpot game, or a (5R) normal jackpot game. If the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a probability variable jackpot game, a privilege of re-executing a predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated in a probability variable game advantageous to the player is granted, further improving the player's advantage. In particular, if the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a jackpot game in which many (a predetermined number or more) rounds are executed, such as a 16R probability variable jackpot, the execution time of the specific jackpot game is long, so that it is possible to ensure sufficient time for re-executing an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect. In addition, if the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a normal jackpot game, this normal jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than a guaranteed jackpot game, so an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance that is forcibly terminated as compensation for the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is replayed.

When the non-set value is indicated or suggested when the game presentation is forcibly terminated by the operation of the continuous reel operation device, for example, the non-set value is indicated or suggested based on the points acquired before the game presentation is forcibly terminated. Also, when the game presentation is forcibly terminated, the player is disadvantaged because there is little time to acquire points, but this disadvantage can be compensated for by, for example, adding compensation points to the points acquired at the end of the game presentation, as will be explained in the seventh embodiment described later.

<Step S4119>
If the game presentation flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the 7-segment presentation start flag is set to ON (step S4119). The 7-segment presentation start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment presentation, and is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 86 when the game presentation is to end. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to start the 7-segment presentation due to the end of the game presentation. Then, if the 7-segment presentation start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4120, and if the 7-segment presentation start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4128.

<Steps S4120 and S4121>
If the 7-segment performance start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the value of the point counter (step S4120) and judges whether the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121). If the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4122, and if the value of the point counter is not 1 or more (if it is 0), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4122.

<Steps S4122 to S4124>
If the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process for clearly indicating or suggesting non-setting on the 7-segment display unit 39 (steps S4122 to S4124). The process of steps S4122 to S4124 in the setting value suggestion performance of this embodiment is basically the same as steps S2303 to S2306 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 49 in the first embodiment described above, and the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the first embodiment described above may be replaced with the acquired points in this embodiment. Specifically, in step S4122, the MPU 51 reads out segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the point counter value acquired in step S4120 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S4122 (step S4123), and executes control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on this control content (step S4124).

<Steps S4125 to S4127>
In step S4125, the MPU 51 clears the value of the point counter. Then, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment control flag to ON (step S4126), and sets the 7-segment performance start flag to OFF (step S4127), and ends the setting value suggestion performance.

<Step S4128>
If the 7-segment performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a 7-segment control flag indicating that the 7-segment display unit 39 is being controlled is set to ON, i.e., whether or not the 7-segment display unit 39 is being controlled (step S4128). If the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4329, and if the 7-segment control flag is set to OFF (step S4128: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion performance.

<Step S4129>
If the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a setting value suggestion presentation end flag that ends the setting value suggestion presentation is set to ON, that is, whether or not to end the 7-segment presentation (step S4129). If the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to ON (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4131, and if the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4130.

<Step S4130>
If the setting value suggestion effect end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the MPU 51 executes control of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S4130) and ends the setting value suggestion effect. That is, while the 7-segment control flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 sequentially controls the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the control content set in step S4123. This step S4130 is repeatedly executed by receiving the second role-linked gate sensor detection command in step S3907 in the command determination process of FIG. 82 until the setting value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON, that is, until the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. As a result, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points acquired by the player in the game is controlled, and the non-set value is clearly indicated or suggested.

In the 7-segment presentation, the number of segments A to G is controlled according to the points the player has acquired in the game, and the control status of segments A to G may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it easier to guess non-set values while preventing the occurrence of blank periods during which no presentation is being performed on the symbol display unit 341 between the end of the game presentation and the start of the big win game presentation.

In addition, the display contents (display history) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment performance may be displayed as an additional image in the pattern display unit 341 in the jackpot game. Specifically, the additional image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as an opening or ending performance of the jackpot game, for example. In addition, the additional image may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39, as in the first embodiment described above (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)). In this way, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment performance in the jackpot game is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, so that it is possible to confirm information about non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game. As a result, even if you do not know that information about non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if you miss the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if you have forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, you can once again recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value again based on the additional image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during a jackpot game, and recognize or guess the set value.

As described above, the residence time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole Krun device 60 is not constant, and it is assumed that the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole Krun device 60 in a time shorter than the design time (theoretical value). In other words, it is assumed that the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole Krun device 60 in a situation where the control of the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points acquired by the player in the game has not been completed, and the game ball 99 passes through the second role consecutive operation gate G2, thereby activating the role continuous operation device. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the control of the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points has not been completed, the 7-segment presentation is forcibly terminated when the role continuous operation device is activated. This prevents the 7-segment presentation from being executed in parallel during the execution of the big win game presentation, making it possible to properly execute the big win game presentation. Furthermore, if an additional image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during a jackpot game when the 7-segment presentation is forcibly terminated as described above, all of the information that was originally scheduled to be presented in the 7-segment presentation will be presented again by this additional image. This ensures that the player can enjoy the benefits according to the rights (points) acquired in the game presentation, even if the 7-segment presentation is forcibly terminated.

Even if a jackpot game is started by the operation of the continuous operation device of the role, it is possible to execute the 7-segment presentation in the same way as when the game presentation is forcibly terminated. For example, by not using the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game presentation, it is possible to continue executing the 7-segment presentation even during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, by not using a display device for indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the set value suggestion presentation in the jackpot game presentation, it is possible to continue executing the indicating or suggesting of a non-set value on the display device even when the jackpot game is executed. In this way, by indicating or suggesting a non-set value on a display device not used in the jackpot game, even if the jackpot game presentation starts in a situation where the control of the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points has not ended, it is possible to continue providing the player with information indicating or suggesting a non-set value, and the player can continue to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the non-set value even after the start of the jackpot game.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
If the setting value suggestion display end flag is set on (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S4131), sets the 7-segment control in progress flag to off (step S4132), and ends the setting value suggestion display processing.

In this embodiment, the 7-segment presentation ends when the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to on, but information indicating or suggesting non-setting may continue to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during jackpot play as well. In this way, by continuing to display information indicating or suggesting non-setting on the 7-segment display unit 39 during jackpot play, it becomes possible to guess the non-set value even while the jackpot play is being played. This allows more time to guess the non-set value, making it possible to more accurately guess the non-set value and increasing interest in jackpot play, which can tend to be boring.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first movement path R1 is selected when the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the reel is operated in a short time. On the other hand, when the second movement path R2 is selected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed, and while the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed, the game presentation is executed and information for identifying or guessing the non-set value according to the points acquired in the game presentation is provided in the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, by selecting the first movement path R1 when the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the reel can be operated in a short time, and it is possible to avoid wasting time until the start of the jackpot game (opening and closing execution mode), and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, by selecting the first movement path R1 when the game time of the player is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings such as irritation and discomfort due to the delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This suppresses a bad impression of the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed by selecting the second movement path R2 when the condition device is activated, information for identifying or guessing the non-set value is provided, making it possible to guess or identify the non-set value, and increasing the interest of the game. Thus, in this embodiment, when the condition device is activated, the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2 can be selected, and the advantages of selecting each of the movement paths R1 and R2 are different. This allows the player to select the movement paths R1 and R2 according to their own interests and circumstances, improving convenience and interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to sixth embodiments described above.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, when the condition device is activated, the player can select whether to move the game ball 99 along the first moving path R1 or the second moving path R2, and when the first moving path R1 is selected, the reel continuous operating device is activated in a short time, whereas when the second moving path R2 is selected, the operation of the reel continuous operating device is delayed by the one-hole crane device 60, and while the operation of the reel continuous operating device is delayed, the game presentation is executed and information for identifying or guessing non-set values is provided according to the points acquired in the game presentation.

However, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, the time that the game ball 99 stays in the one-hole Kloon device 60 is not necessarily constant, and variations in the time will occur, and in this case, it is assumed that the execution time of the game presentation will be shorter than the design time (theoretical time). If the execution time of the game presentation becomes shorter than the design time (theoretical time), the game presentation will be forcibly terminated, the expected value of points that can be acquired in the game presentation will be lower than the theoretical value, and the amount of information required to identify or guess non-set values will also be less than the expected value, which will be a disadvantage to the player, and may be a factor in reducing interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the reel continuous operation device is operated before the design time (theoretical time) in which a specific condition can be fulfilled is reached, i.e., if the specific time (e.g., the game presentation execution time) is shortened, a certain number of specific conditions are considered to be fulfilled in addition to the number of specific conditions that have already been fulfilled (e.g., the points acquired in the game). In this way, by considering a certain number of specific conditions to be fulfilled when the reel continuous operation device is operated before the theoretical time is reached, compensation is provided for cases in which the expected number of specific conditions to be fulfilled is low. This reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player when the time in which a specific condition can be fulfilled becomes shorter than the theoretical time (when the specific time is shortened), and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 89 and 90.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In this embodiment, a part of the procedure of the setting value suggestion presentation process is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Here, Fig. 89 and Fig. 90 (A) are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion presentation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 89, in the setting value suggestion presentation process of this embodiment, when the setting value suggestion presentation end flag is set to ON, even if the game presentation is in the middle of being executed (when the value of the game presentation time counter is not 0), the game presentation is ended, which is common to the sixth embodiment (steps S4116 to S4118).

<Step S4201>
In the setting value suggestion presentation process of this embodiment, when the game presentation is ended (step S4118), a compensation point addition process is executed (step S4201), and then the setting value suggestion presentation process is ended. In this compensation point addition process, compensation points are added to the points acquired by the player until the game presentation is forcibly ended, and the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are controlled based on the points to which the compensation points have been added.

Here, Figure 90 (B) shows an example of a compensation point determination table used by the voice lamp control device 5, and the MPU 51 determines the compensation point based on this compensation point determination table.

90(B), in the compensation point determination table, the compensation points are determined by the compensation point lottery counter for each game type, and the MPU 51 selects the compensation points according to the game type and the value of the compensation point lottery counter. The compensation point lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 149, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt processing in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. In the coin acquisition game (game A), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points, and 10 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, with the highest compensation point being 10 points, the highest of all games, and the higher the compensation point, the less likely it is to be selected. In the coin acquisition game (game A), the expected value of the compensation points is 6.9 points, the highest of all games. In the mission achievement game (game B), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, with the highest compensation point being relatively high at 8 points, and the higher the compensation point, the more likely it is to be selected. In the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of the compensation points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest among all games. In the battle game (game C), the compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is relatively high at 8 points, so that the higher compensation points are relatively easy to select. In the battle game (game C), the expected value of the compensation points is 3.8 points, which is an intermediate value among all games. In the quiz game (game D), the compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is relatively high at 8 points, so that the higher compensation points are relatively difficult to select. In the quiz game (game D), the expected value of the compensation points is 2.6 points, which is the second lowest among all games. In the prediction game (Game E), compensation points are selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 5 points depending on the value of the compensation point lottery counter, with the highest compensation point being 5 points, the lowest of all games, and the higher the compensation point, the harder it is to select. Also, in the prediction game (Game E), the expected value of compensation points is 1.4 points, the lowest of all games.

In this way, compensation points are awarded when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole Kloon device 60 in less time than the design time (theoretical time) (when the specific period is shortened), thereby compensating for the disadvantage suffered by the player due to the shortened time available to earn points in the game.

In addition, in the compensation point determination table, contrary to the initial points, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points, the easier it is to select high points as compensation points and the higher the expected value of compensation points, while the lower the difficulty of acquiring points, the harder it is to select high points as compensation points and the lower the expected value of compensation points, and there is a correlation between the difficulty of acquiring points and the compensation points and the expected value. In this way, the more disadvantageous the game is for the player, the easier it is to acquire large compensation, while the more advantageous the game is for the player, so that the more advantageous the game is for the player, the more advantageous it is for the game ball 99 to fall from the one-hole Krun device 60 in a time shorter than the design time (theoretical time), while the more advantageous the game is for the player, the more disadvantageous it is for the game ball 99 to fall from the one-hole Krun device 60 in a time shorter than the design time. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention not only to the game type but also to the time it takes for the game ball 99 to fall from the one-hole Krun device 60 depending on the game type, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, if the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole Kroon device 60 in a time shorter than the design time, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the compensation points acquired. In particular, if a game that is disadvantageous to the player is selected because the expected value of the initial points is low and the difficulty of acquiring points is high, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game ball 99 in the one-hole Kroon device 60 while hoping that the game ball 99 will fall from the one-hole Kroon device 60 in a time shorter than the design time in order to acquire many compensation points, and if the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole Kroon device 60 in a time shorter than the design time, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the compensation points while hoping that larger compensation points will be acquired.

In this embodiment, the difficulty of acquiring points is correlated with the compensation points and the expected value, but the difficulty of acquiring points may be inversely related to the compensation points and the expected value. That is, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points, the less likely it is that high points will be selected as compensation points and the lower the expected value of the compensation points. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty of acquiring points, the more likely it is that high points will be selected as compensation points and the higher the expected value of the compensation points. By defining the relationship between the difficulty of acquiring points and the compensation points and expected value in this way, compensation points proportional to the difficulty of acquiring points in each game can be awarded, so that the expected value of the points acquired in each game is maintained. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole cranes 60 in a shorter time than the design time when a game advantageous to the player is selected.

It is also conceivable that compensation points are awarded according to the remaining time of the game presentation (the time until the game ball falls from the one-hole Kroon device 60). For example, it is conceivable that the more time there is remaining in the game presentation (the shorter the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole Kroon device 60), the more points are awarded (the higher the expected value of the compensation points). In this case, the shorter the time in which points can be earned in the game, the more compensation points (expected value) there will be, so that compensation appropriate to the disadvantage suffered by the player is provided. Of course, even when compensation points are awarded according to the remaining time of the game presentation (the time until the game ball falls from the one-hole Kroon device 60), it is also conceivable that compensation points are awarded according to the game type (for example, the difficulty of earning points) as described above.

In addition, compensation points do not need to be set for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability for all games. In this case, the expected value of compensation points for each game is equalized, eliminating unfairness between games.

The selection rate for each compensation point may be equalized, and of course compensation points do not necessarily have to be awarded.

<Step S4202>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 89, in step S4202, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment presentation start flag to ON. This 7-segment presentation start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment presentation as described above, and is referred to in step S4119 of the setting value suggestion presentation process of FIG. 88. That is, in this embodiment, when the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole cranes device 60 is short and the game presentation is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment presentation is executed as a compensation presentation described later even after the operation of the role continuous operation device. As a result, even when the game presentation is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment presentation is executed as a compensation presentation based on the points obtained by adding the compensation points to the points acquired until the game presentation is forcibly terminated, and the player can be given information for guessing the non-set value.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 sets a compensation performance time counter, and further sets a compensation performance flag to ON (step S4204). The compensation performance time counter is a counter indicating the remaining time of the 7-segment performance executed as the compensation performance. The compensation performance flag is a flag indicating that the compensation performance is being executed, and is referred to by the MPU 51 in step S4205 to determine whether or not to set the 7-segment control flag to ON, and in step S4206 of FIG. 90 to execute the compensation performance.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 judges whether the compensation performance flag set to ON in step S4204 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the compensation performance is started as a 7-segment performance, and if it is not a compensation performance (step S4205: Yes), the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4126), and the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to ON, that is, the 7-segment performance that ends when the game ball 99 passes through the second role consecutive operation gate G2 is executed. On the other hand, if it is not a compensation performance (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 maintains the compensation performance flag on without setting the 7-segment control flag on, and executes a compensation performance that ends the 7-segment performance specified by the compensation performance time counter set in step S4203 when a specified time has elapsed (the value of the compensation performance time counter is 0).

<Step S4206>
If the 7-segment control flag set in step S4126 is off (step S4128: No), as shown in Fig. 90 (A), the MPU 51 judges whether the compensation performance flag set to on in step S4204 indicating that the compensation performance is being executed is on (step S4206). If the compensation performance flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4207, and if the compensation performance flag is off (step S4206: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion performance process.

<Steps S4207 and S4208>
If the compensation performance flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the compensation performance time counter (step S4207) and determines whether the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4208). If the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4210, and if the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4209.

<Steps S4209 to S4211>
If the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No), the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled (step S4209) in the same manner as in step S4130, and the setting value suggestion performance process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 (step S4210) in the same manner as in step S4131, and sets the compensation performance flag to OFF (step S4211), and terminates the setting value suggestion performance process.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole Kloon device 60 is short and the game presentation is forcibly terminated (when the specific period is shortened), the 7-segment presentation is executed as a compensation presentation even after the operation of the role device continuous operation device. This allows the 7-segment presentation to be executed as a compensation presentation even when the game presentation is forcibly terminated. This prevents the occurrence of a disadvantage suffered by the player due to the 7-segment presentation not being executed when the game presentation is forcibly terminated, that is, the disadvantage of not being able to obtain information to infer a non-set value. In addition, in the compensation presentation, the 7-segment presentation is executed as a compensation presentation based not only on the points acquired before the game presentation is forcibly terminated, but also on the points obtained by adding the compensation points. Therefore, for a player who suffers the disadvantage of losing some of the opportunities to acquire points in the game due to the game presentation being forcibly terminated, this disadvantage can be compensated for as compensation points.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to seventh embodiments described above.

Eighth embodiment
In the sixth embodiment, as explained in the seventh embodiment, the time that the game ball 99 stays in the one-hole Kloon device 60 is not necessarily constant, and if the execution time of the game presentation becomes shorter than the design time (theoretical time), the game presentation is forcibly terminated, the expected value of points that can be obtained in the game presentation becomes lower than the theoretical value, and the amount of information required to identify or guess non-set values is also less than the expected value, which is disadvantageous to the player and may be a factor in reducing interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation body delays the activation of the consecutive reel operation device when the game ball moves along the second movement path. For example, the rotation body is rotated so that, when the condition device is activated, the time required for the game ball to change from a predetermined posture (first posture) in a standby state to a specific posture (third posture) that moves the game ball to a predetermined area (e.g., the second consecutive gate) that starts the activation of the consecutive reel operation device is constant. In this way, the activation of the consecutive reel operation device is delayed by the drive of the rotation body, so that the delay time of the activation of the consecutive reel operation device by the consecutive reel operation device is equalized. This reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player when the time available to satisfy a certain condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 91 to 96.

In this embodiment, the configuration for delaying the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Here, FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 92(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 92(B) is a perspective view of the rotating body 70 provided on the game board 31, and FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the function of the rotating body 70.

As shown in Figures 91 and 92 (A), in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, instead of the crown device 60 of the sixth embodiment, a rotating body 70 is provided as a means for delaying the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, due to the adoption of the rotating body 70, the peripheral configuration of the rotating body 70 differs from that of the sixth embodiment.

The rotating body 70 restricts or delays the fall of the game ball 99 shot out on the second moving path R2 on the game board 31, and moves the game ball 99 to the second role-linked gate G2 located to the lower right of the rotating body 70. The rotating body 70 can be rotated in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front of the game board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), the rotating body 70 is approximately cylindrical with a constant thickness approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball 99, and has a storage section 701 and a peripheral surface 702. The storage section 701 is recessed toward the center in the radial direction and opens in the front-rear direction D1 and the radial outward side. That is, the storage section 701 has an open cross-sectional structure (a structure in which part of the periphery is not surrounded (an open structure)). The storage section 701 can store one game ball 99 to be shot out to the second moving path R2, and when the rotating body 70 is rotated with the game ball 99 stored in the storage section 701, the game ball 99 stored in the storage section 701 is released while rolling toward the second role-linked operation gate G2 (see FIG. 93(B) and FIG. 93(C)). That is, the release section of the game ball 99 in the delay means is not limited to a closed cross-sectional structure such as the release section 602 of the Kluen device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above, with respect to the release direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99, but may have an open cross-sectional structure such as the storage section 701 of the rotating body 70. That is, the release section of the delay means may have a configuration in which at least a part is open, as long as the game ball 99 can be released while rolling one by one toward the second role-linked operation gate G2, which is a predetermined area (ball entry area), and may be configured as a groove, a notch, or the like. Of course, the storage section 701 of the rotating body 70 in this embodiment may have a closed cross-sectional structure with respect to the release direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99.

As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92(A), a separation nail 481 and a guide nail 482 are provided above the rotating body 70 to guide the game ball 99 shot out on the second moving path R2 to the rotating body 70. The separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 are basically the same as the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 of the sixth embodiment described above, but the lowest ends of the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 form a holding portion 485 that holds the game ball 99 in contact with the peripheral surface 702 of the rotating body 70 (see FIG. 93(A)). The game ball 99 is held in contact with the peripheral surface 702 of the rotating body 70 in the holding portion 485, so that it rolls relatively on the peripheral surface 702, and is accommodated in the accommodation portion 701 when the accommodation portion 701 of the rotating body 70 is in an upwardly open position (see FIG. 93(B)). The holding portion 485 may be formed of a member such as resin. In this case, the holding portion 485 is formed, for example, as a gate that penetrates vertically.

A second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided near the holding section 485, and this second route detection sensor Rs2 detects that the game ball 99 has been shot out on the second movement path R2, as in the sixth embodiment described above. The second route detection sensor Rs2 can further detect that the game ball 99 is being held in the holding section 485. Note that a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 is being held in the holding section 485 may be provided separately from the second route detection sensor Rs2. In this case, the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided above (upstream) the sensor that detects that the game ball 99 is being held in the holding section 485. This allows the game ball 99 shot out on the second movement path R2 to be detected earlier than when the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided near the holding section 485. Furthermore, when the holding unit 485 is configured as a gate, the holding unit 485 may be configured to include a second route detection sensor Rs2, similar to the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 and the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

The separation nail 481 is also provided with a drop portion 486 that is spaced apart from the diameter of the game ball 99. The drop portion 486 has the role of dropping the game ball 99 that is shot out to the second moving path R2 when the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485 downward from the left side of the second role linkage gate G2 (see FIG. 93 (A)). In this way, by providing the drop portion 486 on the separation nail 481 and dropping the game ball 99 that is shot out to the second moving path R2 when the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485 downward from the left side of the second role linkage gate G2, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring on the second moving path R2 when a large number of game balls 99 are shot out when the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485.

As described above, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is disposed on the lower right of the rotating body 70, and a guide nail 487 is provided above this second role-linked operation gate G2. When the game ball 99 held in the holding portion 485 of the rotating body 70 is released from the rotating body 70, the guide nail 487 guides the game ball 99 to the second role-linked operation gate G2 (see FIG. 93 (C)).

As described above, the rotating body 70 can rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, but the rotating state and the stopped state are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(A), when the condition device is not operated, the rotating body 70 is stopped in a first posture in which the storage section 701 opens downward, and the stopped position is fixed. When the condition device is operated, if the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 (if it is detected that the game ball 99 is held in the holding section 485), the MPU 51 starts the rotation of the rotating body 70 in a clockwise direction, and stops the rotation of the rotating body 70 when the rotating body 70 is again in the first posture. In other words, the rotating body 70 starts rotating from a fixed position, and when it reaches the fixed position again by rotating once, the rotation is stopped at the fixed position. When the rotating body 70 rotates once from the first position, it passes through the second position shown in FIG. 93(B) and the third position shown in FIG. 93(C). The second position shown in FIG. 93(B) is a position in which the storage section 701 of the rotating body 70 opens upward, and in this second position, the game ball 99 held in the holding section 485 falls into the storage section 701 by its own weight and is stored therein. The third position shown in FIG. 93(C) is a position in which the storage section 701 of the rotating body 70 opens to the right, and in this third position, the game ball 99 stored in the storage section 701 is released.

Here, when the rotating body 70 rotates, the rotation speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or approximately constant at least from the first position shown in FIG. 93(A) to the third position shown in FIG. 93(C). As described above, the position of the rotating body 70 in the standby state is the first position, and the rotation speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or approximately constant at least from the first position to the third line of sight, and the time for which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed is constant or approximately constant. This prevents the game presentation from being forcibly ended by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role before the end of the game presentation, thereby preventing the time in which points can be earned from being shortened. As a result, irritation and discomfort caused by the forcible end of the game presentation or the 7-segment presentation (setting value suggestion presentation) is prevented, and the disadvantage suffered by the player due to the shortening of the time in which points can be earned can be eliminated, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The rotation speed of the rotating body 70 when it is rotated is set to a rotation speed at which the time it takes for the rotating body 70 to change from the first position to the third position is approximately the same as the design time (theoretical time) of the stay time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole Kroon device 60 in the sixth embodiment described above. Specifically, the time it takes for the rotating body 70 to change from the first position to the third position is set, for example, in a range of 1 minute to 20 minutes, preferably in a range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes, and typically set to about 10 minutes. By setting the time it takes for the rotating body 70 to change from the first position to the third position in such a range, it is possible to reliably execute the game presentation and the setting value suggestion presentation, including the 7-segment presentation, while the operation of the role continuous operation device is delayed by the rotating body 70.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 70 is described as being rotatable in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, but the rotating body 70 may be rotatable in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, or may be rotatable in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from below, such as a roulette. In other words, there are no particular limitations on the rotating direction or shape of the rotating body 70, as long as it is possible to delay the operation of the reel continuous operation device.

In addition, the rotation drive method of the rotating body 70 does not necessarily have to be a method in which the rotation starts from the first position and rotates once at a constant or approximately constant rotation speed, as long as the drive method is a drive method in which the delay time of the operation of the role continuous operation device is constant or approximately constant. For example, the rotation may be started from the first position, and the rotating body 70 may be stopped for a certain period of time at one or more positions such as the second position or the third position, and then rotated again. When the rotating body 70 is stopped in the second position, the game ball 99 held in the holding portion 485 can be reliably accommodated in the storage portion 701 of the rotating body 70. In addition, when the rotating body 70 is stopped in the third position, the game ball 99 stored in the storage portion 701 of the rotating body 70 can be reliably guided to the second role continuous operation gate G2 and passed through.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the condition device is operated, if the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 (if it is detected that the game ball 99 is held in the holding section 485), the rotating body 70 starts rotating in the clockwise direction, but the rotating body 70 may be rotated all the time. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the rotating body 70 at a constant or approximately constant speed, but in addition to rotating at an inconstant speed, it may be driven to rotate irregularly by repeating rotation and stopping. By rotating the rotating body 70 all the time in this way, the time for which the operation of the role continuous operating device is delayed depends on the timing at which the game ball 99 is shot out to the second moving path R2 (the attitude of the rotating body 70 (the position of the storage section 701)). Therefore, by constantly rotating the rotating body 70, the player can select the time to delay the operation of the continuous operation device of the role-playing device depending on the timing of launching the game ball 99, which increases the interest of the game.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 94 to 96, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
In the sub timer interruption process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, in addition to the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) of the sub timer interruption process in the sixth embodiment described above, a rotating body operation control process is executed (see step S4301 in FIG. 94). Also, in the sub timer interruption process of this embodiment, the content of the command determination process is different from that of the sub timer interruption process in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 82) (see FIG. 95).

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received, a process required for operating the rotating body 70 is executed, unlike the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Here, Fig. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Steps S4401 and S4402>
95, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value suggestion effect start flag to ON (step S3904), in the same manner as when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation start flag to ON (step S4401), sets the rotating body operation time counter (step S4402), and ends the command determination process.

The rotating body operation start flag is a flag that starts the rotation of the rotating body 70, and is referenced by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to start the rotation of the rotating body 70 in step S4501 of the rotating body operation control process in Figure 96 described below.

The rotating body operation time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining operation time (rotation time) of the rotating body 70, and the rotation of the rotating body 70 is stopped when the value of the rotating body operation time counter becomes 0. In other words, when the condition device is operated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 (when it is detected that the game ball 99 is being held by the holding portion 485), the MPU 51 sets the rotating body rotation start flag to ON to start the rotation of the rotating body 70, and sets the rotating body operation time counter that specifies the rotation time of the rotating body 70.

The value of the rotating body operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time for the rotating body 70 to again assume the first posture (see FIG. 93(A)) when the rotation of the rotating body 70 starts from the first posture (see FIG. 93(A)) and rotates at a constant speed. The operation of the rotating body 70 may also be controlled using a sensor capable of detecting the posture of the rotating body. For example, a detection sensor such as an optical sensor may be provided in each of the portions where the storage section 701 is located when the rotating body 70 is in the first to third postures, and the operation of the rotating body 70 may be controlled while checking the position of the storage section 701 using these sensors.

[Rotating Body Operation Control Processing]
In the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to start rotation of the rotating body 70 and to stop rotation of the rotating body 70. Here, Fig. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment.

<Step S4501>
96, in the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a rotating body operation start flag for starting rotation of the rotating body 70 is set to ON (step S4501). If the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4502, and if the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4505.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
If the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the rotation of the rotating body 70 from the first attitude (see FIG. 93A) so that the rotating body 70 rotates at a constant speed (step S4502), and sets the rotating body operation flag indicating that the rotating body 70 is rotating to ON (step S4503).Then, the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation start flag to OFF (step S4504), and ends the rotating body operation control process.

<Step S4505>
If the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the rotating body operation flag, which is set to ON in step S4503 and indicates that the rotating body 70 is rotating, is set to ON, i.e., whether or not the rotating body 70 is rotating (step S4505). If the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506, and if the rotating body operation flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 ends the rotating body operation control process.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
If the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating body operation time counter indicating the remaining rotation time of the rotating body 70 (step S4506), and determines whether the value of the rotating body operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507). If the value of the rotating body operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4508, and if the value of the rotating body operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), the MPU 51 ends the rotating body operation control process.

<Steps S4508 and S4509>
If the value of the rotating body operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 stops the rotation of the rotating body 70 (step S4508), sets the rotating body operation flag to OFF (step S4509), and ends the rotating body operation control process. In this way, by stopping the rotation of the rotating body 70 when the value of the rotating body operation time counter becomes 0, the rotating body 70 rotates once and returns to the first attitude (see FIG. 93A).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 (when it is detected that the game ball 99 is held by the holding section 485), the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the same first posture at each rotation and rotates at the same constant speed at each rotation. Therefore, when the rotation body 70 is used to delay the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role, the time for which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed at the rotation body 70 is uniform. This prevents the game presentation from being forcibly ended by the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role before the end of the game presentation, thereby preventing the time in which points can be earned from being shortened. As a result, irritation and discomfort caused by the game presentation or the 7-segment presentation (setting value suggestion presentation) being forcibly ended is prevented, and the disadvantage suffered by the player due to the shortening of the time in which points can be earned can be eliminated, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The delay means for delaying the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is not limited to the one-hole crane device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above or the rotating body 70 of this embodiment, but may be other means. The delay means may be any means that delays the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role by delaying or stopping the downward fall of the game ball 99, and may be, for example, a means for lengthening the moving path, a means for reducing the moving speed, or a means for opening and closing the upper opening of the second role gate. Such a delay means may be, for example, a means for defining the moving path of the game ball 99 by a member made of resin or the like that is attached to the game board 31, or a means for adjusting the layout of the nails that are driven into the game board 31. The delay means may also be a means for moving the game ball 99 that has reached a predetermined position upward once or multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, to the extent applicable, design changes similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments described above are possible, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to eighth embodiments described above.

[Ninth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, a case was described in which the player can select whether to move the game ball 99 along a first moving path R1 or a second moving path R2, which have different times from when the game ball 99 is shot to when the role-playing device is activated, depending on the launch strength of the game ball 99.

However, if the player is required to select whether the game ball 99 will move along the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 depending on the launch strength of the game ball 99, there is a concern that the game ball 99 may be launched along a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention due to an error in adjusting the launch strength or the game ball 99 not being launched properly. If the game ball 99 is launched along a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention in this way, it is expected that the player's impression of the gaming machine may be negatively affected due to feelings of irritation and discomfort.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the movement path along which the game ball can move is switched by the distribution member which is activated in response to the operation of the condition device. In this way, the movement path along which the game ball can move is switched by the distribution member, and the player can select whether to move the game ball along the first movement path or the second movement path by firing the game ball while checking the operation of the distribution member. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing strength, reducing the possibility that a movement path contrary to the player's intention will be selected, and suppressing a negative impression of the gaming machine.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 97 to 105. Note that Figure 105 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the configuration for allowing the player to select whether to pass the game ball 99 through the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2 differs from that of the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 (see FIG. 64) in the fifth embodiment is used instead of the seven-segment display unit 39 as a device for indicating or suggesting a non-set value. Here, FIG. 97 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 97 for explaining the function of the distribution member 80.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the branching portion 48 in the sixth embodiment described above is omitted, and the gaming ball 99 shot toward the right area of the gaming board 31 is guided to the upper right part of the gaming board 31 by the fourth moving path R4 defined between the decorative portion 310 and the outer rail 312. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a distribution member 80 is provided above the separation nail 481, and by switching the position of the distribution member 80, it is possible to select whether the gaming ball 99 is to pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2.

As shown in Fig. 98(A) and Fig. 98(B), the distribution member 80 has a distribution section 801 and a rotating shaft 802. The distribution member 80 can be rotated left and right around the rotating shaft 802 in a front view of the game ball board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, and can be switched between a first posture shown in Fig. 98(A) and a second posture shown in Fig. 98(B). The first posture shown in Fig. 98(A) is a posture that guides the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 to a first moving path R1 that can pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1, and restricts the guidance of the game ball 99 to a second moving path R2 (one-hole crane device 60) that can pass through the second role-linked operation gate G2. On the other hand, the second position shown in FIG. 98(B) is a position that guides the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 to the second movement path R2 (one-hole crane device 60) that can pass through the second role-linked operation gate G2, and restricts the guidance of the game ball 99 to the first movement path R1 that can pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1.

As described above, the distribution member 80 can rotate between the first and second positions, but the rotational and stopped states are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(A), when the condition device is not activated, the distribution member 80 is stopped in the first position and the stopped position is fixed. Therefore, when the condition device is not activated, the distribution member 80 is in the first position, and when a game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 is guided toward the first role-linked operation gate G1.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the game ball 99 is guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482, but in this embodiment, the guide nail 482 does not have a drop portion 483 through which the game ball 99 can pass. As a result, when the distribution member 80 is in the first position, all game balls 99 are guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 and pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1, while the guidance of the game ball 99 to the one-hole Krun device 60 is limited. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is shot out to the right area of the game board 31 with the condition device not being operated, the guidance of a large number of game balls 99 to the one-hole Krun device 60 is limited, and ball clogging of the game balls 99 in the one-hole Krun device 60 is prevented.

When the condition device is activated, the MPU 51 switches the position of the distribution member 80 between the first position and the second position at regular time intervals. When the condition device is activated, the MPU 51 stops the distribution member 80 in the first position when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2. By stopping the distribution member 80 in the first position when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 in this way, even if the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 when the condition device is activated, the induction of a large number of game balls 99 to the one-hole Krun device 60 is limited, and ball clogging of the game balls 99 in the one-hole Krun device 60 is prevented.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 104, focusing on the differences from the aforementioned sixth embodiment.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
In the sub timer interruption process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, in addition to the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) of the sub timer interruption process in the sixth embodiment described above, a distribution member operation control process is executed (see step S4601 in FIG. 99). Also, in the sub timer interruption process of this embodiment, the content of the command determination process is different from that of the sub timer interruption process in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 82) (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when it is determined that a condition device operation command, a first gate detection command, and a second gate detection command have been received, a process required for the operation of the rotating body 70 is executed, unlike the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Here, Figures 100 and 101 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S4701>
100, when it is determined that the condition device operation command has been received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation presentation start flag to ON (step S3902) to start the game explanation presentation, in the same manner as when it is determined that the condition device operation command has been received in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the left operation flag to ON (step S4701) and ends the command determination process.

Here, the left operation flag is a flag for rotating the distribution member 80 to the left as viewed from the front in order to switch the position of the distribution member 80 from the first position shown in FIG. 98(A) to the second position shown in FIG. 98(B), and is referenced by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to rotate (operate) the distribution member 80 to the left in step S4801 of the distribution member operation control process in FIG. 102 described later. In other words, the left operation flag is also a flag for starting the switching control of the distribution member 80 in the distribution member operation control process. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the condition device is operated, the distribution member 80 is immediately switched to the second position capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the second moving path R2, that is, the second position capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the one-hole crane device 60 (second role-linked operation gate G2).

<Steps S4702 and S4703>
If the MPU 51 determines that it has not received a conditional device operation command (step S3901: No), it determines whether it has received a first route detection command (step S4702), and if it determines that it has received the first route detection command (step S4702: Yes), it sets the first route detection flag to on (step S4703) and terminates the command determination process.

The first route detection command is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 when the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 before the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball when the condition device is operating. The first route detection flag is a flag that stops the distribution member 80 in the first position shown in FIG. 98(A) when the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball before the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99, and is referenced by the MPU 51 in steps S4806 and S4820 of the distribution member operation control process in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 described later to determine whether to stop the distribution member 80 in the first position shown in FIG. 98(A) and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80.

<Step S4704>
101, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value suggestion effect start flag to ON (step S3904) in the same manner as when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to ON (step S4704) and ends the command determination process.

The second route detection command is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 when the condition device is operating and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. The second route detection flag is a flag that stops the distribution member 80 in the first position shown in FIG. 98(A) when the game ball is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, and is referenced by the MPU 51 in steps S4808 and S4822 of the distribution member operation control process in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 described later to determine whether to stop the distribution member 80 in the first position shown in FIG. 98(A) and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80.

[Distributing member operation control process]
In the sorting member control process of this embodiment, a process is executed in which the attitude of the sorting member 80 is controlled to a stopped state in a first attitude shown in Fig. 98(A) and is controlled to a rotating state in which the first attitude shown in Fig. 98(A) and the second attitude shown in Fig. 98(B) are switched. Here, Figs. 102 to 104 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the sorting member operation control process of this embodiment.

<Step S4801>
As shown in Fig. 102, in the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801). Here, the left operation flag is a flag that is set to ON when the condition device is activated (see Fig. 100), and is a flag that starts the switching control of the distribution member 80 by rotating the distribution member 80 to the left as viewed from the front. That is, the switching control of the distribution member 80 is triggered by the activation of the condition device. If the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4802, and if the left operation flag is set to OFF (step S4801: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4805 in Fig. 103.

<Steps S4802 to S4804>
When the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the left in the front view (step S4802). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first attitude shown in FIG. 98(A) to the second attitude shown in FIG. 98(B), and switching control of the distribution member 80 is started with the operation of the condition device as a trigger. In this way, the switching control of the distribution member 80 is started with the operation of the condition device as a trigger, so that it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been operated when switching of the distribution member 80 is started, and it is possible to recognize that the operation of the role continuous operation device is possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls 99 from being shot out unnecessarily toward the role continuous operation gates G1 and G2 during a state in which the condition device is not operated, for example, during the execution of a variable game, and the disadvantage suffered by the player is reduced. Then, the MPU 51 sets the left movement flag, which indicates that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the left (is in the second attitude), to ON (step S4803). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the left operation time counter (step S4804), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

The left operation time counter indicates the remaining time that the distribution member 80 maintains the second position (the remaining time until it switches to the first position), and when the value of the left operation time counter becomes 0, the distribution member 80 is rotated to the right, switching the position of the distribution member 80 from the second position to the first position. The value of the left operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time that allows the player to select the second movement path R2 with ample time, for example. Specifically, the value of the left operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to a time that is set, for example, in the range of 1 to 20 seconds, preferably in the range of 2 to 10 seconds, and more preferably in the range of 2 to 7 seconds.

<Step S4805>
If the left operation flag is set to OFF (step S4801: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a left movement flag indicating that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the left (is in the second position) is set to ON (step S4805), as shown in Fig. 103. If the left movement flag is set to ON (step S4805: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4805, and if the left movement flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4819 in Fig. 104.

<Steps S4806 and S4807>
When the left moving flag is set to ON (step S4805: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the first route detection flag (see FIG. 100), which is set to ON upon detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1, is set to ON (step S4806). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80 upon detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1. When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4806: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag to OFF (step S4807) and shifts the process to step S4816. On the other hand, when the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4808.

<Steps S4808 and S4809>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second route detection flag (see FIG. 101), which is set to ON upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2, is set to ON (step S4808). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80 upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to OFF (step S4809) and shifts the process to step S4816. On the other hand, when the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4810.

<Steps S4810 and S4811>
If the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the left operation time counter indicating the remaining time for which the sorting member 80 maintains the second posture (the remaining time until switching to the first posture) (step S4810), and judges whether the value of the left operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4811). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is time to switch the sorting member 80 from the second posture to the first posture. If the value of the left operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4812, and if the value of the left operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4811: No), the MPU 51 ends the sorting member control process.

<Steps S4812 to S4815>
If the value of the left operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the right based on the passage of a specified time (step S4812). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second attitude to the first attitude, and the guidance of the game ball 99 to the first movement path R1 (first role-linked operation gate G1) is permitted, and the guidance of the game ball 99 to the second movement path R2 (second role-linked operation gate G2) is restricted (see FIG. 98 (A)). Then, the MPU 51 sets a right movement flag indicating that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the right (is in the first attitude) to ON (step S4813). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the right operation time counter (step S4814), sets the left movement flag to OFF (step S4815), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

Here, the right operation time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time that the distribution member 80 maintains the first posture (the remaining time until switching to the second posture), and when the value of the right operation time counter becomes 0, the distribution member 80 is rotated leftward to switch the posture of the distribution member 80 from the first posture to the second posture. The value of the right operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time that the player can select the first moving path R1 with plenty of time, and is set to approximately the same as the value of the left operation time counter described above. That is, the value of the right operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time that is set, for example, in the range of 1 second to 20 seconds, preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 10 seconds, and more preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 7 seconds. In addition, by setting the value of the right operation time counter to approximately the value of the left operation time counter described above, the distribution member 80 is regularly switched between the first posture and the second posture. This makes it easier for the player to determine the timing of launching the game ball 99 that selects the first moving path R1 and the second moving path R2.

<Steps S4816 to S4818>
When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4806: Yes), the first route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4807), or when the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4808: Yes), the second route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4809), the MPU 51 rotates the sorting member 80 to the right (step S4816). As a result, when either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 is selected, the attitude of the sorting member 80 is switched from the second attitude to the first attitude. Furthermore, the MPU 51 clears the value of the left operation time counter (step S4817), sets the left movement flag to OFF (step S4818), and ends the sorting member operation control process. In other words, when a game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after the MPU 51 has started the switching control of the distribution member 80, it stops the distribution member 80 in the first posture shown in Figure 98 (A) and terminates the switching control of the distribution member 80.

<Step S4819>
If the left moving flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a right moving flag, which indicates that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the right (is in the first posture), is set to ON (step S4819), as shown in Fig. 104. If the right moving flag is set to ON (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4820, and if the right moving flag is set to OFF (step S4818: No), the MPU 51 ends the sorting member operation control process.

<Steps S4820 and S4821>
When the right moving flag is set to ON (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the first route detection flag (see FIG. 100), which is set to ON upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1, is set to ON (step S4820). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80 upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1. When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4820: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag to OFF (step S4821) and shifts the process to step S4830. On the other hand, when the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4822.

<Steps S4822 and S4823>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second route detection flag (see FIG. 101), which is set to ON upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2, is set to ON (step S4822). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and terminate the switching control of the distribution member 80 upon the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4822: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to OFF (step S4823) and shifts the process to step S4830. On the other hand, when the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4824.

<Steps S4824 and S4825>
When the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the right operation time counter indicating the remaining time for which the sorting member 80 maintains the first posture (the remaining time until switching to the second posture) (step S4824), and judges whether the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4825). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to switch the sorting member 80 from the first posture to the second posture. When the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4826, and when the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4825: No), the MPU 51 ends the sorting member control process.

<Steps S4826 to S4829>
If the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the left based on the passage of the specified time (step S4826). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first attitude to the second attitude, and the guidance of the game ball 99 to the second movement path R2 (second role-linked operation gate G2) is permitted, and the guidance of the game ball 99 to the first movement path R1 (first role-linked operation gate G1) is restricted (see FIG. 98 (B)). Then, the MPU 51 sets the left movement flag indicating that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the left (is in the second attitude) to ON (step S4827). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the left operation time counter (step S4828), sets the right movement flag to OFF (step S4829), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

<Steps S4830 and S4831>
When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4820: Yes) and the first route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4821), or when the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4822: Yes) and the second route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4823), the MPU 51 clears the value of the right operation time counter (step S4830), sets the right movement flag to OFF (step S4831), and ends the distribution member operation control process. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after the start of the switching control of the distribution member 80, the MPU 51 stops the distribution member 80 in the first attitude shown in FIG. 98(A) and ends the switching control of the distribution member 80.

As described above, in this embodiment, by controlling the switching of the distribution member 80 in response to the operation of the condition device, a state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the first movement path R1 capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the first role-linked operation gate G1 and a state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the second movement path R2 capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the second role-linked operation gate G2 (one-hole crane device 60) can be switched. As a result, the player can select whether the game ball 99 will pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2 by controlling the switching of the distribution member 80 to operate the continuous operation device of the role by shooting the game ball 99 while checking the operation of the distribution member 80. Therefore, since it is not necessary to adjust the shooting strength of the game ball 99 to select the role-linked operation gates G1 and G2 that operate the continuous operation device of the role, the continuous operation device of the role is prevented from being operated by the role-linked operation gates G1 and G2 against the player's will. Specifically, when a player wishes to immediately start a jackpot game by selecting the first role-linked operation gate G1, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is selected against the player's will, which prevents the operation of the consecutive role-linked operation device from being delayed. Conversely, when a player wishes to obtain information necessary to infer a set value, such as a non-set value, by selecting the second role-linked operation gate G2, the first role-linked operation gate G1 is selected against the player's will, which prevents the jackpot game from being started immediately. As a result, a negative impression of the gaming machine 10 is suppressed.

In this embodiment, the game ball 99 launched toward the right area of the game board 31 moves along the fourth moving path R4, and the game ball 99 is distributed by the distribution member 80 to the first moving path R1 or the second moving path R2 that can be guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2 (one-hole Kloon device 60). However, the distribution of the first moving path R1 or the second moving path R2 that can be guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2 (one-hole Kloon device 60) using the distribution member 80 is not limited to the method described above. For example, the distribution member 80 can be applied to the configuration in which the role-linked operation gates G1 and G2 that allow the game ball 99 to pass are selected by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball 99 to the first moving path R1 and the second moving path R2 described in the sixth to eighth embodiments. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a distribution member 80 may be provided on the left end side of the branching section 48 that defines the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2, and either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 may be selected by switching the distribution member 80, as shown by solid and virtual lines in FIG. 105. By making either the second movement path R2 selectable by switching the distribution member 80 in this manner, when shooting the game ball 99 toward the right area of the game board 31, either the first movement path R1 or the second movement path R2 can be selected without adjusting the launch strength. This eliminates the need to adjust the launch strength, preventing a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention from being selected, and suppressing a negative impression of the game machine.

In this case, it is preferable that the distribution member 80 executes switching control during the period from when it is activated by the condition device until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2. However, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is executed, it is expected that the player will mistakenly believe that it is necessary to launch the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31. Therefore, by setting the period during which the distribution member 80 is switched to the period from when it is activated by the condition device until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the player is prevented from unnecessarily launching the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31.

In addition, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is not executed, such as when the condition device or the consecutive operation device of the accessory is not operating, it is preferable that the distribution member 80 is stopped in a posture that allows the movement of the game ball 99 on the first moving path R1 and restricts the movement of the game ball 99 on the second moving path R2. By setting the posture of the distribution member 80 when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is not executed in this way, even if the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a situation where the consecutive operation device of the accessory cannot be operated, the game ball 99 can be prevented from being guided to the crown device 60. This prevents ball clogging in the crown device 60 when a large number of game balls 99 are shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a situation where the consecutive operation device of the accessory cannot be operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, to the extent applicable, design changes similar to those in the first to eighth embodiments described above are possible, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to eighth embodiments described above.

In addition, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the condition device is activated, if the first route detection sensor Rs1 detects the game ball 99 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the detection of the game ball 99 by the second role gate sensor Gs2 is invalidated, and if the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the detection of the game ball 99 by the first role gate sensor Gs1 is invalidated. In other words, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is selected by one movement path (joint operation sensor), the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is restricted by the other movement path (joint operation sensor). In contrast, when the condition device is activated, if a predetermined condition is established, it is also possible to change the movement path (joint operation sensor) that activates the consecutive operation device of the role after one movement path is selected to the other movement path (joint operation sensor). For example, when the condition device is activated, if the movement of the game ball on one of the moving paths is detected, the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is permitted by the game ball launched on the other moving path, so that it is possible to change the moving path for activating the consecutive operation device of the role by launching the game ball on the other moving path after one moving path is selected. This allows the player to change the moving path according to his or her own will when the player has selected the wrong moving path or when the player has changed his or her mind after selecting the moving path. Specifically, when the condition device is activated, for example, if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed in the one-hole crane device 60, but during that time, the game ball 99 is launched on the first moving path R1, so that the first role gate sensor Gs1 can detect the game ball 99 before the second role gate sensor Gs2 detects the game ball 99. Therefore, not only can the player change the originally desired movement path when a movement path against the player's will is selected, but also when the player wishes to start a jackpot game immediately when the operation of the consecutive operation device of the role is delayed in the single-hole crane device 60, for example, when it is clear that many or desired points will not be obtained in the game presentation, the player can start the jackpot game immediately.

It is preferable that the predetermined condition under which the role-linked operation gate that operates the consecutive operation device of the reels is changed from the previously selected condition is a condition that can be established by the player. In this way, by having the predetermined condition be a condition that can be established by the player, it becomes possible for the player to change the role-linked operation gate that operates the consecutive operation device of the reels at his/her will.

In addition, various methods are conceivable for changing the role-linked operation gate that operates the role-linked operation device from the one selected earlier. For example, if one of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the other route detection sensor, it is conceivable to hold the detection of the game ball 99 at the other role-linked operation gate (the other role-linked operation sensor) that is provided on the same moving path as the other route detection sensor for a certain period of time (for example, a flag that holds the detection hold for a certain period of time is set). In other words, it is conceivable to allow the change of the role-linked operation gate that operates the role-linked operation device for a certain period of time. This allows the change of the moving path if the player wishes to change it by selecting a moving path against the player's will before the certain period of time has passed, while preventing the moving path that operates the role-linked operation device from being changed against the player's will after the certain period of time has passed, making it possible to more appropriately reflect the player's will.

As a method of changing the role-linked operation gate that operates the other role-linked operation device from the one selected earlier, for example, when one of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 earlier than the other route detection sensor, and the operation of the role-linked operation device due to the passage of the game ball 99 at the other role-linked operation gate (the other role-linked operation sensor) provided on the same moving path as the other route detection sensor is restricted, it is also possible to release and enable the restriction on the operation of the role-linked operation device due to the passage of the game ball 99 at the other role-linked operation gate (the other role-linked operation sensor) when a certain number (one or more) of game balls 99 are detected by the other route detection sensor. In this case, after one role-linked operation gate is selected earlier, the role-linked operation gate that operates the role-linked operation device can be changed from the one selected earlier by shooting out a certain number of game balls 99 or more on the moving path of the other route detection sensor to cause the other route detection sensor to detect a certain number of game balls 99. In addition, by setting the condition for releasing the restriction on the operation of the continuous operation device of the role object due to the passage of the game ball 99 by the other role operation sensor to a certain number of game balls 99 being detected by the other route detection sensor, it becomes necessary to shoot at least a certain number of game balls along the other movement path, which prevents the restriction on the operation of the continuous operation device of the role object due to the passage of the game ball 99 by the other role operation sensor being released against the player's will.

It is also possible to omit one or both of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2, and to keep the role-linked operation sensor active rather than disabling it until the role-linked operation device is activated.

Furthermore, it is also conceivable that when the operation button 20 or the like is operated by the player, it would be possible to cancel the disablement of the detection of the game ball 99 at the other role activation gate (the other role linked activation sensor).

In addition, when the role operation gate that operates the role operation device is changed from the one previously selected, for example, when the operation of the role operation device at the second role operation gate G2 is selected first, if the movement of the game ball 99 is detected on the first moving path R1 before the role operation device is operated, or the role operation device is operated by the passage of the game ball at the first role operation gate G1, it is possible to forcibly end the game presentation even in the middle of the game presentation, that is, to forcibly end the specific period in which a specific condition is established. Such a forced end of the specific period can be performed at the player's discretion, for example, by launching the game ball 99 on the first moving path R1 after the operation of the role operation device at the second role operation gate G2 is selected first. In this way, the player can end the specific period (the presentation of acquiring numerical indicators such as the game presentation), and therefore the specific period can be ended at the player's discretion. This allows the player to decide the timing of operating the role operation device even after the start of the specific period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the sixth to ninth embodiments, the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2 are provided in the right region of the game board 31, but at least one of the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2 may be provided in a position where the game ball 99 shot into the left region of the game board 31 can pass through. In other words, if it is possible for the role-linked operation device to operate (generate a jackpot) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball 99 through a predetermined region (entry region), the predetermined region (entry region) may be provided in a position where it can be passed through when hitting from the left and a position where it can be passed through when hitting from the right. For example, the first role-linked operation gate G1 may be provided in the left region of the game board 31, while the second role-linked operation gate G2 may be provided in the right region of the game board 31. In this case, when the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the reels can be activated immediately by hitting from the left, starting the big win game in a short time, and the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reels (start of the big win game) can be delayed by hitting from the right, to obtain information that indicates or suggests a non-set value. Also, if the consecutive operation gate can be selected by hitting from the left or right, the selection of the consecutive operation gate can be made easier.

In the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2 are each provided with individual combination gates G1, G2 and combination gate sensors Gs1, Gs2, but it is also possible to provide one combination gate and combination gate sensor and share one combination gate and combination gate sensor on both the first movement path R1 and the second movement path R2. In other words, if it is possible for the combination device to be activated (to generate a jackpot) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball 99 through a specified area (entry area), it is also possible to provide only one such specified area (entry area).

In addition, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, delay means such as the cranes 60 and the rotating body 70 are provided on the second moving path R2, but delay means may be provided on the first moving path R1. In other words, the first moving path R1 may be a delay route that delays the operation of the reel continuous operation device, and the second moving path R2 may be a route on which the reel continuous operation device is operated in a short time.

[Tenth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode in the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and based on the number of specific conditions satisfied (the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the roon device 37 within the specific period), at the ending of the jackpot game for which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Some gaming machines, like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, hold a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to play a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is played. Some gaming machines hold a lottery not only to determine whether or not the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a miss, but also to determine whether or not the jackpot is a small win. Here, a small win is a win that is different from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small win, a small win game is played, and after the small win game is played, the game state before the small win game is played (probability game state or time-saving game state) is maintained. And, in a game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery includes a small win in addition to a jackpot, there are gaming machines that increase the number of balls played by successive small wins in the probability game state between jackpot games.

However, in gaming machines that increase the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in a probability variable play state between jackpot games, the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port that operates in the jackpot game and the small winning game becomes a higher proportion of the total number of balls paid out. In other words, the ratio of the special feature (the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from winning all winning ports that have prize balls paid out) and the consecutive feature ratio (the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from winning all winning ports that have prize balls paid out) become higher. In other words, gaming machines that increase the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in a probability variable play state between jackpot games are not desirable because the speed at which the balls increase increases, which may result in encouraging the player's gambling desire.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the difference balls are not increased mainly by balls entering the variable winning port in the big win game or small win game, but the player's game balls (held balls) are increased mainly by balls entering the special winning port in the variable game that notifies the lottery result in the second special chart lottery in the sure-change game state (high probability mode). Here, the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive special features become higher as the number of balls paid out by balls entering the variable winning port increases. Therefore, since the main increase in the player's game balls is due to balls entering the special winning port, not the variable winning port, it is possible to lower the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive features compared to gaming machines that increase the player's game balls mainly by balls entering the variable winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls are shot into a predetermined area of the game board (for example, the right side area), not all of the game balls shot into the predetermined area are distributed to the front side of the game board by a distribution device (for example, a Krun device). Therefore, when game balls are shot into a predetermined area in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special chart lottery in a sure-change game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls enter the special winning hole. Therefore, the increase rate of the player's game balls (held balls) can be set by setting the distribution ratio to the front side of the game board by the distribution device (1/3 in this embodiment), so it is possible to set the increase rate of the balls that are dispensed at a level that does not stimulate the player's gambling spirit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is shot into a predetermined area (for example, the right area) in a variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball enters the special winning port, increasing the player's game balls (held balls). Therefore, the increase speed of the player's game balls (held balls) can be set by setting the number of prize balls in the special winning port (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode) (30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds in this embodiment), making it possible to set the increase speed of the balls dispensed at a level that does not stimulate the player's gambling greed.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 106 to 121.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, like the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, left hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right hitting is encouraged in the high probability gaming state (high probability mode). However, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the reason why left hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right hitting is encouraged in the high probability gaming state (high probability mode) is different from that of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, as will be described in detail later, and therefore the configuration of the right side area of the gaming board 31 is different from that of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 106 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, the game machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the game board 31 of the first embodiment described above in that the second winning opening 315, the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 316A and second variable winning opening 316B), and the Kroon device 63 are different in configuration, and a special winning opening 69 is provided. Below, the first variable winning opening 316A, the second winning opening 315, the Kroon device 63, the second variable winning opening 316B, and the special winning opening 69 will be described in this order with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 according to the movement flow path of the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31.

[First variable winning port 316A]
The first variable winning opening 316A provides an opportunity for the game ball 99 to be paid out when the game ball 99 enters the opening, and is provided on the upper side in the right area of the game board 31. The first variable winning opening 316A is provided with a first opening/closing door 319A that switches between restricting the game ball 99 from entering the first variable winning opening 316A and not restricting the game ball 99 from entering the first variable winning opening 316A. The basic configurations of the first variable winning opening 316A and the first opening/closing door 319A are the same as those of the variable winning opening 316 and the opening/closing door 319 of the first embodiment described above.

The first opening and closing door 319A is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the first opening and closing door 319A allows the game ball 99 to enter the first variable winning opening 316A by opening it, and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the first variable winning opening 316A by closing it. In addition, the first opening and closing door 319A is moved to a position that opens the first variable winning opening 316A during round play in the opening and closing execution mode in 2R special jackpot play, and otherwise waits in a position that closes the first variable winning opening 316A. As a result, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 during round play in 2R special jackpot play can enter the first variable winning opening 316A.

The 2R jackpot game is played when the result of the first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery), which is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 as described below, is a jackpot (see FIG. 111(D)). That is, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 during a round play in the 2R jackpot game can enter the first variable winning port 316A.

In addition, guide nails are installed in the upper left and upper right of the first variable winning opening 316A to prevent the occurrence of spill balls (game balls 99 that move below the first variable winning opening 316A without entering the first variable winning opening 316A) and to guide the game balls 99 to the first variable winning opening 316A. Therefore, all game balls 99 that are hit to the right when the first variable winning opening 316A is opened can enter the first variable winning opening 316A. In other words, the first variable winning opening 316A is configured as a so-called complete secure attacker, in which game balls 99 flowing down from above the first variable winning opening 316A when the first variable winning opening 316A is opened enter the first variable winning opening 316A without becoming spill balls.

The configuration of the first variable winning opening 316A as a completely secured attacker is not limited to the configuration of driving nails into the upper left and upper right of the first variable winning opening 316A, and other configurations may be used. For example, the first variable winning opening 316A may be configured as a completely secured attacker by providing a restricting section above the first variable winning opening 316A that has at least a portion that allows the game balls 99 to be moved one ball at a time.

Specifically, the regulating unit may move the game balls 99 one by one downward in a serpentine manner in the left-right or front-back direction of the game board 31, or may move the game balls 99 one by one downward in a spiral manner, i.e., may delay the flow of the game balls 99. Such a regulating unit may be configured, for example, to include an entrance portion and an exit portion for the game balls 99. It is preferable that the entrance portion is configured so that the game balls 99 can enter one by one in order to rectify the flow of the game balls 99. The exit portion may be configured to sequentially exit the game balls 99 one by one, or may be configured to exit multiple game balls 99 at once. In other words, the regulating unit may be configured to enter the game balls 99 one by one in the first variable winning opening 316A, or may be configured to enter multiple game balls 99 at once into the first variable winning opening 316A.

Of course, the restricting section does not necessarily have to be configured to delay the flow of the game balls 99. For example, a gate through which the game balls 99 can pass one by one may be provided above the first variable winning opening 316A, and all game balls 99 may be guided to the gate by nails or various other members.

The first variable winning port 316A does not necessarily have to be configured as a full winning attacker, so long as the expected difference in balls in a 2R special jackpot game exceeds 100%.

[Second winning slot 315]
The second winning port 315 provides an opportunity to execute a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) to determine whether a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed by the entry of the game ball 99. The lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of seven segments in the seven-segment display device of the second special symbol display unit 363, as in the first embodiment described above.

Also, unlike the first embodiment described above, the second winning port 315 is not provided with an electric device (normal electric device member) 315b (see FIG. 4) that switches whether or not the game ball is restricted from entering the second winning port 315. That is, the game ball 99 can enter the second winning port 315 without being restricted by the normal electric device member. Accordingly, in the game board 31 of this embodiment, the through gate 317, which executes a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to open the second winning port 315 when the passage of the game ball is detected, is omitted, and a normal winning lottery is not executed. That is, like the first winning port 314, the game ball 99 can enter the second winning port 315 not only in the special game state, but also in the normal game state without being restricted by the normal electric device member.

The second winning opening 315 is provided in the right area of the game board 31, between the first variable winning opening 316A and the Kroon device 63 described below. Therefore, in a state other than the 2R special probability game state (a state in which the first variable winning opening 316A is closed), the game ball 99 that is shot into the right area of the game board 31, that is, the game ball 99 that is shot to the right, can enter the second winning opening 315. In other words, the game ball 99 can enter the second winning opening 315 regardless of whether the game is in the special probability game state or the normal game state.

As in the first embodiment described above, the first winning hole 314 can receive the game ball 99 shot into the left area of the game board 31, i.e., the so-called left-handed game ball 99, regardless of whether the game is in a special probability game state or a normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 in the case of a left-handed hit, a first special lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed in which the lottery result is notified by the first special symbol display unit 362, and when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 in the case of a right-handed hit, a second special lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed in which the lottery result is notified by the second special symbol display unit 363.

In this embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is located between the first variable winning opening 316A and the crane device 63, but the second winning opening 315 may be located above the first variable winning opening 316A or below the crane device 63 described below.

[Crown device 63]
The Kluen device 63 distributes the game balls 99 that have been shot into the right area of the game board 31 and have not entered either the first variable winning hole 316A or the second winning hole 315 to either the front side or the back side of the game board 31. Here, Fig. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the Kluen device, Fig. 108(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line in Fig. 107, and Fig. 108(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X6-X6 cutting line in Fig. 107.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, the Kroon device 63 has a revolving portion 630 and three through holes 631, 632, and 632. This Kroon device 63 is fixed to the game board 31. In other words, the Kroon device 63 is not a movable object (a movable object that can take multiple postures) that can move between multiple positions, but a non-movable object (a non-movable object that maintains one posture) that is fixed to a predetermined position. In this way, by providing the Kroon device 63 as a fixed object (non-movable object), it is possible to ensure the constancy of the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board 31, and it is also possible to take measures against attacking shots with timing shots in which the game ball 99 is shot out at the right timing for distribution by the Kroon device 63.

At least the part of the Kluen device 63 where the game ball 99 rolls or moves is preferably made of resin. The Kluen device 63 is, for example, integrally molded entirely from resin, or is formed by assembling a plurality of resin members. There is no particular restriction on the resin material used for the Kluen device 63, and any known resin material can be used. Thermoplastic resin is preferable from the viewpoint of ease of processing (moldability), and from the viewpoint of easy availability of resin materials and suppressing deterioration of the Kluen device 63 over time, for example, easily available ABS resin, PC resin, PP resin, etc. are preferable as the resin material used for the Kluen device 63. In this way, by making at least the part where the game ball 99 rolls or moves from resin, it is possible to improve durability and processability (moldability) and also to reduce manufacturing costs. Of course, the Kluen device 63 is not limited to being made of resin, and may be made partially or entirely of a material other than resin, for example, the entire device may be made of metal, or may be made of both resin and metal.

The circulating section 630 is open at the top, and can introduce the game balls 99 that are shot into the right area of the game board 31, but do not enter either the first variable winning port 316A or the second winning port 315 and fall from above. This circulating section 630 circulates the game balls 99 introduced from above, and includes a peripheral wall section 634, an annular circulating section 635, and a bottom wall section 636. The peripheral wall section 634 protrudes upward from the peripheral edge of the annular circulating section 635, and prevents the game balls 99 circulating in the circulating section 630 from escaping from the circulating section 630. The annular circulating section 635 is provided between the peripheral wall section 634 and the bottom wall section 636 in an inclined state with the inner side lower, and circulates the game balls 99 introduced from above into the circulating section 630. The bottom wall portion 636 is provided in the center of the circumferential portion 630, which is inside the annular circumferential portion 635, and has three through holes 631, 632, and 633.

The three through holes 631-633 include a first through hole 631, a second through hole 632, and a third through hole 633 that vertically penetrate the bottom wall portion 636. Each through hole 631-633 moves the game ball 99 introduced through the upper openings 631A, 632A, 633A opened on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 636 to the bottom of the crane device 63. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the game ball 99 introduced into the first through hole 631 is discharged from the lower opening 631B and discharged to the front side of the game board 31 from the discharge port 64 provided on the front side of the game board 31. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the game ball 99 introduced into the second through hole 632 and the third through hole 633 is discharged from the lower openings 632B and 633B, and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 31 from the discharge section 65 provided on the rear side of the game board 31.

The upper openings 631A, 632A, 633A of the three through holes 631 to 633 are circular with a diameter larger than that of the game ball 99. The diameters of the upper openings 631A, 632A, 633A are the same or approximately the same, and the upper openings 631A, 632A, 633A are arranged on the same or approximately the same circumference. Therefore, the game ball 99 introduced into the revolving part 630 is introduced into the three through holes 631 to 633 with the same or approximately the same probability (ratio). In other words, the game ball 99 introduced into the revolving part 630 is distributed to the front side of the game board 31 with a probability (ratio) of 1/3, and distributed to the back side of the game board 31 with a probability (ratio) of 2/3. In other words, the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the Kluen device 63 is 1:2.

The ratio of the distribution of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the Kluen device 63 does not necessarily have to be 1:2, but may be set appropriately depending on, for example, the number of balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls 99 into the second variable winning opening 316B described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of through holes 631-633 in the Kluen device 63 is three, and the diameters of the upper openings 631A-633A of the through holes 631-633 are the same or approximately the same, but the number and diameter of the through holes can be set appropriately depending on the design value of the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, among the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 that did not enter either the first variable winning opening 316A or the second winning opening 315 are distributed to either the front side or the back side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63, so that a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 is distributed to an area where the game balls can enter the second variable winning opening 316B or the special winning opening 69. However, for example, the arrangement of the nails driven into the game board 31 may be used to distribute a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 to an area where the game balls can enter the second variable winning opening 316B or the special winning opening 69, or a role or operating member may be provided in the crane device 63 to distribute a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 to an area where the game balls can enter the second variable winning opening 316B or the special winning opening 69.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 shot out to the right side area of the game board 31 by the Klue device 63, which is a non-movable object (a non-movable object that maintains one posture) fixed in a predetermined position, are distributed to the front and back sides of the game board 31. However, a movable object (a movable object that can take multiple postures) that can move between multiple positions may be used as a distribution means, and the game balls 99 may be distributed to the front and back sides of the game board 31 at a predetermined ratio by this distribution means.

In addition, the distribution means such as the Kluen device 63 does not necessarily have to be configured to distribute the game balls 99 between the front and back sides of the game board 31, as long as it distributes the game balls 99 between an area where the game balls 99 can enter the special winning opening 69 (second variable winning opening 316) and an area where the game balls 99 cannot enter the special winning opening 69 (second variable winning opening 316).

[Second variable winning port 316B]
As shown in Figure 106, the second variable winning opening 316B provides an opportunity for the game ball 99 to be paid out when the game ball 99 enters the opening, and is provided in a downward and left-slanting position in the lower right area of the game board 31, which is below the first variable winning opening 316A, the second winning opening 315 and the crane device 63.

Here, Fig. 109(A) is a partially cut away view to explain the second variable winning opening 316B, and Fig. 109(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X7-X7 cutting line in Fig. 109(A). Also, Fig. 110(A) is a partially cut away view to explain the second variable winning opening 316B, and Fig. 110(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X8-X8 cutting line in Fig. 110(A).

As shown in Figures 109 and 110, a second opening/closing door 319B that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the second variable winning opening 316B is provided in a left-downward position along the second variable winning opening 316B. This second opening/closing door 319B is moved back and forth between a front waiting position (see Figure 109) that restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second variable winning opening 316B by closing the second variable winning opening 316B, and a rear open position (see Figure 110) that opens the second variable winning opening 316B to allow the game ball 99 to enter the second variable winning opening 316B by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31.

The second opening and closing door 319B is moved to a position where the second variable winning port 316B is opened during round play in the open/close execution mode in a 2R normal jackpot game or during opening play in a small jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position where the second variable winning port 316B is closed. As a result, the second variable winning port 316B can receive the game balls 99 that are sorted to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 during round play in a 2R variable jackpot game or during opening play in a small jackpot game (the game balls 99 that are introduced into the first through hole 631 of the crane device 63 and discharged to the front side of the game board 31 from the discharge port 64 provided on the front side of the game board 31) (see FIG. 108 (A)). In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the second variable winning opening 316B is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the discharge opening 316Ba provided in the second variable winning opening 316B.

Here, the 2R normal big win game is executed when the result of the lottery in the second special symbol lottery is a big win, as described later (see FIG. 111 (D)). That is, the second variable winning opening 316B can receive the game balls 99 that are sorted by the crane device 63 to the front side of the game board 31 and discharged from the discharge opening 64 among the game balls 99 that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 during the round play of the 2R normal big win game. In addition, the discharge opening 64 is provided above the second variable winning opening 316B, and since there is no obstacle between the discharge opening 64 and the second variable winning opening 316B, the second variable winning opening 316B is configured as a so-called complete secure attacker that can receive all the game balls 99 discharged from the discharge opening 64 when it is opened.

In addition, in order to configure the second variable winning opening 316B as a complete security attacker, for example, a restricting unit having at least a portion above the second variable winning opening 316B that can move the game balls 99 one ball at a time can be used. As the restricting unit, a restricting unit similar to that used in the case where the first variable winning opening 316A described above is configured as a complete security attacker can be used.

In addition, the second variable winning port 316B does not necessarily have to be configured as a fully secured attacker, as long as the expected difference in balls is equal to or less than 100% in a 2R normal big win game or small win game, and the expected difference in balls based on the game ball 99 entering the special winning port 69 during the variable display of the second special chart in a sure-win game state (high probability mode) exceeds 100%.

In addition, the small prize game is a win in which the total opening time of the second variable prize opening 316B for one win is short (for example, 1.6 seconds or less), and in this embodiment, includes an opening game in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened once and the second variable prize opening 316B is opened for a maximum of 1.6 seconds. This small prize game is executed when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is a small prize, as described later, or when the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery in the high probability mode (probability change game state) is a small prize (see Figures 111 (B) and 111 (C)). That is, the second variable prize opening 316B can receive the game balls 99 that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 during the opening game of the small prize game and that are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of paid-out balls (number of prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning opening 316B in a 2R normal jackpot game or a small jackpot game is 3 balls (see FIG. 113 (B)). On the other hand, since the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 is 1:2, when a right hit is performed to make the game ball 99 enter the second variable winning opening 316B in a 2R normal jackpot game or a small jackpot game, the expected increase in the player's game balls 99 (held balls) is 1 ball or less, and no increase in the game balls 99 can be expected.

The number of paid-out balls (number of prize balls) of game balls 99 when game ball 99 enters second variable winning port 316B in 2R normal jackpot game or small jackpot game is not limited to 3 balls, and is preferably set to N+1 or less when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of game board 31 by crane device 63 is 1:N. In this way, the expected increase in the player's game balls 99 (held balls) when hitting from the right to make game ball 99 enter second variable winning port 316B in 2R normal jackpot game or small jackpot game can be set to 1 ball or less.

On the other hand, when waiting in a position to close the second opening and closing door 319B (when the second variable winning opening 316B is closed), the second opening and closing door 319B is provided in a downward left position, so that among the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 that are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 roll on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B and move to the left. In addition, since the special winning opening 69 is provided adjacent to the left side of the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B, the game ball 99 that rolls on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B and moves to the left can enter the special winning opening 69. In other words, the second opening and closing door 319B not only restricts and allows the game ball 99 to enter the second variable winning opening 316B, but also has the role of guiding the game ball 99 to the special winning opening 69.

[Special Prize Winners Entrance 69]
As shown in Figures 106 and 109, the special winning opening 69 provides an opportunity for the game ball 99 to be paid out when the game ball 99 enters the special winning opening 69, and is provided adjacent to the left side of the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B. The special winning opening 69 can receive the game balls 99 that are shot out to the right area of the game board 31 and are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 and do not enter the second variable winning opening 316B. A plurality of nails are driven into the upper left of the special winning opening 69, so that the game balls 99 guided to the special winning opening 69 by the second opening and closing door 319B can easily enter the special winning opening 69 without spilling out. The number of payout balls (number of prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the special winning opening 69 is set to be greater than the other winning openings 313, 314, 315, 316A, and 316B (see FIG. 113B). In this embodiment, the number of payout balls (number of prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the special winning opening 69 is 15 balls. On the other hand, the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 in the crane device 63 is 1:2 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31. Therefore, if the number of payout balls (number of prize balls) of the special winning opening 69 is set to 15, the game balls 99 (balls held) of the player will increase when the right hit is performed in a state in which the game ball 99 can enter the special winning opening 69.

In this embodiment, as described below, in a high probability game state (high probability mode), a game ball 99 can enter the special winning port 69 when a right hit is made in a variable game (second special game) that notifies the result of the second special game lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible for the player to increase their game balls 99 by making a right hit in a high probability game state (high probability mode).

The number of balls (number of prize balls) paid out when the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 does not necessarily have to be 15, but if the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the Krun device 63 is 1:N, it is preferable to set the number of balls (number of prize balls) paid out when the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 to exceed N+1 balls. In this way, if the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the Krun device 63 is 1:N, 1/(N+1) game balls can enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls 99 of the player by hitting to the right in a sure-change game state (high probability mode) in which the number of balls (number of prize balls) paid out when the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 is set to exceed N+1 balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special winning opening 69 is provided adjacent to the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B on the left side, but the special winning opening 69 does not necessarily have to be located adjacent to the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B as long as the special winning opening 69 is located in a position where the game ball 99 guided by rolling on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B can enter. For example, the special winning opening 69 may be located adjacent to or separated from the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B in at least one of the vertical and horizontal directions, preferably at least in the horizontal direction. In this case, it is preferable to provide a guide means for guiding the game ball 99 rolling on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B to the special winning opening 69. As the guide means, for example, the driving of multiple nails, the arrangement of a member formed of a resin material, a means for guiding the game ball 99 by an electrically operated movable object, or a combination of these, can be considered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning opening 316A (first opening and closing door 319A), the second winning opening 315, the crane device 63, the second variable winning opening 316B (second opening and closing door 319B) and the special winning opening 69 are configured to allow the game ball 99 to enter or be distributed when a right-handed hit is made to launch the game ball 99 into the right-hand area of the game board 31, and the first winning opening 314 is configured to allow the game ball 99 to enter when a left-handed hit is made to launch the game ball 99 into the left-hand area of the game board 31, but the arrangement of the various winning openings 313, 314, 315, 316A, 316B and the crane device 63 can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the applicable technical concept of the present invention. For example, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 106, the first variable winning opening 316A, the second winning opening 315, the crown device 63, the second variable winning opening 316B and the special winning opening 69 may be configured to allow the game ball 99 to enter or be distributed when a left hit is made to shoot the game ball 99 into the left area of the game board 31, and the first winning opening 314 may be configured to allow the game ball 99 to enter when a left hit is made to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31. In this case, right hits are encouraged in the normal game state (low probability mode), and left hits are encouraged in the probability game state (high probability mode).

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, all jackpot games are 2R (two round games), small jackpots are included as lottery results in the jackpot lottery (first special chart lottery, second special chart lottery), and a special prize opening 69 is provided, so that the system configuration has differences from the first embodiment described above in terms of the win/lose table, allocation table, and variable table, etc.

[Win/lose table]
The winning/losing table of this embodiment has a different jackpot probability from that of the first embodiment described above, and includes a small win as a lottery result. Here, FIG. 111(A) is a low probability mode first special chart winning/losing table used for the first special chart lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 in the low probability mode, FIG. 111(B) is a low probability mode second special chart winning/losing table used for the second special chart lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the low probability mode, and FIG. 111(C) is a high probability mode winning/losing table used for the first special chart lottery or the second special chart lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 in the high probability mode. That is, in this embodiment, in the low probability mode, different win/lose tables are used for the first special chart drawing and the second special chart drawing, and in the high probability mode, the same win/lose table is used for the first special chart drawing and the second special chart drawing.

As shown in Figures 111(A) and 111(B), the low probability mode first special chart win/loss table used for the first special chart lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 in the low probability mode, and the low probability mode second special chart win/loss table used for the second special chart lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the low probability mode are provided with multiple win/loss tables in which the probability (jackpot probability) that the lottery result in the first special chart lottery or the second special chart lottery will be a jackpot varies depending on the game setting value. The low probability mode first special chart win/loss table and the low probability mode second special chart win/loss table each include six win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The probability of the lottery result being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, which is advantageous for the player. Also, in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table, the jackpot probability in the first special chart lottery and the second special chart lottery at the same game setting value is the same. In other words, in the low probability mode, the jackpot probability depends on the game setting value, and as long as the game setting value is the same, there is no difference in the jackpot probability between the first special chart lottery and the second special chart lottery.

Specifically, in the game setting value 1 in the low probability mode first special chart hit/miss table and the low probability mode second special chart hit/miss table (low probability mode hit/miss table), out of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 590 (0 to 589). In other words, in the game setting value 1, the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is approximately 1/111 (590/65,536).

At game setting value 2 in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table (low probability mode win/lose table), out of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot lottery result is 606 (0 to 605). In other words, at game setting value 2, the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is approximately 1/109 (606/65,536).

At game setting value 3 in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table (low probability mode win/lose table), out of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot lottery result is 618 (0 to 617). In other words, at game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/107 (618/65,536).

At game setting value 4 in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and low probability mode second special chart win/lose table (low probability mode win/lose table), out of 65,536 random numbers from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot lottery result is 630 (0 to 629). In other words, at game setting value 4, the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is approximately 1/105 (630/65,536).

At game setting value 5 in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and low probability mode second special chart win/lose table (low probability mode win/lose table), out of 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot lottery result is 636 (0 to 635). In other words, at game setting value 5, the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is approximately 1/103 (636/65,536).

At a game setting value of 6 in the low-low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table (low probability mode win/lose table), out of the 65,536 random numbers from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 649 (0 to 648). In other words, at a game setting value of 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/101 (649/65,536).

Also, as shown in FIG. 111(A), in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the jackpot winning random number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a miss. In other words, the lottery result in the first special chart lottery (jackpot lottery) in low probability mode will be either a jackpot or a miss, and will never be a small win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(B), in the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the jackpot winning random number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a small win. In other words, the lottery result in the first special chart lottery (jackpot lottery) in low probability mode will be either a big win or a small win, and will never be a miss.

As shown in FIG. 111(C), in the high probability mode hit/miss table used for the first or second special drawing executed in response to the entry of a game ball 99 into the first or second winning slot 314 or 315 in the high probability mode, the probability that the result of the first or second special drawing will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is the same for the six game setting values 1 to 6. That is, in the high probability mode, the jackpot probability does not depend on the game setting value, and there is no difference between the first and second special drawing jackpot probabilities, which are the same. Specifically, in the high probability mode hit/miss table, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery out of 65,536 random numbers from 0 to 65,535, which are common to all game setting values 1 to 6, is 3,277 (0 to 3,276), and the jackpot probability is approximately 1/20 (3,277/65,536). In addition, the results of the first and second special drawing (jackpot drawing) in high probability mode will be either a jackpot or a small jackpot, and there will be no misses. The probability of a small jackpot is approximately 19/20 (62,259/65,536).

In addition, in the low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and the low probability mode second special chart win/lose table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot lottery for jackpots with the same game setting value are the same, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not the same. Also, the random numbers that result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, six low probability mode first special chart win/lose tables and six low probability mode second special chart win/lose tables are provided according to the six game setting values, but at least one low probability mode first special chart win/lose table and one low probability mode second special chart win/lose table is sufficient. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode varies depending on the game setting value, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is uniform. Conversely, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode may be uniform, and multiple game setting values may be set for the high probability mode, or the probability of winning a jackpot in both low probability mode and high probability mode may vary depending on the game setting value.

The probability of winning, losing and small wins in the various winning/losing tables can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In particular, the probability of winning or losing a big win or small win in the high probability mode winning/losing table can be changed as appropriate according to the setting value of the expected difference in balls due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 in the high probability mode (high probability game state), the number of winning balls in the special winning hole 69, the variable display time in the high probability mode (high probability game state), etc.

[Sort table]
In this embodiment, the jackpot types include a 2R variable jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot, but the allocation of the jackpot types is different between the case where the first special drawing executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314 is a jackpot and the case where the second special drawing executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 111(D) is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), if the first special drawing, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314, results in a jackpot, it will always be a 2R guaranteed jackpot, and if the second special drawing, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315, results in a jackpot, it will always be a 2R regular jackpot. In other words, regardless of whether it is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the jackpot type is set according to the type of winning slot 314, 315 that triggered the jackpot drawing.

Here, as described above, since the game ball 99 can enter the first winning port 314 by hitting from the left, if the lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in the case of hitting from the left is a jackpot, a 2R high probability jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game in which the game is transitioned to the high probability mode (high probability game state) after the game ends, in both the low probability mode (normal game state) and the high probability mode (high probability game state). Note that the high probability mode (high probability game state) is a game state that is advantageous to a player whose expected difference in balls exceeds 100% by hitting the game ball 99 into the special winning port 69 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by hitting from the right, as described later. Therefore, in the low probability mode (normal game state), the player is encouraged to hit the ball from the left, which allows the game ball 99 to enter the first winning slot 314, in order to transition to the high probability mode (high probability game state) which is advantageous to the player, and in the high probability mode (high probability game state), the player is encouraged to hit the ball from the right, which allows the expected difference in ball value to exceed 100% during the variable display of the second special pattern.

On the other hand, since the game ball 99 can enter the second winning port 315 by hitting from the right, if the lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in the case of hitting from the right is a jackpot, a 2R normal jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, which transitions to the low probability mode (normal game state) after the game ends, in both the low probability mode (normal game state) and the high probability mode (probability change game state). Note that the low probability mode (normal game state), as described below, is a game state that is unfavorable to players whose ball difference expectation value is 100% or less because it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning port 69 during the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting from the right. That is, in the low probability mode (normal game state), not only is there the disadvantage that if the result of the lottery in the second special symbol lottery by hitting from the right is a jackpot, the player cannot transition to the advantageous high probability mode (probability change game state), but there is also no advantage to hitting from the right in the low probability mode (normal game state) because the expected difference in balls does not exceed 100%, so hitting from the left is encouraged in the low probability mode (normal game state). In other words, in the low probability mode (normal game state), even if you hit from the right, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69 while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the game state is disadvantageous to players whose expected difference in balls is less than or equal to 100%, so that so-called countermeasures against attacking are implemented.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpots are set: a 2R special jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot game. However, the number of jackpot types is not limited to two and may be three or more, and the number of rounds in each jackpot game is not limited to 2R and may be other numbers of rounds. For example, the number of rounds in a special jackpot may be set to three or more rounds so that the player can get more balls, or the number of rounds in a normal jackpot may be set to one round so that the normal jackpot game, which is undesirable for the player, can end in a short time.

[Maximum opening time and maximum number of winning balls for each variable winning hole 316A, 316B]
As described above, in this embodiment, three types of winning are set: 2R variable winning, 2R normal winning, and small winning. Here, FIG. 113(A) is a diagram showing an example of the maximum opening time and maximum number of winning balls of the variable winning holes 316A and 316B for each winning.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), in the case of a 2R jackpot, the 2R jackpot game is executed after the variable game that notifies the player that the 2R jackpot is a jackpot. In this 2R jackpot game, an open/close execution mode is executed, which includes two rounds of play in which the first variable winning port 316A is opened. Each round of play ends when 30 seconds have passed since the first variable winning port 316A began to open, or when 10 or more game balls 99 enter the first variable winning port 316A before 30 seconds have passed since the first variable winning port 316A began to open, by the first opening/closing door 319A closing the first variable winning port 316A. When the game ball 99 enters the first variable winning port 316A, the number of payout balls is 10 (see FIG. 113(B)), and as described above, the first variable winning port 316A is configured as a so-called complete secure attacker. Therefore, in each round of the 2R jackpot game, all of the game balls 99 hit to the right can enter the first variable winning port 316, and it is possible to obtain nine difference balls for each game ball 99 shot. As a result, in the 2R jackpot game, 200 balls can be expected to be dispensed by the game ball 99 entering the first variable winning port 316A in each round of the game, and the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) are expected to increase by about 180 balls.

The 2R jackpot game may include an opening that is executed before the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and may include an ending that is executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends. The opening and closing execution mode may also include an interval between rounds of play. The number of balls paid out (prize balls) when game ball 99 enters first variable winning port 316A is not limited to 10 balls, and can be changed within a range in which the expected difference in balls in the 2R jackpot game is 100% or more.

In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot game is executed after the variable game that notifies the player that the 2R normal jackpot has been won has ended. In this 2R normal jackpot game, unlike the 2R variable jackpot game, an open/close execution mode is executed that includes two round games in which the second variable winning opening 316B is opened. Each round game ends when 30 seconds have passed since the second variable winning opening 316B began to open, or when 10 or more game balls enter the second variable winning opening 316B before 30 seconds have passed since the second variable winning opening 316B began to open. When the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning opening 316B, the number of balls paid out is 3 balls, and in the 2R normal jackpot game, the entry of the game ball 99 into the second variable winning opening 316B does not increase the player's game balls 99 (held balls). Specifically, the second variable winning opening 316B is provided below the Klawn device 63 as described above, and is a full-security attacker into which the game balls 99 that are distributed by the Klawn device 63 to the front side of the game board 31 with a probability of 1/3 enter. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit to the right, three balls are expected to be paid out for three game balls 99 shot out, so the expected difference in balls is 0 balls, and no increase in the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) is expected.

The 2R normal jackpot game may include an opening that is executed before the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and may include an ending that is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The opening/closing execution mode may also include an interval between rounds of play. However, since the second variable winning port 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B during the opening, ending, and interval, and the game ball 99 can enter the special winning port 69, it is preferable to set the opening, ending, and interval times as short as possible or omit them as a countermeasure against right-handed hits in the normal game state (low probability mode).

In the case of a small win, the small win game is executed after the variable game that notifies the player that the small win has occurred has ended. In this small win game, an opening game is executed in which the second variable winning opening 316B is opened. This opening game ends when 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning opening 316B began to open, or when 10 or more game balls enter the second variable winning opening 316B before 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning opening 316B began to open, by closing the second variable winning opening 316B. In other words, the small win game does not end when the maximum number of game balls, 99, enters the second variable winning opening 316B, but ends when 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning opening 316B began to open. Furthermore, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning opening 316B, the number of balls paid out is three. In a small win game, as in the 2R normal big win game described above, an increase in the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) cannot be expected when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning opening 316B.

The small win game may include an opening that is executed before the open game is executed, and may include an ending that is executed after the open game is completed. However, in the small win game, as with the 2R normal big win game described above, it is preferable to set the opening and ending times as short as possible or to omit them as a countermeasure against right-hitting attacks in the normal game state (low probability mode).

In addition, the number of balls paid out (prize balls) when game ball 99 enters second variable winning port 316B in a 2R normal jackpot game or small jackpot game is not limited to 3 balls, but can be changed within a range where the expected difference in balls in a 2R normal jackpot game and small jackpot game is 100% or less.

When the game ball 99 is hit from the right, some of the game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315, but in this embodiment, the number of balls paid out when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 is set to 1 ball (see FIG. 113 (B)). Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit from the right, the expected difference in balls when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 is 0 balls, and the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 when the game ball 99 is hit from the right does not affect the expected difference in balls in the 2R normal big win game and the small win game.

The number of payout balls (prize balls) from each winning hole 313, 314, 315, 316A, 316B shown in FIG. 113(B) can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In particular, the number of payout balls (prize balls) from the special winning hole 69, in addition to the first variable winning hole 316A and the second variable winning hole 316B mentioned above, is not limited to 15 balls, and can be changed within the range where the expected value of the difference in balls exceeds 100% when hitting the right side in the high probability mode (high probability game state),

[Variable table]
In this embodiment, as the variable table, a table corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is set for the first special drawing which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314, and a table corresponding to the probability mode types (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set for the second special drawing which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315.

Here, Fig. 112(A) to Fig. 121(D) are diagrams showing examples of the variation tables of this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation tables include a low probability mode first special chart big win variation table shown in Fig. 112(A), a low probability mode first special chart miss variation table shown in Fig. 112(B), a low probability mode second special chart variation table shown in Fig. 112(C), and a high probability mode second special chart variation table shown in Fig. 112(D).

The variation patterns (variation display times) shown in Fig. 112(A) to Fig. 121(D) are examples, and can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In particular, the variation pattern in the low probability mode second special chart variation table shown in Fig. 112(C) can be changed within the range where the difference ball expectation value is 100% or less or below 100% when hitting right in the low probability mode (normal game state), and the variation pattern in the high probability mode second special chart variation table shown in Fig. 112(D) can be changed within the range where the difference ball expectation value is over 100% when hitting right in the high probability mode (high probability game state),

As shown in FIG. 112(A), the low probability mode first special chart jackpot fluctuation table of this embodiment is similar to the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(A)) and the special jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(B)) of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in the low probability mode first special chart jackpot fluctuation table of this embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" (fluctuation display time = 30 seconds), "02" (fluctuation display time = 60 seconds), and "03" (fluctuation display time = 90 seconds) is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 112(B), the low probability mode first special chart miss variation table of this embodiment is similar to the pass miss variation table of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15(C)). Specifically, in the low probability mode first special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is determined for each stop type at the time of miss (reach of miss before and after, reach other than miss before and after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of miss is reach of miss before and after or reach other than miss before and after, one of the variation patterns "01" (variation display time = 30 seconds), "02" (variation display time = 60 seconds), and "03" (variation display time = 90 seconds) is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of miss is complete miss, one of the variation patterns "04" (variation display time = 7 seconds) or "05" (variation display time = 10 seconds) is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), in the low probability mode second special chart change table of this embodiment, the change pattern "06" (change display time = 1 second) is always selected regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. In other words, in the low probability mode, when a right hit is performed to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31, and the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, the change display time becomes 1 second regardless of the lottery result of the second special chart change.

As shown in FIG. 112 (D), in the high probability mode second special chart fluctuation table of this embodiment, one of fluctuation patterns "01" (fluctuation display time = 30 seconds), fluctuation pattern "02" (fluctuation display time = 60 seconds), and fluctuation pattern "03" (fluctuation display time = 90 seconds) is selected depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, in this embodiment, when a right shot is performed to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31, and the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, the variable display time of the second special symbol in the low probability mode (normal game state) is set to be short at 1 second, and the ball difference expectation value is set to be 100% or less (the ball difference is 0 balls or negative). The details of the ball difference expectation value being 100% or less (the ball difference is 0 balls or negative) will be clarified later, but the balls of the right shot game balls 99 that do not enter the second winning hole 315 and the first variable winning hole 316A are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 at a predetermined ratio (1:2 in this embodiment) by the crane device 63. Then, except for the 2R normal big win game or small win game, the second variable winning opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B, so that the game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 can enter the special winning opening 69 with a large number of winning balls (15 balls in this embodiment (see FIG. 113 (B))). Also, for example, if the game balls 99 can be launched at a constant interval of every 0.6 seconds and the game balls 99 are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 with a probability of 1/3, the game balls 99 will reach the second opening/closing door 319B at an average frequency of 1 ball every 1.8 seconds (0.56 balls/1 second) (when considering the entry of the game balls 99 into the second winning opening 315, the frequency is actually lower than 1 ball every 1.8 seconds (0.56 balls/1 second)). Therefore, when the variable display time of the second special symbol in the low probability mode (normal game state) is set to a short time (1 second in this embodiment), it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second opening and closing door 319B during the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, since the game ball 99 that reaches the second opening and closing door 319B rolls on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B before entering the special winning hole 69 (see FIG. 109), when the variable display time of the second special symbol in the low probability mode (normal game state) is set to a short time (1 second in this embodiment) as in this embodiment, many of the game balls 99 rolling on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B enter the second variable winning hole 316B by opening the second variable winning hole 316B in the 2R normal big win game or small win game (see FIG. 111 (B)) executed after the stop display of the second special symbol, and almost none of the balls enter the special winning hole 69. In this way, by setting the variable display time of the second special chart in the low probability mode (normal game state) to a short time (1 second in this embodiment), when a right hit is performed in the low probability mode (normal game state), it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69, so the player's game balls 99 decrease and an increase in the game balls 99 cannot be expected. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, right hits in the low probability mode (normal game state) are disadvantageous to the player and are not encouraged.

In addition, in order to increase the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 when a right hit is performed in the normal game state (low probability mode), a configuration can be adopted in which the game ball 99 stays longer on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B. Possible configurations for increasing the stay time of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B include, for example, a configuration in which the moving distance of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B is increased, a configuration in which the moving speed of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B is decreased, or a combination of these configurations. Specifically, possible configurations for increasing the moving distance of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B include, for example, a configuration for increasing the overall length of the second opening and closing door 319B in the left-right direction, a configuration for moving the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B while snaking in the front-back or up-down direction of the game board 31, a configuration for moving the game ball 99 in a spiral shape, and a combination of two or more of these. Also, possible configurations for decreasing the moving speed of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B include a configuration for decreasing the inclination angle of the second opening and closing door 319B, and a configuration for increasing the moving resistance by providing one or more convexities or concaves on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B or roughening the surface.

In addition to or instead of adopting a configuration that increases the retention time of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B, in order to increase the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 when hitting from the right in the normal game state (low probability mode), a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball 99 may be provided between the discharge port 64, from which the game ball 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 is discharged, and the second opening/closing door 319B. In this case, the delay means may have a configuration similar to the configuration that increases the retention time of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B.

On the other hand, the variable display time in the high probability mode (probability game state) when the second special chart lottery is executed is set to a long time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds, and is set so that the expected value of the difference ball when hitting the right hand in the high probability mode (probability game state) exceeds 100% (the difference ball becomes positive). The details of the difference ball expected value exceeding 100% (the difference ball becomes positive) will be clarified later, but as mentioned above, the game ball 99 hit to the right reaches the second opening and closing door 319B at an average frequency of 1 ball every 1.8 seconds (0.56 balls/1 second). And, when the variable display time of the second special chart in the high probability mode (probability game state) is set to a long time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds in this embodiment), it becomes possible for many game balls 99 to reach the second opening and closing door 319B during the variable display of the second special chart. Therefore, even if the game ball 99 that has reached the second opening/closing door 319B rolls on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B before entering the special winning hole 69, many game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 during the variable display of the second special chart. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls in the special winning hole 69 is 15 balls, which is set to be more than the number of prize balls in the other winning holes 313, 314, 315, 316A, and 316B (see FIG. 113 (B)). Therefore, when a right hit is performed in the high probability mode (probability game state), it is easy for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69, and the number of prize balls in the special winning hole 69 is large, so the number of game balls 99 of the player increases. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, right hitting in the high probability mode (probability game state) is advantageous to the player and is a recommended way of hitting.

The expected difference in ball value when hitting from the right side will be described in detail later in the explanation of the game flow of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) of the low probability mode second special chart fluctuation table is not limited to 1 second, and may be set to another time as long as it is set so that the expected difference in balls is 100% or less (the difference in balls is 0 balls or negative), and multiple types of such fluctuation patterns (fluctuation display time) may be set.

The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) of the high probability mode second special chart fluctuation table can be set so that the expected value of the difference in balls exceeds 100% (the difference in balls becomes positive), and it may be set to other times other than 30, 60 or 90 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) may be set to a fixed time other than the three types, for example, one type.

[Game flow of gaming machine 10]
Next, the game flow of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 114(A) and 114(B).

First, the shooting of game balls 99 encouraged in the gaming machine 10 (the use of left and right shots) will be explained. Here, FIG. 114(A) shows the game flow when left shots are performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right shots are performed in other than the normal gaming state (low probability mode) (high probability game state and winning game (jackpot game or small winning game)). The example shown in FIG. 114(A) shows the game flow when shooting game balls 99 in the encouraged procedure that maximizes the expected value of the difference in balls.

In the promotion procedure shown in FIG. 114(A), a left shot is performed to launch the game ball 99 into the left area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), and a right shot is performed to launch the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 in other than the normal game state, so that the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69, and the expected value of the difference in the number of game balls 99 exceeds 100% (the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) increase).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, when a left-handed shot is performed in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 can enter the first winning hole 314, but cannot enter the second winning hole 315. When the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314, the first special drawing (jackpot drawing) is executed. The first special drawing in the normal game state (low probability mode) is a drawing to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss (see FIG. 111 (A)). If the drawing result is a jackpot, the allocation is only a 2R special jackpot, and it never becomes a 2R normal jackpot (see FIG. 111 (D)). If the first special drawing in the normal game state (low probability mode) is a miss, the jackpot drawing in the normal game state (low probability mode) is repeated until the drawing result in the first special drawing triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is a jackpot.

If the result of the first special drawing, triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314, is a jackpot, a 2R guaranteed jackpot game is played after the variable game in which the result of the drawing is announced is completed. In this 2R guaranteed jackpot game, two rounds of play are played in which the first variable winning port 316A is opened, and as described above, the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) are increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first variable winning port 316A by hitting from the right. When this 2R guaranteed jackpot game is completed, a transition to a guaranteed jackpot game state occurs. In other words, in this embodiment, a transition to a guaranteed jackpot game state occurs when the result of the lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode) is a jackpot.

The probability of the winning lottery result being a jackpot is a high probability mode in which the probability of the winning lottery result being a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state (low probability mode). In this probability of the winning lottery state, by hitting from the right, a game ball 99 can enter the special winning hole 69 during the variable game that notifies the result of the second special symbol lottery (while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed), and the player can increase the number of game balls 99 (balls in hand) by having the game ball 99 enter the special winning hole 69.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, when a right hit is performed in a probability variation game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315, but cannot enter the first winning hole 314. When the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, a second special drawing (jackpot drawing) is executed. The second special drawing in the probability variation game state (high probability mode) is a drawing to determine whether there is a jackpot or a small jackpot (see FIG. 111 (C)). If the drawing result is a jackpot, the allocation is only a 2R normal jackpot, and there is no chance of a 2R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 111 (D)).

If the result of the second special drawing in the second special drawing in the high probability mode is a jackpot, a 2R normal jackpot game is played after the variable game in which the result of the drawing is announced is completed. In this 2R normal jackpot game, two rounds of play are played in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened, but as mentioned above, even if the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by hitting from the right, the player's game balls 99 (held balls) cannot be increased. When such a 2R normal jackpot game ends, a transition to a normal game state occurs. That is, in this embodiment, a transition to a normal game state occurs when the result of the drawing in the high probability mode is a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special drawing in the high probability mode is a small win, the small win game is executed after the variable game in which the result of the drawing is notified is completed. In this small win game, the opening game in which the second variable winning port 316B is opened is executed once, but as mentioned above, even if the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning port 316B by hitting from the right, the player's game balls 99 (held balls) cannot be expected to increase. When such a small win game ends, the high probability mode is maintained without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability mode). That is, in this embodiment, the high probability mode is maintained until the result of the second special drawing is a big win, and transition to the normal game state is triggered by the result of the second special drawing being a big win. In other words, in the high probability mode, the game flow is generally "2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game → 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game... 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game → 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with big win notification → big win game."

Here, in the small win game, as described above, an open game in which the second variable winning opening 316B is opened is executed once, but in this open game, the game ball 99 hit from the right enters the second variable winning opening 316B, which is the fully secured attacker, and the game ball 99 does not enter the special winning opening 69. In contrast, in the variable game of the small win notification executed between small win games, the second variable winning opening 316B is closed by the second opening and closing door 319B, and the game ball 99 rolling on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B can enter the special winning opening 69. Therefore, when a right hit is performed during the variable game of the small win notification executed between small win games (during the variable display of the second special pattern), the game ball 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 moves toward the special winning opening 69 by rolling on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B. And because the probability of being distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 is 1/3, and the prize balls for the special prize opening 69 are 15 balls (see FIG. 113(B)), an increase of up to 12 game balls 99 (maximum expected value per ball is 4 balls) can be expected for every 3 game balls 99 shot out.

In addition, the variable play pattern (variable display time of the second special symbol) that notifies the lottery result in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variable play state (high probability mode) is set to 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds (see FIG. 112 (D)). Therefore, for example, if the launch interval of the game balls 99 is 0.6 seconds, when 30 seconds is selected as the variable pattern (variable display time), 50 game balls 99 can be launched during the variable play, so the theoretical maximum difference in balls in one variable play is 200 balls. Similarly, when 60 seconds is selected as the variable pattern (variable display time), the theoretical maximum difference in balls in one variable play is 400 balls, and when 90 seconds is selected as the variable pattern (variable display time), the theoretical maximum difference in balls in one variable play is 600 balls.

In addition, since the average value of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) of the variable play that notifies the lottery result in the second special chart lottery in the high probability mode is 60 seconds (see FIG. 112 (D)), the theoretical maximum expected difference in balls in one variable play when hitting the right in the high probability mode is 400 balls. In other words, the theoretical maximum increase in the difference in balls per minute (60 seconds) when hitting the right in the high probability mode is 400 balls. And, since the gaming machine 10 has a jackpot probability of 1/20 and a small jackpot probability of 19/20 in the high probability mode, the maximum expected difference in balls in a small jackpot game in the high probability mode is approximately 8,000 balls. On the other hand, as mentioned above, in the 2R guaranteed jackpot game, the ball 99 entering the first variable winning port 316A can be expected to increase the difference in balls by about 180 balls, while in the 2R normal jackpot game and the small jackpot game, the ball 99 entering the second variable winning port 316B cannot be expected to increase the difference in balls. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the ball 99 is not increased mainly by balls entering the variable winning ports 316A and 316B in the jackpot game and the small jackpot game, but by hitting the right side in the guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode), the game machine has a new gameplay that increases the ball 99 mainly by balls entering the special winning port 69 in the variable game that notifies the lottery result in the second special chart lottery.

Some gaming machines hold a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be played, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is played. In addition, in the jackpot lottery, a lottery is held not only to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a miss, but also whether or not the jackpot is a small jackpot. Here, a small jackpot is a different type of win from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot game is played, and after the small jackpot game is played, the game state before the small jackpot game is played (probability game state or time-saving game state) is maintained. And, in games where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery includes a small jackpot in addition to a jackpot, there are gaming machines that increase the number of balls played by successive small jackpots in the probability game state between jackpot games.

However, in gaming machines that increase the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in a probability variable play state between jackpot games, the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port that operates in the jackpot game and the small winning game becomes a higher proportion of the total number of balls paid out. In other words, the ratio of the special feature (the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from winning all winning ports that have prize balls paid out) and the consecutive feature ratio (the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from winning all winning ports that have prize balls paid out) become higher. In other words, gaming machines that increase the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in a probability variable play state between jackpot games are not desirable because the speed at which the balls increase increases, which may result in encouraging the player's gambling desire.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10, the difference in balls is not increased mainly by the entry of the game balls 99 into the variable winning openings 316A and 316B in the big win game and the small win game, but the game balls 99 (held balls) of the player are increased mainly by the entry of the game balls 99 into the special winning opening 69 in the variable game that notifies the lottery result in the second special chart lottery in the high probability game state (high probability mode). Here, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role become higher as the number of balls paid out by the entry of the game balls 99 into the variable winning openings 316A and 316B increases. Therefore, since the main increase in the player's game balls 99 is due to game balls 99 entering the special winning port 69, rather than the game balls 99 entering the variable winning ports 316A and 316B, it is possible to lower the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive features compared to gaming machines that increase the player's game balls 99 mainly by game balls entering the variable winning ports.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when a right-handed hit is performed, not all of the game balls 99 hit from the right are distributed to the front side of the gaming board 31 by the crane device 63, but some of the game balls 99. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is performed in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special chart lottery in a sure-change game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, the increase rate of the player's game balls 99 (held balls) can be set by setting the distribution ratio to the front side of the gaming board 31 by the crane device 63 (1/3 in this embodiment), so that it is possible to set the increase rate of the balls that are dispensed at a level that does not stimulate the player's gambling greed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when a right hit is made in a variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode), the player's game balls 99 (held balls) are increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special winning port 69. Therefore, the increase speed of the game balls 99 (held balls) of the player can be set by setting the number of prize balls in the special winning port 69 (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode) (30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds in this embodiment), so it is possible to set the increase speed of the balls dispensed to a degree that does not stimulate the player's gambling greed.

Next, we will explain the shooting of a non-recommended game ball 99 in the gaming machine 10. Here, Figure 114 (B) shows the game flow when a non-recommended right shot is performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode).

In the non-recommended procedure shown in FIG. 114(B), when a right shot is performed in the normal game state (low probability mode) to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31, it becomes difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69, and the expected difference in balls for the game ball 99 is set to be 100% or less (the player's game balls 99 (balls in hand) do not increase).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, when a right hit is performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the gaming ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315, but cannot enter the first winning hole 314. Then, when the gaming ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), a second special drawing (jackpot drawing) is executed. The second special drawing in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is a drawing to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small jackpot (see FIG. 111 (B)), and when the drawing result is a jackpot, it is only assigned as a 2R normal jackpot, and it never becomes a 2R special jackpot (see FIG. 111 (D)). In other words, in the case of a second special drawing triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning hole 315, even if it is a jackpot in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), it will not become a 2R special jackpot, but a 2R normal jackpot.

If the result of the second special drawing, triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315, is a jackpot, a 2R normal jackpot game is played after the variable game in which the result of the drawing is announced is completed. In this 2R normal jackpot game, two round games are played in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened, but as mentioned above, the player's game balls 99 (held balls) cannot be increased even if the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by hitting from the right. Therefore, if a right hit is performed in the normal game state (low probability mode), even if the result of the second special drawing is a jackpot, the special jackpot game is not played, and an increase in the game balls 99 due to the special jackpot game cannot be expected, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when the 2R normal jackpot game based on the second special chart lottery in the low probability mode (normal game state) ends, the normal game state is maintained. That is, in this embodiment, when a right hit is made in the normal game state (low probability mode), the lottery result of the second special chart lottery is a jackpot, and the game state is transitioned to the normal game state without transitioning to the probability variable game state (high probability mode). In this way, when a right hit is made in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game state is not transitioned to the probability variable game state (high probability mode), so an increase in the number of game balls 99 due to the entry of the game balls 99 into the special winning port 69 as in the promotion procedure cannot be expected, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special drawing in the normal game state (low probability mode) is a small win, the small win game is executed after the variable game in which the result of the drawing is notified is finished. In this small win game, an opening game in which the second variable winning port 316B is opened is executed once, but as mentioned above, even if the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning port 316B by hitting with the right hand, the player's game balls 99 (held balls) cannot be increased. When such a small win game ends, the normal game state is maintained without transitioning to a high probability game state (high probability mode). That is, in this embodiment, when a right hand is hit in the normal game state (low probability mode), the lottery result in the second special drawing is a small win, and the normal game state is maintained without transitioning to a high probability game state. In other words, when hitting from the right in the normal game mode (low probability mode), the game flow is generally "2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game → 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game... 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game → 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with big win notification → 2R normal big win game → 2nd special chart lottery → variable play with small win notification → small win game..."

Here, in the small win game, as described above, an opening game is executed once in which the second variable winning opening 316B is opened. In this opening game, the game ball 99 hit from the right enters the second variable winning opening 316B, which is the fully secured attacker, and the game ball 99 does not enter the special winning opening 69. Therefore, an increase in the number of game balls in the small win game cannot be expected.

In addition, in the variable game of the small win notification executed between small win games when hitting from the right in the normal game state (low probability mode), the second variable winning opening 316B is closed by the second opening and closing door 319B, but the variable pattern (variable display time) of the variable game of the small win notification is short at 1 second (Fig. 112 (B)). In addition, the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening and closing door 319B are provided below the crane device 63, and when hitting from the right, the game ball 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the crane device 63 rolls on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 319B and moves to the left, so that it can enter the special winning opening 69. Therefore, even if a right shot is performed during a variable game with a small win notification, the probability that the game ball 99 will reach the second opening and closing door 319B while the second variable winning opening 316B is closed by the second opening and closing door 319B during the variable game is low, and even if the game ball 99 reaches the second opening and closing door 319B, the second variable winning opening 316B may be opened because a small win game will start before the game ball 99 reaches the special winning opening 69. Therefore, if a right shot is performed in a normal game state (low probability mode), the probability that the game ball will enter the special winning opening 69 during a variable game with a small win notification is low, and an increase in the number of game balls 99 cannot be expected. Therefore, it is disadvantageous to the player to perform a right shot in a normal game state (low probability mode).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a right hit is made in the normal game state (low probability mode), a 2R guaranteed jackpot game in which an increase in 99 game balls is expected is not executed, nor is there a transition to a guaranteed jackpot game state, and furthermore, an increase in 99 game balls is not expected in the 2R normal jackpot game, the small jackpot game, or the variable game in which the result of the second special chart lottery is notified that it is a small jackpot. Therefore, there is no advantage for the player to make a right hit in the normal game state (low probability mode) since an increase in game balls is not expected. In other words, in this embodiment, a so-called strategy hit countermeasure is implemented by making it impossible to expect an increase in 99 game balls when a right hit is made in the normal game state (low probability mode).

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 115 to 121, focusing on the differences from the processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above.

In this embodiment, a part of the main processing executed by the main control unit 4 differs from that in the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit 4.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
As shown in Fig. 115, the main processing of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the variable game control processing (step S4901) and the big win game control processing (step S4902) are different from those of the first embodiment, and the small win game control processing (step S4903) is executed. Below, the variable game control processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 116, the big win game control processing of this embodiment with reference to Figs. 117 to 120, and the small win game control processing of this embodiment with reference to Fig. 121.

[Variable game control processing]
In the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, since the winning type includes a small win, it is determined whether or not a small win game is being played in order to determine whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol (step S1400). Then, when the small win game is being played (step S1400: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process without starting the variable display of the special symbol. On the other hand, when the small win game is not being played (step S1400: No), the variable display of the special symbol is started on the condition that the jackpot game or the variable game (the pattern is not being changed) is not being played. In other words, in this embodiment, since the lottery result in the jackpot lottery includes a small win, the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is added that the small win game is not being played.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
In the jackpot game control processing of this embodiment, if the result of the first special chart lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314, is a jackpot, control is performed to execute a 2R certain variable jackpot game in which two round games are played allowing the game ball 99 to enter the first variable winning port 316A, and if the result of the second special chart lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315, is a jackpot, control is performed to execute a 2R regular jackpot game in which two round games are played allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second variable winning port 316B.

<Step S5001>
As shown in FIG. 117, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S5001. The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON in step S5004 described later in the jackpot game control process. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5009, and if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5001: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5002.

<Step S5002>
When the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5001: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the 2R variable probability jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002). The 2R variable probability jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R variable probability jackpot, and is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 26, for example. Then, when the 2R variable probability jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is a 2R variable probability jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5004. On the other hand, when the 2R variable probability jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S5002: No), that is, when the jackpot type is not a 2R variable probability jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5003.

<Step S5003>
When the 2R variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S5002: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5003). The 2R normal jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, and is set to ON in the variation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the variation start process in FIG. 26, for example. Then, when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5003: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is a 2R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5004. On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S5003: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S5004 and S5005>
If the 2R sure-variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002: Yes), or if the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5003: Yes), i.e., if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON (step S5004), and sets the value of the round number counter to 2 in order to execute two rounds of play in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game (step S5005).

<Steps S5006 to S5008>
In step S5006, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command to ON, which notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start (step S5006). The jackpot game start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process in the main process of FIG. 115. When the voice and lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command, it executes a process to determine the jackpot game presentation (see step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37). In addition, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the opening process to ON (step S5007), sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S5008), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S5009>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5001: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the opening flag set to ON in step S5007 of the jackpot game control process is set to ON or not, that is, whether the opening of the jackpot game is being executed or not (step S5009). If the opening flag is set to ON (step S5009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5010, and if the opening flag is set to OFF (step S5009: No), the process proceeds to step S5022 in FIG.

<Steps S5010 and S5011>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S5009: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S5008 of the jackpot game control process (step S5010), and judges whether the opening time counter value after subtraction is 0 or not, i.e., whether to end the opening and start the opening/closing execution mode (step S5011). If the opening time counter value is 0 (step S5011: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5013, and if the opening time counter value is not 0 (step S5011: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S5013 to S5016>
If the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S5011: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag to OFF (step S5013). Also, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot game flag is set to ON as shown in FIG. 118, that is, whether or not to start the opening and closing execution mode of the 2R probability variable jackpot game (step S5014). If the 2R probability variable jackpot game flag is set to ON (step S5014: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the first opening and closing door 319A to the operating position on the rear side to open the first variable winning hole 316A to start the round game (step S5015), and sets the first variable winning hole open progress flag indicating that the first variable winning hole 316A is open to ON (step S5016), and proceeds to step S5019. On the other hand, if the 2R special jackpot game flag is set to OFF (step S5014: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S5017.

<Steps S5017 and S5018>
If the 2R special jackpot game flag is set to off (step S5014: No), it can be determined that the 2R normal jackpot game flag is set to on, so the MPU 41 moves the second opening/closing door 319B to the operating position on the rear side to open the second variable winning opening 316B and start a round of play (step S5017), and sets the second variable winning opening open flag, which indicates that the second variable winning opening 316B is open, to on (step S5018), and transitions to processing in step S5019.

<Steps S5019 to S5021>
When the first variable prize opening open flag is set on (step S5016), or when the second variable prize opening open flag is set on (step S5018), the MPU 41 sets a variable prize opening open time counter indicating the remaining open time of the variable prize openings 316A, 316B (step S5019).

The MPU 41 also sets a round play start command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that a round play in the open/close execution mode has started (step S5020), subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds set in step S5005 of FIG. 117 in the jackpot game control process (step S5021), and ends the jackpot game control. The round play start command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5022>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S5009: No), as shown in Fig. 119, the MPU 41 judges whether the variable winning opening flag (first variable winning opening flag or second variable winning opening flag) set to ON in step S5016 or step S5018 in Fig. 118 in the big win game control process is set to ON, that is, whether the variable winning openings 316A, 316B are open during the execution of the round game (step S5022). When the variable winning opening flag is set to ON (step S5022: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5023, and when the variable winning opening flag is set to OFF (step S5022: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5036.

<Step S5023>
When the variable winning port open flag is set to ON (step S5022: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning port 394 is set to ON, that is, whether or not a winning has occurred in the variable winning ports 316A, 316B (step S5023). The variable winning flag is set to ON when a winning ball command for winning the variable winning ports 316A, 316B is set in the winning ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 25, for example. When the variable winning flag is set to ON (step S5023: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5024, and when the variable winning flag is set to OFF (step S5023: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5028.

<Steps S5024 and S5025>
If the variable winning flag is set on (step S5023: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings in the variable winning ports 316A, 316B (step S5024), and sets the variable winning flag to off (step S5025).

<Steps S5026 and S5027>
In step S5026, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the variable winning counter incremented in step S5024 is 10 or not. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to close the variable winning openings 316A, 316B due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99. If the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S5026: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the variable winning opening opening time counter to 0 (step S5027) and shifts the process to step S5030. On the other hand, if the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S5026: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5028.

<Step S5028>
If the variable winning flag is off (step S5023: No), or if the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (step S5026: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the variable winning opening time counter (step S5028), and judges whether the value of the variable winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5029). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to close the variable winning openings 316A and 316B due to the arrival of the maximum opening time. If the value of the variable winning opening time counter is 0 (step S5029: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5030, and if the value of the variable winning opening time counter is not 0 (step S5029: No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S5030 and S5031>
When the value of the variable winning counter is 10 (step S5026: Yes) and the value of the variable winning opening time counter is subtracted to 0 (step S5027), or when the value of the variable winning opening time counter is 0 (step S5029: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is time to close the variable winning openings 316A and 316B, so it moves the opening and closing doors 316A and 316B to the waiting position on the front side to close the variable winning openings 316A and 316B to end the round game (step S5030), and sets the variable winning opening open flag to OFF (step S5031). That is, the round game is ended when the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are closed when either the predetermined period (maximum open time) specified by the variable winning opening time counter has elapsed or the upper limit number of game balls 99 has entered the variable winning openings 316A and 316B is met.

<Step S5032>
In step S5032, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the round number counter, which is set in step S5005 in FIG. 117 in the big win game control process and is subtracted in step S5021 in FIG. 118, is 0. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode by judging whether there are any rounds of games remaining to be executed in the opening and closing execution mode. If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S5032: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5039, and if the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S5032: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5033.

<Steps S5033 to S5035>
If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S5032: No), it can be determined that there is a round of play remaining in the opening and closing execution mode, so the MPU 41 sets the variable winning interval flag, which indicates that it is an interval between the opening and closing operations of the variable winning openings 316A and 316B (variable winning interval) (the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are waiting to be opened) to on (step S5033), and sets the variable winning interval time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are opened (step S5034). Then, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning interval start command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the variable winning interval is to be started (step S5035), and ends the jackpot game control process. The variable winning interval start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5036>
If the variable winning opening open flag is set to OFF (step S5022: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the variable winning interval flag set to ON in step S5033 is set to ON (step S5036). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the variable winning openings 316A, 316B are closed and in an open waiting state. If the variable winning interval flag is set to ON (step S5036: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5037, and if the variable winning interval flag is set to OFF (step S5036: No), the process proceeds to step S5043 in FIG.

<Steps S5037 and S5038>
When the variable winning interval flag is set to ON (step S5036: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the variable winning interval time counter set in step S5034 (step S5037), and judges whether the variable winning interval time counter after subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether it is the timing to open the variable winning openings 316A, 316B (the timing to start a round game) or not (step S5038). When the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S5038: Yes), the MPU 41 can judge that it is the timing to open the variable winning openings 316A, 316B (the timing to start a round game), so it proceeds to step S5014 in FIG. 118, and executes the process of opening the variable winning openings 316A, 316B by operating the opening and closing doors 319A, 319B to the rear side as described above (steps S5014 to S5021). On the other hand, if the variable winning interval time counter is not 0 (step S5038: No), the big win game control process is terminated.

<Steps S5039 to S5042>
If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S5032: Yes), it can be determined that there are no rounds remaining to be executed in the open/close execution mode (it is time to end the open/close execution mode), so the MPU 41 sets the ending start flag indicating that the ending will start in the big win game on (step S5039) and sets the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S5040). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending will start (step S5041), sets the big win flag (2R variable big win flag or 2R normal big win flag) off (step S5042), and ends the big win game control process. The ending start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5039>
When the variable winning interval flag is set to OFF (step S5036: No), as shown in Fig. 120, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the ending start flag, which is set to ON in step S5039 in Fig. 119 in the big win game control process, is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is the timing to start the ending in the big win game (step S5043). When the ending start flag is set to ON (step S5043: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5044, and when the ending start flag is set to OFF (step S5043: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5047.

<Steps S5044 to S5046>
If the ending start flag is set to ON (step S5043: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending in progress flag to ON (step S5044), which indicates that the ending is in progress, and sets the ending time counter to indicate the remaining time of the ending (step S5045).Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending start flag to OFF (step S5046), and ends the big win game control process.

<Step S5047>
If the ending start flag is set to OFF (step S5043: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the ending flag set to ON in step S5044 in the big win game control process is set to ON, that is, whether the ending is being executed in the big win game (step S5047). If the ending flag is set to ON (step S5047: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5048, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S5047: No), the MPU 41 ends the big win game control process.

<Steps S5048 and S5049>
If the ending flag is set to ON (step S5047: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter set in step S5045 in the big win game control process (step S5048), and judges whether the ending time counter value after subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether it is the end timing of the ending (big win game) or not (step S5049). If the ending time counter value is 0 (step S5049: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5050, and if the ending time counter value is not 0 (step S5049: No), the MPU 41 ends the big win game control process.

<Steps S5050 to S5052>
If the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S5049: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the end timing of the ending (jackpot game), and therefore sets the ending flag set to ON in step S5044 in the jackpot game control process to OFF (step S5050), and sets the jackpot game execution flag set to ON in step S5004 of FIG. 117 in the jackpot game control process to OFF (step S5051). Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending (step S5052), and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

As described above, the jackpot game control process executes a jackpot game consisting of an opening, two rounds of play, and an ending. In addition, the jackpot game control process executes a process in which the first variable winning port 316A is opened in a 2R special jackpot game, and the second variable winning port 316B is opened in a 2R normal jackpot game, as a round of play.

[Small Win Game Control Processing]
In the small prize game control processing of this embodiment, when the result of the first special chart lottery executed in response to the game ball 99 entering the first winning port 314 in the high probability mode (high probability game state) is a small prize, or when the result of the second special chart lottery executed in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 is a small prize, control is performed to execute a small prize game in which an opening game is executed once in which the second variable winning port 316B is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter.

<Step S5101>
As shown in FIG. 121, in the small win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the small win game execution flag is set to ON in step S5101. The small win game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small win game is being executed, and is set to ON in step S5104 of the small win game control process described later. If the small win game execution flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5107, and if the small win game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5102.

<Step S5102>
When the small win game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the small win flag is set to ON (step S5102). The small win flag is a flag indicating whether the lottery result in the big win lottery is a small win or not, and is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 26, for example. Then, when the small win flag is set to ON (step S5102: Yes), that is, when the win type is a small win, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5103. On the other hand, when the small win flag is set to OFF (step S5102: No), that is, when the win type is not a small win, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S5103 and S5104>
If the small win flag is set to ON (step S5102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small win game start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the small win game is to be started (step S5103), and sets a small win game execution flag indicating that the small win game is being executed to ON (step S5104). The small win game start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
In step S5105, the MPU 41 moves the second opening/closing door 319B to the operating position on the rear side to open the second variable winning opening 316B and start the small win opening game (step S5105), and sets the second variable winning opening opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the second variable winning opening 316B (step S5106), and terminates the small win game control processing.

<Steps S5107 and S5108>
When the small win game execution flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second variable winning opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the second variable winning opening 316B set in step S5106 of the small win game control process (step S5107), and judges whether the value of the second variable winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S5108). When the value of the second variable winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5108: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5109, and when the value of the second variable winning opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S5108: No), the small win game control process is terminated.

<Steps S5109 to S5111>
If the value of the second variable winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5108: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the second opening/closing door 319B to the waiting position on the front side and closes the second variable winning opening 316B, thereby ending the small win opening game (step S5109), sets the small win game in progress flag and the small win flag to off (steps S5110 and S5111), and ends the small win game control processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the difference balls are not increased mainly by the entrance of the game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B in the big win game and the small win game, but the game balls 99 (held balls) of the player are increased mainly by the entrance of the game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69 in the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special chart lottery in the sure-change game state (high probability mode). Here, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role become higher as the number of payout balls due to the entrance of the game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B increases. Therefore, since the main increase in the player's game balls 99 is due to the entrance of the game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69, not the entrance of the game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B, it is possible to lower the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role compared to a gaming machine that increases the player's game balls 99 mainly by the entrance of the game balls into the variable winning holes.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a right-handed hit is performed, not all of the game balls 99 hit from the right are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the Krun device 63, but some of the game balls 99. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is performed in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special chart lottery in a sure-change game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, the increase rate of the player's game balls 99 (held balls) can be set by setting the distribution ratio to the front side of the game board 31 by the Krun device 63 (1/3 in this embodiment), so it is possible to set the increase rate of the balls that are dispensed at a level that does not stimulate the player's gambling spirit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a right hit is made in a variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode), the player's game balls 99 (held balls) are increased by the game ball 99 entering the special winning port 69. Therefore, the increase speed of the game balls 99 (held balls) of the player can be set by setting the number of prize balls in the special winning port 69 (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game that notifies the result of the second special drawing in a high probability game state (high probability mode) (30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds in this embodiment), so it is possible to set the increase speed of the balls dispensed to a degree that does not stimulate the player's gambling greed.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to ninth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to tenth embodiments described above.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, the game balls 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 are distributed to the front or back side of the game board 31 at a predetermined ratio by the crane device 63 configured as a non-movable object fixed to the right area of the game board 31, and the game balls 99 distributed to the front side are guided to the special winning port 69 by the second opening and closing door 319B that closes the second variable winning port 316B during the variable display of the second special chart in the high probability game state (high probability mode). This explains a case in which the difference in balls is not increased mainly by the game balls 99 entering the variable winning ports 316A, 316B in the big win game and the small win game, but the game balls (held balls) of the player are increased mainly by the game balls 99 entering the special winning port 69 during the variable display of the second special chart in the high probability game state (high probability mode).

However, the Klawn device 63, which is configured as a non-movable object fixed to the game board 31, is relatively large, and since the pattern display unit 341 is provided in the center of the game board 31, locating the Klawn device 63 in the right area of the game board 31 tends to reduce design freedom. Furthermore, if a large space is to be secured for the Klawn device 63 in the right area of the game board 31, it may become necessary to design the front view area of the pattern display unit 341 located in the center of the game board 31 to be small. Since the pattern display unit 341 is used to execute image presentation, it is not preferable to reduce the front view area of the pattern display unit 341 in order to increase interest through image presentation.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game ball 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the Kruun device 63 is guided to the special winning opening 69 by the second opening and closing door 319B that closes the second variable winning opening 316B, it is not possible to completely prevent the game ball 99 from entering the special winning opening 69 at times other than when the second special chart is being displayed in a variable play state (high probability mode), and it may become a target for a player to try to win.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, depending on the posture of the flow path regulating member, which is a movable member provided on the game board, the game ball shot into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board is made to flow down one of multiple profit flow paths (for example, three profit flow paths) with different player profits (for example, expected ball payout value, expected ball difference value), so that the game ball can enter one of multiple entry areas with different player profits (for example, payout of game balls). Also, in this embodiment, the posture of the flow path regulating member is regulated according to the game state that is regulated based on the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the normal game state (low probability mode), the flow path regulating member is set to the first posture in the inactive state, so that the game ball shot into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board can enter the distribution device and flows down the low profit flow path with the lowest expected profit among the multiple profit flow paths. In addition, in the probability game state (high probability mode), the flow path regulating member is in an operating state in which it can be alternately switched between the second position and the third position, so that when the flow path regulating member is in the second position, a game ball shot into a specific area of the game board (e.g., the right side area) can enter a special winning port (first ball entry area) and flows down a high-profit flow path that has the highest expected profit among the multiple profit flow paths, while when the flow path regulating member is in the third position, a game ball shot into a specific area of the game board (e.g., the right side area) can enter a general winning port (second ball entry area) and flows down a medium-profit flow path whose expected profit is between the low-profit flow path and the high-profit flow path among the multiple profit flow paths.

In this way, in this embodiment, by changing the position of the flow path regulating member depending on the game status, it is possible to make the game ball flow down a benefit flow path that gives a different benefit to the player. And because the flow path regulating member is a movable object whose position can be changed, it can be made smaller than a non-movable object such as the aforementioned Klue device 63, so it is possible to set a small space on the game board to place the flow path regulating member. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in design freedom while also preventing the front view area of the pattern display section 341 from becoming smaller.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball that is shot into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) flows down a low-profit flow path when the flow path regulating member is in an inoperative state, and flows down a high-profit flow path or a medium-profit flow path when the flow path regulating member is in an operative state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow path through which the game ball will move based on the visually recognizable state of whether the flow path regulating member is in an inoperative state or an operative state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball shot into a specific area (e.g., the right side area) of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode) flows down a low-profit flow path that has the lowest expected profit among multiple profit flow paths, because the flow path regulating member is in an inactive state. This completely prevents a game ball shot into a specific area (e.g., the right side area) of the game board from entering a special winning hole that is particularly advantageous to a player at any time other than when the second special chart is being displayed in the high probability game state (high probability mode), that is, in the normal game state (low probability mode), and therefore prevents the game ball from becoming the target of a strategy that seeks to gain an unfair profit by having the game ball enter the special winning hole in the normal game state (low probability mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, at least a part of the low profit flow path is provided on the rear side of the game board, and the medium profit flow path and the high profit flow path are provided on the front side of the game board. That is, in this embodiment, two of the three profit flow paths are provided on the front side of the game board, and one of the three profit flow paths is provided on the rear side of the game board. This makes effective use of the space on the rear side of the game board, and reduces the space required on the front side of the game board to provide multiple profit flow paths, improving the design freedom for providing multiple profit flow paths. In addition, when the high profit flow path and the medium profit flow path are provided on the front side of the game board, the profit given to the player is higher than the low profit flow path, and it is easy to visually grasp the high profit flow path and the medium profit flow path, which are of great interest to the player, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of balls discharged when a game ball flows down a low-profit flow path is set to 1 ball or less (0.5 balls in this embodiment). In this way, by setting the expected value of balls discharged when a game ball flows down a low-profit flow path to 1 ball or less (0.5 balls in this embodiment), the expected value of balls discharged when a game ball is shot into a specific area (e.g., the right area) of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode) is set to 1 ball or less. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is shot into a specific area (e.g., the right area) of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode), the expected value of ball difference becomes 0 balls or less, and the player's balls decrease, so measures are taken to prevent so-called strategy shots from being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the flow path regulating member is in an operating state in which it can be alternately switched between the second position and the third position in a probability variable game state (high probability mode), a game ball shot into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board flows down either the high profit flow path or the medium profit flow path, and the proportion of game balls flowing down the medium profit flow path is set higher than the proportion of game balls flowing down the high profit flow path (in this embodiment, high profit flow path: low profit flow path = 1:2). Thus, in this embodiment, when the flow path regulating member is in an operating state in which it can be alternately switched between the second position and the third position in a probability variable game state (high probability mode), a game ball shot into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board flows down either the high profit flow path or the medium profit flow path. Therefore, when a game ball is shot into a specific area (for example, the right area) of the game board in a high probability mode, the player can be given the profit of the game ball flowing down the high profit flow path and the medium profit flow path without giving the player the disadvantage of the game ball flowing down the low profit flow path, and it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player in the high probability mode. Also, when a game ball is shot into a specific area (for example, the right area) of the game board when the flow path regulating member is in an operating state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the medium profit flow path is set higher than the proportion of game balls flowing down the high profit flow path, so that an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player can be suppressed without excessively granting the player the profit of the game ball flowing down the high profit flow path. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by increasing the number of balls held by the player in the high probability mode without excessively encouraging the player's gambling spirit by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state (low probability mode), the flow path regulating member is in the first position of the inoperative state, so that a game ball shot into a specific area of the game board (e.g., the right side area) always flows down the low-profit flow path which has the lowest expected profit among multiple profit flow paths, and the position of the flow path regulating member is controlled so that the game ball does not flow down the high-profit flow path and the low-profit flow path. In this way, in this embodiment, the flow path regulating member is maintained in the first position of the inoperative state in the normal game state (low probability mode), so that when a game ball is shot into a specific area of the game board (e.g., the right side area) in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game ball always flows down the low-profit flow path and is not guided to the high-profit flow path and the medium-profit flow path. As a result, when a game ball is shot into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) in the normal game mode (low probability mode), the player is not awarded the profit that would be awarded if the game ball flowed down the high profit flow path or the medium profit flow path (for example, a prize ball from the game ball entering a special prize opening or a general prize opening), but is always awarded the lowest profit that would be awarded if the game ball flowed down the low profit flow path. Therefore, in the normal game mode (low probability mode), the player is appropriately prevented from intentionally shooting the game ball into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area), i.e., the player is prevented from attempting to strike a winning shot.

In this embodiment, a game ball dispersion area is provided above the flow path regulating member to disperse (randomly flow down) game balls shot into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board, and a game ball straightening area is provided between the game ball dispersion area and the flow path regulating member to straighten the game balls flowing down the game ball dispersion area and pass the game balls one by one. In this way, in this embodiment, game balls shot into a specific area of the game board are dispersed and flow down in multiple directions in the game ball dispersion area, and are straightened in the game ball straightening area to flow down toward the flow path regulating member one by one at irregular timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, game balls shot into a specific area of the game board are supplied to the flow path regulating member one by one at irregular timing, and flow down one of the profit flow paths that give different profits to the player depending on the attitude of the flow path regulating member at irregular timing. This makes it difficult to launch a game ball at the exact moment that it flows down a high-profit flow path that gives the player a high profit, which is known as a "strategic shot," and prevents players from obtaining unfair profits.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 122 to 131, focusing on the differences from the first and tenth embodiments described above.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, like the gaming machines 10 according to the first and tenth embodiments described above, left hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right hitting is encouraged in the high probability gaming state (high probability mode). However, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the reason why left hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right hitting is encouraged in the high probability gaming state (high probability mode) is different from that of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, as will be described in detail later, and therefore the configuration of the flow-down area of the gaming ball 99 shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 is different from that of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the number of balls is increased by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 by hitting to the right in a sure-change gaming state (high probability mode), so the configuration of the right side area of the gaming board 31 is the same as in the tenth embodiment described above, but the configuration of the flow-down area of the gaming ball 99 shot into the right side area of the gaming board 31 is different from that of the tenth embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the configuration of the flow-down area of the gaming ball 99 shot into the right side area of the gaming board 31 will be described with reference to Figs. 122 to 126.

Here, FIG. 122 is a front view showing an example of a game board 31 of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 123 is an enlarged view of a main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 122, FIG. 124(A) is an enlarged view of a main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 122, FIG. 124(B) and FIG. 124(C) are cross-sectional views of a distribution device 94 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 122, and FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 are enlarged views of a main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 122.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the flow area of the gaming ball 99 shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 includes a gaming ball dispersion area 74, a gaming ball straightening area 75, a flow path regulation member 84, a low profit flow path 76, a high profit flow path 77, a medium profit flow path 78, a sorting device 94, a variable winning opening 316C, a special winning opening 69, and a general winning opening 313A.

[Game ball dispersion area 74]
As shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, the game ball dispersion area 74 defines a plurality of flow paths (routes) through which the game balls 99 can move by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31. Since the game ball dispersion area 74 is formed by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, the game ball dispersion area 74 can be easily formed when other nails are driven into the game board 31. In addition, since the game ball dispersion area 74 defines a plurality of flow paths (routes) through which the game balls 99 can move by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, the game balls 99 are dispersed in multiple directions and flow down randomly. Note that the game ball dispersion area 74 may be provided by fixing a member (gimmick) formed of resin, metal, or the like to the game board 31.

In addition, a second winning hole 315 is provided in the game ball dispersion area 74. That is, in this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, a second special drawing is executed by making the game ball 99 enter the second winning hole 315 by hitting from the right. And in this embodiment, for the same reason as in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, hitting from the right in the normal game state (low probability mode) is set to be disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 114 (B)), and hitting from the left is encouraged in the normal game state (low probability mode).

[Game ball straightening area 75]
The game ball straightening area 75, below the game ball dispersion area 74 and directly above the flow path regulating member 84, defines a flow path (route) through which one game ball 99 can pass by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31. Since the game ball straightening area 75 is formed by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, the game ball straightening area 75 can be easily formed when other nails are driven into the game board 31. In addition, the game ball straightening area 75 defines a flow path (route) through which one game ball 99 can pass, thereby straightening game balls 99 that do not enter the second winning hole 315 and flow down the game ball dispersion area 74 among the game balls 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31, and causes the game balls 99 to flow down toward the flow path regulating member 84 one by one. The game ball straightening area 75 may be provided by fixing a member made of resin, metal, or the like (for example, a member similar to the through gate 317 of the first embodiment described above) to the game board 31.

Thus, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 are dispersed in multiple directions in the game ball dispersion area 74 and flow down, and are rectified in the game ball rectification area 75 and flow down toward the flow path regulating member 84 one ball at a time at irregular timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 are supplied to the flow path regulating member 84 one ball at a time at irregular timing, and flow down one of the three benefit flow paths 76 to 78, which differ in the benefit given to the player depending on the position of the flow path regulating member 84 (the first position (see FIG. 124(A)), the second position (see FIG. 125), or the third position (see FIG. 126) described below). This makes it difficult to launch a game ball at the exact timing that the game ball will flow down the high-profit flow path 77, which gives the player a high profit (for example, expected value of balls dispensed, expected value of ball difference), and prevents the player from obtaining an unfair profit.

[Flow path defining member 84]
As shown in Figures 124(A), 125 and 126, the flow path regulating member 84 regulates which of the low-profit flow path 76, the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78, which have different benefits (e.g., expected value of ball payout, expected value of ball difference) provided to the player, the game ball 99 flowing down the game ball straightening area 75 should flow down depending on its posture (first posture (see Figure 124(A)), second posture (see Figure 125) or third posture (see Figure 126) described below). The flow path regulating member 84 includes a first guiding portion 841, a second guiding portion 842, a third guiding portion 843 and a closing portion 844, and is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the front in the first posture.

124(A), the first guide portion 841 is a V-shaped recess, and is located upward when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position described below, to guide the game ball 99 to the low-profit flow path 76. As shown in FIG. 125, the second guide portion 842 guides the game ball 99 to the high-profit flow path 77 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second position described below. As shown in FIG. 126, the third guide portion 843 guides the game ball 99 to the medium-profit flow path 78 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the third position described below. As shown in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, the closing portion 844 closes the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 described below when the flow path regulating member 84 is operated between the second position and the third position described below, to prevent the game ball 99 from being introduced into the low-profit flow path 76.

The flow path regulating member 84 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, and depending on the game status, the driving means is controlled by the MPU 41, so that the flow path regulating member 84 can be in any one of the first position shown in FIG. 124(A), the second position shown in FIG. 125, and the third position shown in FIG. 126.

The first position of the flow path regulating member 84 shown in FIG. 124(A) is the position in the normal game state (low probability mode), and is a stationary non-operated position in which the flow path regulating member 84 is stopped at the first stop position. When the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position, the first guide portion 841 is positioned upward, while the closing portion 844 is positioned downward, and the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 described below is opened. Therefore, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position, the game ball 99 flowing down from above is received by the first guide portion 841, which is a V-shaped recess, and the game ball 99 is caused to flow down into the low-profit flow path 76 via the inlet 762.

[Low profit flow path 76]
124(A), when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position, the low-profit flow path 76 guides the game ball 99 introduced through the first guide portion 841 of the flow path regulating member 84 to a sorting device 94 (first ball entry area) described later. The low-profit flow path 76 is set to have the lowest profit (for example, expected ball payout value, expected ball difference value) provided to the player among the three profit flow paths 76 to 78.

The low-profit flow path 76 includes a rear flow path 761 provided on the rear side of the game board 31, an inlet 762 that penetrates the front and rear of the game board 31 directly below the game ball straightening area 75 and at the top of the rear flow path 761 and communicates with the rear flow path 761 at the top of the rear flow path 761, and an outlet 763 that penetrates the front and rear of the game board 31 at the bottom of the rear flow path 761 and communicates with the rear flow path 761 at the bottom of the rear flow path 761. That is, the low-profit flow path 76 causes the game balls 99 introduced from the inlet 762 to flow down the rear flow path 761 and be discharged from the outlet 763. The outlet 763 is provided directly above the ball entrance portion 940 of the sorting device 94 described below, and the game balls 99 discharged from the outlet 763 enter the sorting device 94.

[Distributor 94]
124(B) and 124(C), the distribution device 94 distributes the game balls 99 discharged from the discharge port 763 of the low-profit flow path 76 to either the first flow path 941 or the second flow path 942, thereby distributing the game balls 99 to either the general winning port 943 or the outlet port 944. In this distribution device 94, a distribution member 945 can be rotated in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In this embodiment, the distribution member 945 is alternately switched between a right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the right to distribute the game balls 99 to the first flow path 941 and cause the game balls 99 to enter the general winning opening 943, and a left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the left to distribute the game balls 99 to the second flow path 942 and cause the game balls 99 to enter the outlet 944, thereby distributing the game balls 99 to either the general winning opening 943 or the outlet 944. The distribution member 945 is controlled to an operating state that is alternately switched between the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) at least in the normal game state (low probability mode). Of course, the distribution member 945 may be in an operating state in a probability variable game state (high probability mode), a big win game state, and a small win game state. In other words, the distribution member 945 only needs to be in an operating state in at least a normal game state (low probability mode), and may be in an operating state at all times regardless of the game state.

The distribution ratio between the first flow path 941 and the second flow path 942 by the distribution member 945 is set to 1:1 or approximately 1:1 by the MPU 41 controlling the drive means. That is, in the distribution device 94, the game balls 99 are distributed to the general winning opening 943 and the outlet 944 at a ratio of 1:1 or approximately 1:1. In the distribution device 94, the number of balls paid out (prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the general winning opening 943 is set to, for example, 1 ball, and there are no prize balls when the game ball 99 enters the outlet 944. Therefore, in the distribution device 94, when one game ball 99 enters, the expected value of balls paid out is 0.5 balls, and the expected difference in balls is -0.5 balls.

In other words, by maintaining the first attitude of the flow path regulation member 84 in the normal game state (low probability mode), when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 is always guided to the low-profit flow path 76, and is not guided to the high-profit flow path 77 or the medium-profit flow path 78. As a result, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the player is not given the profit (a prize ball due to the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 or the general winning hole 313A) when the game ball 99 flows down the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78, and the player is always given the profit when the game ball 99 flows down the low-profit flow path 76. In this embodiment, the game ball 99 flowing down the low-profit flow path 76 is introduced into the distribution device 94 with a difference ball expectation value of -0.5 balls. Therefore, if the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game mode (low probability mode), the player's balls will decrease, so measures have been taken to prevent so-called "strategic shots" from being performed.

The distribution ratio between the first flow path 941 (general winning port 943) and the second flow path 942 (out port 944) in the distribution device 94, the prize balls in the general winning port 943, etc. can be changed as appropriate as long as the expected difference in balls when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) is 0 balls or less. Of course, the configuration of the distribution device 94 can also be changed as appropriate as long as the expected difference in balls when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) is 0 balls or less. For example, the arrangement of the nails to be driven into the game board 31 can be appropriately set to distribute the game balls 99 to the general winning port 943 and the second flow path 942. The sorting device 94 may also be omitted, in which case the game balls 99 discharged from the outlet 763 of the low-profit flow path 76 are discharged from the outlet 318 to the rear side of the game board 31.

[High-profit flow path 77]
As shown in FIG. 125, the high-profit flow path 77 is a flow path that enables the game ball 99 to enter the special winning port 69, and the profit (e.g., expected value of ball payout, expected value of ball difference) given to the player is set to the highest among the three profit flow paths 76 to 78.

The second position is a position in which the flow path regulating member 84 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle from the position in which the flow path regulating member 84 is upside down with respect to the first position, and is stopped at a second stop position. In this second position, the closing portion 844 of the flow path regulating member 84 is positioned on the upper side, thereby closing the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 and restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the low-profit flow path 76. In other words, the high-profit flow path 77 is a flow path that is formed on the front side of the game board 31 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second position, and allows the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69 by flowing the game ball 99 down on the left side of the flow path regulating member 84.

When the game ball 99 enters the special winning port 69, the number of game balls 99 paid out (prize balls) is the highest among all the winning ports 313A, 313-315, 316C, 69, and is set to, for example, 15, as in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment. And, since the high profit flow path 77 allows the game ball 99 to enter the special winning port 69, the profit (for example, expected value of ball payout, expected value of ball difference, prize balls) given to the player is set to be the highest among the profit flow paths 76-78.

However, as in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, the number of prize balls in the special winning port 69 may be set to another number other than 15, so long as an increase in game balls 99 can be expected during the variable display of the second special symbol in the high probability mode.

[Medium profit flow path 78]
As shown in FIG. 126, the medium profit flow path 78 is a flow path that enables the game ball 99 to enter the general winning port 313A, and the profit provided to the player (e.g., expected ball payout value, expected ball difference value) is set between the low profit flow path 76 and the high profit flow path 77.

The third position is a position in which the flow path regulating member 84 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle from the position in which the flow path regulating member 84 is upside down with respect to the first position, and is stopped at a third stop position. In this third position, the closing portion 844 of the flow path regulating member 84 is positioned on the upper side, thereby closing the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76, thereby restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the low-profit flow path 76. In other words, the medium-profit flow path 78 is a flow path that is formed on the front side of the game board 31 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the third position, and allows the game ball 99 to enter the general winning port 313A by flowing the game ball 99 down on the right side of the flow path regulating member 84.

The medium profit flow path 78 allows the game ball 99 to enter the general winning opening 313A, and the profits (e.g., expected ball payout value, expected ball difference value, prize balls) provided to the player among the profit flow paths 76-78 are set between the low profit flow path 76 and the high profit flow path 77. In this embodiment, the number of game balls 99 paid out (prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the general winning opening 313A is set to 1 ball. In other words, when the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78, the expected ball payout value is 1 ball, and the expected ball difference value is 0 balls (100%). Therefore, when the game ball 99 is guided to the medium profit flow path 78 in the right area of the game board 31, the player's balls are maintained. Of course, the number of game balls 99 paid out (prize balls) when a game ball 99 enters the general winning opening 313A only needs to be less than the number of game balls paid out (prize balls) from the special winning opening 69, and is not limited to one ball and may be some other number. The expected number of balls paid out when a game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78 may be set to exceed one ball (the expected difference in balls exceeds 0 balls (100%)), thereby increasing the number of balls held by the player.

When the opening and closing door 319C is operated during a big win or small win game to open the variable winning opening 316C, if the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 is guided to the left side of the flow path regulating member 84 by the flow path regulating member 84, the game ball 99 does not enter the special winning opening 69, but enters the variable winning opening 316C.

In this embodiment, the rear flow path 761 of the low-profit flow path 76 is formed on the rear side of the game board 31, and the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78 are formed on the front side of the game board 31. In this way, the rear flow path 761 of the low-profit flow path 76 is formed on the rear side of the game board 31, so that the space on the rear side of the game board 31 is effectively utilized, and the space required on the front side of the game board 31 to provide the profit flow paths 76 to 78 can be reduced, improving the design freedom for providing the profit flow paths 76 to 78. In addition, when the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31, the profit given to the player is higher than that of the low-profit flow path 76, and it is easy to visually grasp the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78, which are of great interest to the player, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Operation of flow path defining member 84]
Next, there will be described an outline of the operation of the flow path regulating member 84. Note that a specific procedure for controlling the flow path regulating member 84 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

As shown in Figures 124 to 126, in this embodiment, the flow path regulating member 84 is controlled according to the game state.

<Operation of the flow path regulating member 84 in normal gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 124, in the normal game state (low probability mode), the flow path regulating member 84 is maintained in the inoperative state of the first position (see FIG. 124(A)). When the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position, the game ball 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectifying area 75 and flows down toward the first guiding section 841 of the flow path regulating member 84. When the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position, the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 is in an open state, so that the game ball 99 that has reached the first guiding section 841 of the flow path regulating member 84 is guided one ball at a time to the low-profit flow path 76 through the inlet 762. The game ball 99 introduced into the low-profit flow path 76 flows down the back flow path 761 and is discharged from the outlet 763, and enters the sorting device 94. In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the distribution device 94 is distributed to either the general winning port 943 or the outlet port 944.

In this way, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) is always guided to the low profit flow path 76 without being guided to the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the player is not given the profit when the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78, that is, the prize ball when the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69 or the general winning hole 313A, but the player is always given the lowest profit when the game ball 99 flows down the low profit flow path 76. Therefore, the player is prevented from intentionally shooting the game ball into the right area of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode). In addition, by including the outlet 944 in the distribution device 94, that is, by including an inlet from which some of the game balls 99 entering the distribution device 94 are not paid out, it becomes possible to easily and appropriately set the expected value of balls to 1 ball or less (the expected difference in balls is 0 balls or less) when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode), and it becomes possible to make the expected value of balls to be shot (the expected difference in balls) more disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to further reduce the desire to shoot the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode), and therefore to further reduce the desire of the player to seek a strategy.

<Operation of the flow path regulating member 84 in the probability variation game state>
As shown in Fig. 125 and Fig. 126, in the probability variable game state (high probability mode), the MPU 41 operates the flow path regulating member 84 between the second position and the third position by operating the driving means for the flow path regulating member 84. That is, in the probability variable game state (high probability mode), the MPU 41 controls the driving means to rotate the flow path regulating member 84 alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction in a state where the closing part 844 is located on the upper side and the first guiding part 841 is located on the lower side, thereby operating the flow path regulating member 84 between the second position and the third position. Then, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second position, the game ball 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectifying area 75, and the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 is closed by the closing part 844 of the flow path regulating member 84, so that the game ball 99 is not guided to the low-profit flow path 76 but is guided to the high-profit flow path 77 formed on the left side of the flow path regulating member 84. On the other hand, when the flow path regulation member 84 is in the third position, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectification area 75, and the inlet 762 of the low-profit flow path 76 is closed by the closing part 844 of the flow path regulation member 84, so that the game ball 99 is not guided to the low-profit flow path 76 but is guided to the medium-profit flow path 78 formed on the right side of the flow path regulation member 84. Therefore, in the probability variation game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 hit from the right is allocated to the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78 without being guided to the low-profit flow path 76, because the flow path regulation member 84 is in the operating state. As a result, the player can obtain more profits (prize balls) by being allocated to the high-profit flow path 77 and entering the special winning hole 69, so that the player's ball holdings increase, and the game ball 99 is allocated to the medium-profit flow path 78 and entering the general winning hole 313A, so that the ball holdings are maintained. In addition, since the game ball 99 shot to the right area of the game board 31 in the probability variation game state is not guided to the low-profit flow path 76, the decrease in the player's game balls 99 is prevented as long as the player hits the right side, which is encouraged in the probability variation game state. As a result, in the probability variation game state (high probability mode), by hitting the right side, which is encouraged, the player's game balls 99 are not decreased, and the game balls 99 are distributed to the high-profit flow path 77 and enter the special winning hole 69, resulting in a new game property in which the player's balls are reliably increased.

In this embodiment, the flow path regulating member 84 is controlled so that the game ball 99 hit to the right in the probability variable game state (high probability mode) is distributed more to the medium profit flow path 78 than to the high profit flow path 77. For example, the distribution ratio between the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 is set to 1:2. In this way, in this embodiment, when the flow path regulating member 84 is alternately switched between the second position and the third position in the probability variable game state (high probability mode), the flow path regulating member 84 is controlled so that the game ball 99 shot to the right area of the game board 31 is distributed more to the medium profit flow path 78 than to the high profit flow path 77. This makes it possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player without excessively giving the player the profit from the game ball 99 being distributed to the high profit flow path 77. This prevents excessive increases in the number of balls held by players, which does not overly stimulate the player's gambling spirit, and increases the number of balls held by players in a high probability mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game through new gameplay characteristics.

In addition, as a method of controlling the flow path regulating member 84 to distribute the game ball 99 hit to the right in the high probability game state (high probability mode) to the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1:2), for example, the flow path regulating member 84 is first set to the second position, this second position is maintained for a predetermined time, after the predetermined time has elapsed the flow path regulating member 84 is set to the third position, this third position is maintained for a specific time longer than the predetermined time, after the specific time has elapsed the flow path regulating member 84 is set to the second position, and similarly, during the high probability game state (high probability mode), the second position for the specific time and the third position for the specific time are alternately switched. Then, it becomes possible to adjust the predetermined ratio between the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 depending on the ratio between the specific time and the specific time.

In addition, as a method of controlling the flow path regulating member 84 to distribute the game ball 99 hit to the right in the probability variation game state (high probability mode) to the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1:2), it is also possible to make the rotation speed of the flow path regulating member 84 different between the clockwise rotation and the counterclockwise rotation. For example, by setting the rotation speed of the flow path regulating member 84 in the clockwise direction to be higher than the rotation speed of the flow path regulating member 84 in the counterclockwise direction, it is possible to set the distribution ratio (proportion) to the medium profit flow path 78 higher than the distribution ratio (proportion) to the high profit flow path 77. In other words, by setting the time ratio during which the game ball 99 can be distributed to the low profit flow path 76 higher than the time ratio during which the game ball 99 can be distributed to the high profit flow path 77, the flow path regulating member 84 can set the distribution ratio (proportion) of the game ball 99 to the low profit flow path 76 to be high, and it is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio according to the above time ratio.

In addition, the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 hit to the right in the high probability mode (high probability mode) between the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 may be set to a different ratio other than 1:2, and it is also possible to adjust the rate at which the player's balls increase by changing the distribution ratio between the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78.

<Operation of the flow path regulating member 84 in winning game>
In a winning game (2R guaranteed jackpot game, 2R normal jackpot game, or small jackpot game), the MPU 41 activates the drive means for the flow path regulating member 84, so that the flow path regulating member 84 is activated to alternate between the second and third positions, as in the guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode). In a winning game, the variable winning opening 316C is opened, so that the game ball 99 allocated by the flow path regulating member 84 to the left region of the flow path regulating member 84 enters the variable winning opening 316C.

The number of balls (prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning port 316C is set to less than the number of balls to be paid out when the special winning port 69 enters, for example, to one ball. In this way, when the prize ball for the variable winning port 316C is set to one ball, the number of game balls 99 (balls in hand) of the player does not increase when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning port 316C. On the other hand, when the prize ball for the general winning port 313A is also set to one ball, the number of game balls 99 (balls in hand) of the player does not increase when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning port 316C. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of balls in hand of the player cannot be expected to increase in a winning game, and the increase in the number of game balls 99 due to the game ball 99 entering the special winning port 69 in a sure-win game state is the main factor. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, it is possible to lower the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive features, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

Of course, the number of prize balls in the variable prize opening 316C may be set to any number other than one ball, as long as the ratio of the special feature and the ratio of consecutive special features are within a certain range, and the number of prize balls in the variable prize opening 316C may be set to the number of balls that the player has in a jackpot game.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 127 to 131, focusing on the differences from the processing of the main control device 4 in the first and tenth embodiments described above.

In this embodiment, a part of the main processing executed by the main control device 4 differs from the first and tenth embodiments described above. Here, FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control device.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
As shown in FIG. 127, the main processing of this embodiment differs from the first and tenth embodiments in that the big win game control processing (step S5201) and the big win game control processing (step S5202) are different from those of the first and tenth embodiments described above, the small win game control processing (step S4903) is different from that of the tenth embodiment described above, and a distribution member control processing (step S5203) for the distribution member 945 of the distribution device 94 and a flow path regulating member control processing (step S5204) for the flow path regulating member 84 are executed.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
<Step S5201>
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment having two variable winning ports 316A, 316B in that there is one variable winning port 316C, and therefore the jackpot game control process of this embodiment differs from that of the tenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the jackpot game control process of this embodiment is common to the first embodiment in that there is one variable winning port 316C, but differs from the first embodiment in that there is only a 2R jackpot (a sure-win jackpot game and a normal jackpot) in the jackpot game in this embodiment, and therefore the jackpot game control process of this embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment.

Specifically, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, commands such as a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, and a jackpot end command are set according to the progress of the jackpot game, just like in the first embodiment described above. Also, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, that is, regardless of whether it is a 2R variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the number of rounds is set to "2" at the start of the jackpot, and the opening and closing control of the opening and closing door 319C is executed in the opening and closing execution mode.

[Small win control processing]
<Step S5202>
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment having two variable winning openings 316A, 316B in that there is one variable winning opening 316C, but the small win game control process of this embodiment is basically the same as the small win game control process of the tenth embodiment. Specifically, in the small win game control process of this embodiment, the second variable winning opening 316B is replaced with the variable winning opening 316C and the second opening/closing door 319B is replaced with the opening/closing door 319C in the small win game control process of the tenth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 121.

[Distribution member control process]
<Step S5203>
In the distribution member control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control a distribution member 945 of a distribution device 94 that distributes game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a normal game state (low probability mode) to either a general winning hole 943 or an outlet hole 944. Here, Fig. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

In the following, an example will be described in which the allocation member 945 is always activated regardless of the game state, but the allocation member 945 only needs to be activated in at least the normal game state, and whether or not the allocation member 945 is activated in the special game state or in a winning game can be set appropriately.

<Step S5301>
As shown in Fig. 128, in the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the right operation flag is set to ON (step S5301). The right operation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the distribution member 945 is located at the right operation position (see Fig. 124(B)) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the right, and is set to ON in step S5304 described later when neither the right operation flag nor the left operation flag is set to ON immediately after power-on or when an error occurs, and is set to ON in step S5315 described later when the distribution member 945 is switched from the left operation position (see Fig. 124(C)) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the left to the right operation position (see Fig. 124(B)). If the right operation flag is set on (step S5301: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S5306; if the right operation flag is set off (step S5301: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S5302.

<Step S5302>
When the right operating flag is set to OFF (step S5301: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the left operating flag is set to ON (step S5302). The left operating flag is a flag indicating whether the distribution member 945 is located at the left operating position (see FIG. 124C) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the left, and is set to ON in step S5309 described later when the distribution member 945 is switched from the right operating position (see FIG. 124B) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the right to the left operating position (see FIG. 124C) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in a posture tilted to the left. When the left operating flag is set to ON (step S5302: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5312, and when the left operating flag is set to OFF (step S5302: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5303.

<Steps S5303 to S5305>
If the left operating flag is set to OFF (step S5302: No), i.e., if both the right operating flag and the left operating flag are set to OFF, the MPU 41 positions the distributing member 945 at the right operating position (see FIG. 124B) where the distributing member 945 is maintained in an attitude inclined to the right regardless of the current attitude of the distributing member 945 (step S5303), and sets the right operating flag to ON (step S5304).Then, the MPU 41 sets a right operation counter indicating the remaining time for which the distributing member 945 is to be positioned at the right operating position (see FIG. 124B) (step S5305), and ends the distributing member control process.

<Steps S5306 and S5307>
If the right operation flag is set to ON (step S5301: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the right operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) (step S5306), and judges whether the value of the right operation counter after subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether it is time to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) (step S5307). If the value of the right operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5307: Yes), that is, it is time to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S5308. On the other hand, if the value of the right operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S5307: No), that is, it is not time to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)), the MPU 41 ends the distribution member control process.

<Steps S5308 to S5311>
If the value of the right operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5307: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the distribution member 945 from the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)), the MPU 41 switches the distribution member 945 from the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) (step S5308) and sets the left operation flag to ON (step S5309).Then, the MPU 41 sets the left operation counter indicating the remaining time for which the distribution member 945 is to be positioned at the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) (step S5310), sets the right operation flag to OFF (step S5311), and ends the distribution member control process.

Here, there is no limit to the time for which the distribution member 945 is positioned at the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time for which it is positioned at the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)), but it is preferable to set the time at which the game balls 99 that flow down the low-profit flow path 76 and enter the distribution device 94 are distributed to the general winning opening 943 and the outlet 944 in a ratio of 1:1 or approximately 1:1. In other words, it is preferable to set the time for which the distribution member 945 is positioned at the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time for which the distribution member 945 is positioned at the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) to be the same or approximately the same, and it is preferable to set the time at which the game balls 99 can be alternately distributed one ball at a time to the general winning opening 943 and the outlet 944. As an example, it is possible to set both the time for which the distribution member 945 is positioned in the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time for which the distribution member 945 is positioned in the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the same time as the interval between launches of the game balls 99 (e.g., 0.6 seconds).

<Steps S5312 and S5313>
If the left operation flag is set to on (step S5302: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the left operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the left operation position (see FIG. 124C) (step S5312), and judges whether the value of the left operation counter after the subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether it is time to switch the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124C) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124B) (step S5313). If the value of the left operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5313: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124C) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124B), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S5314. On the other hand, if the value of the left operation counter after subtraction is not equal to the value indicated by the subtraction (step S5313: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124 (C)) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124 (B)), the MPU 41 terminates the distribution member control process.

<Steps S5314 to S5317>
If the value of the left operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5313: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124C) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124B), the MPU 41 switches the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124C) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124B) (step S5314) and sets the right operation flag to ON (step S5315).Then, the MPU 41 sets the right operation counter indicating the remaining time for which the distribution member 945 is to be positioned at the right operation position (see FIG. 124B) (step S5316), sets the left operation flag to OFF (step S5317), and ends the distribution member control process.

[Flow path defining member control process]
<Step S5204>
In the flow path regulating member control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the attitude of the flow path regulating member 84 to one of a first attitude (see FIG. 124(A)) for causing the game ball 99 to flow down the low-profit flow path 76, a second attitude (see FIG. 125) for causing the game ball 99 to flow down the high-profit flow path 77, and a third attitude (see FIG. 126) for causing the game ball 99 to flow down the medium-profit flow path 78, depending on the game state. Here, FIGS. 129 to 131 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the flow path regulating member control process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

In the following, an example will be described in which the flow path regulating member 84 is in a non-operated state in the first position (see FIG. 124(A)) in the normal game state (low probability mode), and is in an operational state in which the flow path regulating member 84 can be switched between the second position (see FIG. 125) and the third position (see FIG. 126) in the special probability game state (high probability mode) and the winning game state (2R special probability big win game state, 2R normal big win game state, and small win game state).

<Step S5401>
As shown in Fig. 129, in the flow path regulating member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the flow path regulating member operation flag is set to ON (step S5401). The flow path regulating member operation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the flow path regulating member 84 is in an operation state in which it can be switched between the second position (see Fig. 125) and the third position (see Fig. 126). In other words, when the flow path regulating member operation flag is set to OFF, it means that the flow path regulating member 84 is in the first position (see Fig. 124(A)) in which it is stopped at the first stop position. The flow path regulating member operation flag is set to ON in step S5406 described later when operation of the flow path regulating member 84 is started (when the flow path regulating member 84 is shifted from the first posture (first stop position) to the second posture (second stop position)), and is set to OFF in step S5431 in FIG. 131 described later when operation of the flow path regulating member 84 is terminated and the flow path regulating member 84 is set to the inoperative first posture (see FIG. 124(A)) (when it returns to the first stop position). If the flow path regulating member operation flag is set to ON (step S5401: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S5408, and if the flow path regulating member operation flag is set to OFF (step S5401: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S5402.

<Step S5402>
When the flow path regulation member operation flag is set to OFF (step S5401: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5402). Whether or not the mode is a high probability mode is judged based on whether or not a high probability mode flag, which is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode (probability game state), is set to ON in the game state change process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 127. Then, when the mode is a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5405, and when the mode is not a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5402: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5403.

<Step S5403>
If the mode is not the high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5403). The jackpot game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not the jackpot game state is being executed, and is set to ON in the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is started (for example, see step S5004 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 117 of the above-mentioned tenth embodiment). Then, if the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5403: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5405, and if the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5403: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5404.

<Step S5404>
When the big win game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5403: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5404). The small win game in progress flag is a flag indicating whether a small win game is being executed, that is, whether the game is in a small win game state, and is set to ON in the small win game control process when a small win game is started (for example, see step S5104 in the small win game control process in FIG. 121 of the above-mentioned tenth embodiment). Then, when the small win game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5404: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5405, and when the small win game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5404: No), the flow path regulating member control process is terminated.

<Steps S5405 to S5408>
In the high probability mode (probability variable game state) (step S5402: Yes), when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5403: Yes), or when the small win game execution flag is set to ON (step S5404: Yes), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path regulation member 84 by a predetermined angle to operate the flow path regulation member 84 to the second stop position (see FIG. 125) which is the second posture (step S5405). In other words, when the normal game state (low probability mode) is shifted to the high probability mode (probability variable game state) or the winning game state (2R probability variable jackpot game state, 2R normal jackpot game state, small win game state), the operation of the flow path regulation member 84 is started, and the flow path regulation member 84 is set to the second posture (see FIG. 125), so that the game ball 99 starts to flow down the high profit flow path 77. Then, the MPU 41 sets to ON a flow path regulating member operation flag indicating that the flow path regulating member 84 is in an operation state in which it can be switched between the second posture (see FIG. 125) and the third posture (see FIG. 126) (step S5406). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets to ON a second posture operation flag indicating that the flow path regulating member 84 is in operation and in the second posture (see FIG. 125) (step S5407), sets a second posture operation counter indicating the remaining time that the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second posture (step S5408), and ends the flow path regulating member control process.

Here, the initial value of the second attitude operation counter is set according to the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position (see FIG. 125) when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state. Also, the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state is set in relation to the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position (see FIG. 126). In this embodiment, for example, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position and the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position are set to be 1:2 or approximately 1:2. That is, it is set so that for one game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69, two game balls 99 enter the general winning hole 313A. The time for which the flow path regulating member 84 is stopped at the second stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state is preferably set to a time that allows at least one game ball 99 to flow down the high-profit flow path 77 with a high probability and enter the special winning hole 69 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second position (stopped at the second stop position). For example, the time for which the flow path regulating member 84 is stopped at the second stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state is preferably set to a time equal to or longer than the launch interval of the game balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds), and is more preferably set within a range of about 1 to 2 seconds.

<Step S5409>
When the flow path regulation member operation flag is set to ON (step S5401: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5409). Whether or not the mode is a high probability mode is judged based on whether or not a high probability mode flag, which is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode (probability game state), is set to ON in the game state change process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 127. Then, when the mode is a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5409: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and when the mode is not a high probability mode (probability game state) (step S5409: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5410.

<Step S5410>
If the mode is not the high probability mode (probability game mode) (step S5409: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5410). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not the jackpot game state is being executed, and is set to ON in the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is started (for example, see step S5004 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 117 of the above-mentioned tenth embodiment). Then, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5410: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5410: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5411.

<Step S5411>
When the big win game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5410: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5411). The small win game in progress flag is a flag indicating whether a small win game is being executed, that is, whether the game is in a small win game state, and is set to ON in the small win game control process when a small win game is started (for example, see step S5104 in the small win game control process in FIG. 121 of the above-mentioned tenth embodiment). Then, when the small win game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5411: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and when the small win game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5411: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5425 in FIG. 131.

<Step S5412>
When the flow path regulation member operation flag is set to on (step S5401: Yes), when the game is in a high probability mode (high probability game state) (step S5409: Yes), when the big win game execution flag is set to on (step S5410: Yes), or when the small win game execution flag is set to on (step S5411: Yes), as shown in FIG. 130, the MPU 41 judges whether the second attitude operation flag is set to on, that is, whether the attitude (position) of the flow path regulation member 84 is the second attitude (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) or the third attitude (third stop position) (see FIG. 126) (step S5412). Then, when the second attitude operation flag is set to on (step S5412: Yes), that is, when the attitude (position) of the flow path regulation member 84 is the second attitude (second stop position), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5413. On the other hand, if the second attitude operating flag is set to off (step S5412: No), i.e., if the attitude (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the third attitude (third stop position), the MPU 41 transitions to step S5419.

<Steps S5413 and S5414>
When the second posture operation flag is set to ON (step S5412: Yes), that is, when the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 is the second posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second posture operation counter (step S5413), and judges whether the value of the second posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether it is time to switch the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the second posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) to the third posture (third stop position) (see FIG. 126) (step S5414). Then, when the value of the second posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5414: Yes), that is, when it is time to switch the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the second posture (see FIG. 125) to the third posture (third stop position), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S5415. On the other hand, if the value of the second attitude operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S5414: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the attitude (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the second attitude (second stop position) to the third attitude (third stop position), the MPU 41 terminates the flow path regulating member control process.

<Steps S5415 to S5418>
If the value of the second attitude operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5414: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the attitude (position) of the flow path regulation member 84 from the second attitude (second stop position) to the third attitude (third stop position), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path regulation member 84 by a predetermined angle to operate it from the second stop position, which is the second attitude, to the third stop position, which is the third attitude (step S5415). As a result, the state in which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77 is switched to a state in which the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78 and the game ball 99 enters the general winning hole 313A. Then, the MPU 41 sets a third attitude operation flag, which indicates that the flow path regulation member 84 is in operation and in the third attitude (see FIG. 126), to on (step S5416), and sets a third attitude operation counter, which indicates the remaining time in which the flow path regulation member 84 is in the third attitude (step S5417). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the second attitude activation flag to OFF (step S5418), and ends the flow passage regulating member control process.

Here, the initial value of the third posture operation counter is set according to the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position (see FIG. 126) when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the actuated state. Also, the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the actuated state is set in relation to the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position (see FIG. 125). In this embodiment, as described above, for example, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the actuated state, the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position and the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position are set to 1:2 or approximately 1:2. In this case, the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the third stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the actuated state is set to twice or approximately twice the time for stopping the flow path regulating member 84 at the second stop position when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the actuated state, for example, in the range of 2 to 4 seconds.

<Steps S5419 and S5420>
When the second posture operation flag is set to OFF (step S5412: No), that is, when the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 is the third posture (third stop position) (see FIG. 126), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the third posture operation counter (step S5419), and judges whether the value of the third posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether it is time to switch the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the third posture (third stop position) to the second posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) (step S5420). Then, when the value of the third posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5420: Yes), that is, when it is time to switch the posture (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the third posture (third stop position) to the second posture (second stop position), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S5421. On the other hand, if the value of the third attitude operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S5420: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the attitude (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the third attitude (third stop position) to the second attitude (second stop position), the MPU 41 terminates the flow path regulating member control process.

<Steps S5421 to S5424>
If the value of the third attitude operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5420: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the attitude (position) of the flow path regulating member 84 from the third attitude (third stop position) (see FIG. 126) to the second attitude (second stop position) (see FIG. 125), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path regulating member 84 by a predetermined angle to operate it from the third stop position which is the third attitude to the second stop position which is the second attitude (step S5421). As a result, the state in which the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78 is switched to the state in which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77 and the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69. Then, the MPU 41 sets the second attitude operation flag indicating that the flow path regulating member 84 is in operation and in the second attitude to on (step S5422), and sets the second attitude operation counter indicating the remaining time in which the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second attitude (step S5423). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the third attitude active flag to OFF (step S5424), and ends the flow passage defining member control process.

<Step S5425>
When the flow path regulation member operation flag is set to ON (step S5401: Yes), the high probability mode (high probability game state) is not being performed (step S5409: No), the big win game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5410: No), and the small win game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5411: No), as shown in Fig. 131, the MPU 41 judges whether the second attitude operation flag is set to ON (step S5425). That is, when the MPU 41 judges that the normal game state (low probability mode) is being performed, not in the high probability mode, the big win game, or the small win game, the MPU 41 judges whether the attitude (position) of the flow path regulation member 84 is the second attitude (second stop position) (see Fig. 125) or the third attitude (third stop position) (see Fig. 126). Then, if the second attitude operation flag is set to ON (step S5425: Yes), i.e., if the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second attitude (stopped at the second stop position), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5426. On the other hand, if the second attitude operation flag is set to OFF (step S5425: No), i.e., if the flow path regulating member 84 is in the third attitude (stopped at the third stop position), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5428.

<Steps S5426 and S5427>
If the second posture operation flag is set to on (step S5425: Yes), that is, if the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second posture (stopped at the second stop position), the MPU 41 clears the second posture operation counter (step S5426), sets the second posture operation flag to off (step S5427), and transitions to step S5430.

<Steps S5428 and S5429>
If the second posture operation flag is set to off (step S5425: No), that is, if the flow path regulating member 84 is in the third posture (stopped at the third stop position), the MPU 41 clears the third posture operation counter (step S5428), sets the third posture operation flag to off (step S5429), and transitions to step S5430.

<Steps S5430 and S5431>
When the processing of step S5427 or S5429 is completed, the MPU 41 returns the flow path regulating member 84 to the first stop position (first attitude) (see FIG. 124 (A)) (step S5430), sets the flow path regulating member operation flag to off (step S5431), and terminates the flow path regulating member control processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the position of the flow path regulating member 84 is changed depending on the game state (normal game state, special chance game state), making it possible to cause the game ball 99 to flow down the benefit flow paths 76, 77, 78 which provide different benefits to the player. Furthermore, since the flow path regulating member 84 is a movable object whose position can be changed, it can be made smaller than a non-movable object such as the crane device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, making it possible to reduce the space provided on the game board 31 for arranging the flow path regulating member 84. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in design freedom while also preventing the front view area of the pattern display section 341 from becoming smaller.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 flows down the low-profit flow path 76 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in an inoperative state, and flows down the high-profit flow path 77 or the medium-profit flow path 78 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in an operative state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow path through which the game ball 99 moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the flow path regulating member 84 is in an inoperative state or an operative state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) flows down the low profit flow path 76, which has the lowest expected profit among the multiple profit flow paths 76, 77, 78, because the flow path regulating member 84 is in the inactive state. This completely prevents the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 from entering the special winning hole 69 at any time other than when the second special chart is being displayed in the high probability game state (high probability mode), that is, in the normal game state (low probability mode), and therefore prevents the game ball 99 from becoming the target of a strategy to gain an unfair profit by having the game ball 99 enter the special winning hole 69 in the normal game state (low probability mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear flow path 761 of the low profit flow path 76 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31. That is, in this embodiment, two of the three profit flow paths 76-79, 77 and 78, are provided on the front side of the game board 31, and one of the three profit flow paths 76-79, 76, is provided on the rear side of the game board 31. This makes effective use of the space on the rear side of the game board 31, and reduces the space required on the front side of the game board 31 to provide multiple profit flow paths 76-79, improving design freedom for providing multiple profit flow paths 76-79. In addition, if the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31, the profit given to the player is higher than that of the low-profit flow path 76, and the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78, which are of great interest to the player, are easy to visually grasp, making it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of balls to be dispensed when the game ball 99 flows down the low-profit flow path 76 and enters the distribution device 94 is set to 1 ball or less (0.5 balls in this embodiment). In this way, by setting the expected value of balls to be dispensed when the game ball 99 flows down the low-profit flow path 76 to 1 ball or less (0.5 balls in this embodiment), the expected value of balls to be dispensed when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) is set to 1 ball or less. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the expected value of ball difference becomes 0 balls or less, and the player's balls decrease, so measures are taken to prevent so-called attacking shots from being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the flow path regulating member 84 is switched between the second and third positions in the high probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 flows down the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78, and the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78 is set higher than the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77 (in this embodiment, the high profit flow path: low profit flow path = 1:2). Thus, in this embodiment, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in an operating state in which it can be alternately switched between the second and third positions in the high probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 flows down either the high profit flow path 77 or the medium profit flow path 78. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a probability variable game state (high probability mode), the player can be given the profit of the game ball 99 flowing down the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 without giving the player a disadvantage due to the game ball 99 flowing down the low profit flow path 76, and it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player in the probability variable game state. Also, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 when the flow path regulating member 84 is in an operating state, the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit flow path 78 is set higher than the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77, so that an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player can be suppressed without giving the player an excessive profit due to the game ball 99 flowing down the high profit flow path 77. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the number of balls held by the player in a high probability mode without excessively encouraging the player's gambling spirit by restricting an excessive increase in the number of balls held.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state (low probability mode), the flow path regulation member 84 is in the first position of the inoperative state, so that the game ball 99 shot into the right region of the game board 31 can enter the distribution device 94 and necessarily flows down the low-profit flow path 76, which has the lowest expected profit among the multiple profit flow paths 76-78, and the position of the flow path regulation member 84 is controlled so that the game ball 99 does not flow down the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78. In this way, in this embodiment, the flow path regulation member 84 is maintained in the first position of the inoperative state in the normal game state (low probability mode), so that when the game ball 99 is shot into the right region of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 necessarily flows down the low-profit flow path 76 and is not guided to the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78. As a result, when the game ball 99 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), the player is not awarded any profit (e.g., a prize ball resulting from the game ball 99 entering the special prize opening 69 or the general prize opening 313A) that would result from the game ball 99 flowing down the high-profit flow path 77 and the medium-profit flow path 78, but is always awarded the lowest profit that would result from the game ball 99 flowing down the low-profit flow path 76. Therefore, the player is appropriately prevented from intentionally shooting the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode), i.e., from attempting to strike a winning shot.

In this embodiment, a game ball dispersion area 74 is provided above the flow path regulating member 84 to disperse (randomly flow down) the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31, and a game ball straightening area 75 is provided between the game ball dispersion area 74 and the flow path regulating member 84 to straighten the game balls 99 flowing down the game ball dispersion area 74 and pass the game balls 99 one by one. In this way, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 are dispersed and flow down in multiple directions in the game ball dispersion area 74, and are straightened in the game ball straightening area 75 and flow down toward the flow path regulating member 84 one by one at irregular timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 are supplied to the flow path regulating member 84 one by one at irregular timing, and flow down one of the benefit flow paths 76 to 78, which have different benefits given to the player depending on the attitude of the flow path regulating member 84, at irregular timing. This makes it difficult to launch the game ball 99 at the exact moment that it flows down the high-profit flow path 77, which gives the player a high profit, and prevents the player from obtaining unfair profits.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to tenth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable, and it is also possible to combine the technical aspects of the first to eleventh embodiments described above.

[Other Modifications]
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to the front frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and lock the back pack unit 13 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened, by a locking means such as a cylinder lock, or a locking means that makes the inner frame 12 unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means that makes the back pack unit 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the left end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, but a configuration in which the right end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 may also be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. However, the right end of the back pack unit 13 in front view can be rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 provided in the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24, but the lower tray 24 may be omitted and only the upper tray 23 may be provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side as viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted as the launch handle 22 may be adopted. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, and for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, one game ball is launched, for example, every 0.6 sec (100 game balls per minute), but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 balls) are launched per minute, or the configuration may be such that 100 or more game balls (for example, 200 balls) are launched per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched one by one by flicking the lever. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a speaker 26 is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker 26 may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the gaming machine 10 that the player is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding gaming machines 10. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to change display based on the game ball entering the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol, and for example, a configuration in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including two LED lamps is adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal pattern that starts to change based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 317, but other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal pattern, for example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a seven-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display device, or a configuration including a halogen lamp may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as a display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying a decorative pattern, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum rotation display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a configuration combining two or more of these may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, and various letters, figures, symbols, patterns, combinations of two or more of these, etc. can be adopted. For example, the decorative pattern may be the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, or combinations of two or more of these. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the number of symbol rows through which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration is adopted in which there is one symbol row of decorative symbols, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") stops. When a configuration is adopted in which there are two or four or more decorative symbol rows, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (effective line). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric role such as the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the large prize opening such as the variable prize opening 316. For example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below a plate-like member, and the plate-like member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large prize opening, a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-like member that can slide in the front and rear directions of the game board 31, a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a feather member rotating in the left and right directions (clockwise and counterclockwise directions), etc. may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a so-called loop probability game machine has been described, but in a game machine such as a V-ST machine that transitions to a game state advantageous to the player such as a probability game state after the end of the jackpot game on the condition of a V prize in the jackpot game, a V prize opening is provided in the large prize opening such as the variable prize opening 316. The V winning opening may be capable of winning at all times when the large winning opening is opened, but may be configured to be opened when a specific condition is met. Examples of the specific condition include the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round game or the final round game). In addition, when the V winning opening is configured to be opened when a specific condition is met, a movable member capable of opening and closing the V winning opening may be provided in the V winning opening, and the V winning opening may be opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. In addition, when the V winning opening is opened when a specific condition is met, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning opening is closed when a game ball enters the V winning opening or after a certain time has elapsed. In addition, a plurality of large winning openings may be provided, and for example, a large winning opening with a V winning opening and a large winning opening without a V winning opening may be provided separately. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be adopted for ordinary electric devices such as the electric device 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into a starting winning port such as the second winning port 315.For example, a tulip-shaped ordinary electric device (so-called electric chu) in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending approximately horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member and the starting winning port can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft, a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by the blade members rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variant examples, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning port, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

Summary of the Invention
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be added. Note that, for the sake of convenience, symbols may be added to the description in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the additions and each of the embodiments, but the invention related to the additions is not limited to the specific configurations to which the symbols are added. In addition, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2' or Appendix A3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to claim A2' or A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4', the special information is displayed in a part of the multiple display areas of the display means in which the specific information is displayed. In other words, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. This allows the specific information and the special information to be displayed on a common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means that displays specific information and special information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image types and display modes to be displayed as the specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in a variety of forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6', characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7', the specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that suggests or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination. This makes it possible to display the specific information together with the result of the transition determination. For example, when a variable display image of a pattern suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specific condition is established when the gaming ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9', a specific condition may be met when the specific area is passed through, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition is met. In addition, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are dispensed when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A10 to appendix A12, when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which the gaming ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12', wherein the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter a variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A14']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A15']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R special jackpot game state and a 16R special jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A15' to Appendix A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R special jackpot game state and a 16R special jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine of Appendix A20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A23']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to claim A21' or A22', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R special jackpot game state and a 16R special jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified;
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A23', characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23' or Appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A26', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various gameplay characteristics to be provided with respect to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix A28']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information showing the specific numerical information based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied while hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A30', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the corresponding relationship. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A33' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A29' to Appendix A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36' or Appendix A37', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A36' to Appendix A38', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when the specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is started. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of the specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46' or Appendix A47', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A48', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48' to appendix A50', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A46' to Appendix A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix A51' and appendix A52' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so that when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A55']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57', it is also possible to make a particular display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a particular non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a particular non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player. In this way, the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the disadvantageous advantageous judgment probability and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player are given a low priority, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than that of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix A61']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', further comprising a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A62', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62', wherein the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62' or Appendix A63', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is met during a specified period, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable judgment is low when the probability of a favorable judgment corresponds to a low probability of a favorable judgment. As a result, even if the probability of a favorable judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix A66']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is specified based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65' or Appendix A66', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A68', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
The device further includes a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix A70']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which game balls are shot out;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple task of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70' or Appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A72', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1', a specific condition can be met by passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been met. In addition, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means by the gaming ball passing through the specific area. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2' or Appendix B3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B5']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B6', characterized in that the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter the variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix B8']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B7' further comprises:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices B1' to B8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B9', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix C1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix C3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C3', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C4', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix C7']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C6' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C9' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix D1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The specified period is set to a period during which the special game is being played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix D5']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' or Appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1' to Appendix D8', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various playability to be imparted to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1' to D9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix E1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period; and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specified period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied, hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the specified period.

[Appendix E2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1' to Appendix E3', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E5', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E8' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E5' to Appendix E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4' is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E11' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience of identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E13' and appendix E14', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein a start time of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game in the first game state in which the probability of the transition determination means determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is lower than in the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game of the so-called first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, so that at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of players in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start of the period, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information can be obtained to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or appendix E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix E1' to Appendix E20', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E21', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E22' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix F1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a specified start timing to a specified end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the specified period;
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51);
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to appended note F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to appended note F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This allows the display order of the specific information to be determined for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a value-granting game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10']
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to claim F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or appendix F12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F14' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F16', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F17', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F17', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F18', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F18' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix G1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G4', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix G7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5' to appendix G7', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix G8']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G8', characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being hindered. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being hindered. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix H1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner, during a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information for the specified period in a predetermined display order;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2' or Supplementary Note H3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to claim H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to claim H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it is also possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H8', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is low. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to the appendix H6', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player. In this way, the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability unfavorable to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player is low, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix H10']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H11' or H12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H11' to Appendix H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H14' or H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix H17' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix I1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1' to Appendix I3', characterized in that the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I4', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I5', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix I7' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix J1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied during a prescribed period;
Equipped with
the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from early realizing that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low when the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponds to a low probability of an advantageous judgment. As a result, even if the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J3', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note J4', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appended claim J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J7', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J7' is characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or appendix J8', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix J10']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J12', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J13', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J14', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix J14' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix K1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple act of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to claim K4' or K5', wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices K1'1 to K6', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K7', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K8', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appended note K8' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix L1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
A gaming machine comprising: a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a gaming ball can move;
A predetermined area (G1, G2) through which the game ball moving on the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) can pass and through which the role continuous operating device can be operated based on the game ball passing through;
Further equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) have mutually different times from when the gaming ball is launched until when the gaming ball passes through the specified area.

The gaming machine according to appendix L1' is provided with a first movement path and a second movement path that have different times from when the gaming ball is shot to when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined area (when the continuous operation device for the special device is activated). By providing a first movement path and a second movement path that have different times from when the gaming ball is shot to when the continuous operation device for the special device is activated, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which the game progresses differently depending on whether the gaming ball is shot along the first movement path or the second movement path.

[Appendix L2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1', characterized in that the specified areas (G1, G2) include a first specified area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second specified area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L2', when the condition device is activated, a first predetermined area through which the continuous device operation device is activated by the passage of a gaming ball is provided on the first moving path, and a second predetermined area through which the continuous device operation device is activated by the passage of a gaming ball is provided on the second moving path. In this way, by providing a predetermined area for activating the continuous device operation device on each of the first moving path and the second moving path, the continuous device operation device can be activated by shooting a gaming ball onto either the first moving path or the second moving path.

[Appendix L3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L2' is characterized in that it further comprises a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) for delaying the passage of the gaming ball launched on the second movement path (R2) through the second specified area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L3', a delay means is provided on the second moving path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory. In this way, by providing a delay means on the second moving path to delay the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, a significant time difference can be provided between the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the first moving path and the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the second moving path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory between the case where the game ball is launched on the first moving path and the case where the game ball is launched on the second moving path. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first moving path can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second moving path can be lengthened.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first moving path, the continuous operation device for the special device can be operated in a short time by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the continuous operation device for the special device is activated (the special game starts) by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to select a moving path that allows for a short preparation time when there is a limit to the player's play time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to a delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents the game machine from having a bad impression.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the second moving path, it becomes possible to execute various events by utilizing the preparation time between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the consecutive role device. In this way, by launching the game ball onto the second moving path, which has a longer preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing players to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L3' is characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball launched along the second moving path (R2) will pass through the second specified area (G2) is set to be higher than the probability that a gaming ball launched along the first moving path (R1) will pass through the first specified area (G1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L4', the probability that a gaming ball launched onto the second moving path will pass through the second predetermined area is set higher than the probability that a gaming ball launched onto the first moving path will pass through the first predetermined area. As a result, on the second moving path, where the operation of the continuous device operation device is delayed, the continuous device operation device can be operated by launching fewer gaming balls than on the first moving path. Therefore, on the second moving path, compared to the case where a gaming ball is launched onto the first moving path to operate the continuous device operation device, the time required to operate the continuous device operation device is disadvantageous, but in terms of being able to suppress the generation of wasted balls, it is more advantageous than the case where a gaming ball is launched onto the first moving path to operate the continuous device operation device.

[Appendix L5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L4' is characterized in that it further comprises a winning hole (313) into which the gaming ball launched along the first moving path (R1) can enter and which provides an opportunity for the awarding of a prize ball when the gaming ball enters the winning hole.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L5', a prize opening is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched along the first moving path can enter, which provides an opportunity for a prize ball to be awarded when the gaming ball enters the prize opening. This makes it possible to guarantee that a prize ball will be awarded when a gaming ball launched along the first moving path, which has a low probability of passing through the first predetermined area, passes through the first predetermined area. This prevents a decrease in the base (which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode)), and as a result, prevents a disadvantage caused by a player selecting the first moving path.

[Appendix L6']
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices L1' to L5', characterized in that a player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6', the player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path. In this way, by allowing the player to select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path, the player can select the length of the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until the consecutive device for operating the reel is activated. This allows the player's will to be reflected in the selection of the time until the consecutive device for operating the reel is activated, allowing the player to play without feeling stressed.

[Appendix L7']
A gaming machine as described in Appendix L6', characterized in that a player can select whether the gaming ball will move along the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L7', the player can select whether the gaming ball will be moved along the first or second moving path by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball. In this way, the player can select either the first or second moving path depending on the launch strength of the gaming ball, which makes it possible to easily select the length of the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the role continuous operation device is activated.

[Appendix L8']
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices L1' to L7', further comprising a bonus granting means (51) for granting a bonus when a specific condition is met during a specific time period set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the reel continuous activation device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L8', a bonus is awarded if a specific condition is met during a specific time period that is set during the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the consecutive role device is activated. In this way, a bonus is awarded when a specific condition is met during a specific time period that is set during the preparation time, allowing the player to focus on whether or not a specific condition is met during the preparation time and to enjoy the progress of the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L9']
The gaming machine according to claim L8', wherein the bonus awarding means (51) awards the bonus according to the number of the specific conditions that are met during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L9', a bonus is awarded according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period. In this way, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period, attention can be focused not only on whether or not a specific condition is met, but also on the number of specific conditions that are met, further increasing the interest in the game. In addition, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the bonus can be diversified, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix L10']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
The game machine further includes a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second moving path (R2) for delaying the passage of the game ball launched on the second moving path (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2);
The gaming machine described in Appendix L8' or Appendix L9', characterized in that the specific period is initiated when the condition device is activated and a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L10', when a gaming ball is detected on the second moving path where the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed by the delay means, a specific period is started during which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. In other words, since the specific period is started when the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed by the second moving path, the specific time can be set long. This allows for a variety of types of specific conditions, and prevents the preparation time from being boring after the condition device is activated until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, and the excitement of the game is improved.

[Appendix L11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L10' is characterized in that the bonus granting means (51) grants the bonus when the condition device is activated and a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path before a gaming ball is detected on the first movement path, and when the specific condition is met at the specific time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L11', if a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path before a gaming ball is detected on the first movement path when the condition device is activated, a bonus is awarded if a specific condition is met at a specific time. As a result, after the first movement path is selected to activate the consecutive operation of the reel within a short time of the activation of the condition device, the activation of the consecutive operation of the reel is delayed by the gaming ball detected on the second movement path, preventing the occurrence of dislike or irritation due to the fact that the consecutive operation of the reel takes time against one's will, and making it possible to play comfortably.

[Appendix L12']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L8' to L11', wherein the bonus is the presentation of at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix L13']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for determining that the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed by the determination means (41);
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix L12', characterized in that the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix L14']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L13', wherein the benefit is the presentation of at least a portion of numerical information other than the one of the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix L12' to appendix L14', when a specific condition is met during a specific period, at least a portion of information that can be used to infer ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented as a bonus. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by inferring ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L15']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1' to L14', further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) for delaying the passage of the gaming ball launched on the second movement path (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2) by restricting or delaying the fall of the gaming ball on the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L15', the delay means for delaying the passage of the gaming ball launched on the second moving path through the second predetermined area (delaying the operation of the device for continuously operating the role) limits or delays the falling of the gaming ball launched on the second moving path onto the gaming board. Such a delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be enjoyed easily and reliably.

[Appendix L16']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L15', wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the falling of the gaming ball on the gaming board (31) for a certain period of time by making the gaming ball circulate.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L16', the drop of the gaming ball on the gaming board is restricted or delayed by a delay means for circulating the gaming ball. In other words, the delay means is realized by a means for circulating the gaming ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, such as a Klue device.

[Appendix L17']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L15', wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L17', the drop of the gaming ball on the gaming board is restricted or delayed by the delay means configured as a rotating body. By using the delay means as a rotating body in this way, the delay means can be realized by known means that are easy to manufacture. Furthermore, by using the delay means as a rotating body, it becomes easier to control the delay time in the delay means, and it becomes possible to, for example, make the delay time in the delay means uniform.

[Appendix L18']
The rotating body control means (51) for controlling the rotation of the rotating body (70) is further provided,
The rotating body (70) has a storage section (701) capable of storing game balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L17' is characterized in that, when the condition device is activated, the rotating body control means (51) starts rotation of the rotating body (70) from a position in which the storage section (701) is in a fixed position, and rotates the rotating body (70) at a constant speed or an approximately constant speed at least until the rotating body is rotated to a position in which the gaming ball stored in the storage section (701) is released.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L18', the rotation of the rotating body is started from a position where the storage section is in a fixed position, and the rotating body rotates at a constant or approximately constant speed at least until the rotating body is rotated to a position where the gaming ball stored in the storage section is released. In this way, the starting position of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotation of the rotating body from the start of the rotating body until the gaming ball is released is rotated at a constant or approximately constant speed, so that the time from the start of the rotating body to the release of the gaming ball from the rotating body can be easily made uniform. This makes it possible to easily make the delay time in the delay means uniform, and for example, when an event is generated while the operation of the role continuous operation device is delayed, the event can be executed as desired without being terminated midway.

[Appendix L19']
a bonus awarding means (51) for awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a specific time period that is set during the preparation time;
a condition-establishing opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to establish the specific condition at the specific time when the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R2) when the condition device is activated;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1' to L18', characterized in that, in the second moving path (R2), when the condition device is activated, the preparation time from the launch of the gaming ball to the activation of the consecutive activation device of the game device is delayed compared to the first moving path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L19', when the condition device is activated and the gaming ball is launched onto the second moving path in which the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive role device is delayed, an opportunity to establish a specific condition at a specific time is provided. This makes it possible to utilize the preparation time of the second moving path, which takes longer, to generate various events as a period in which a specific condition is satisfied by the establishment opportunity providing means, and the player can enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by generating events. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L20']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L19', characterized in that the opportunity-to-achieve providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical indicator (e.g., points) that can be correlated to a number, correlated to the number of times the specific condition is achieved.

[Appendix L21']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L20', wherein the opportunity providing means (51) is executed in a display means and provides the numerical indicator through a numerical indicator acquisition presentation that enables the numerical indicator to be acquired.

In the gaming machines according to appendix L20' and appendix L21', the number of times a specific condition is met is provided in correlation with a numerical indicator acquired by an opportunity given as a numerical indicator acquisition effect or the like. By correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical indicator in this way, the content of the opportunity for a specific condition to be met can be diversified, and for example, the opportunity can be implemented as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. This makes it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Appendix L22']
The game machine further includes an operating means (20, 21) operated by a player,
The gaming machine described in appendix L21', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L22', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is an presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operating means. In other words, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a player-participation type presentation such as a player-participation type game presentation. In this way, the progress and results of the numerical indicator acquisition presentation (the numerical indicator acquired) are determined by the player's operation, which increases interest in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation.

[Appendix L23']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L21', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators that can be acquired are predetermined.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L23', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which the obtainable numerical indicators are selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a scenario-managed presentation such as a scenario-managed game presentation. This ensures that even players who do not actively participate in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation such as a game presentation are given a numerical indicator corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to give a bonus according to the numerical indicator even to players who are not interested in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L24']
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices L21' to L23', characterized in that the winning opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation for the numerical indicator when the numerical indicator acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L24', the numerical index is compensated if the numerical index acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed. In this way, by compensating for the numerical index if the specific time ends before the specific time is reached, the disadvantage suffered by the player when the specific time in which a specific condition can be satisfied is shorter than the theoretical time is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix L25']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1' to L24', further comprising a switching means (80) for switching between a first guidance state capable of guiding the gaming ball to the first movement path (R1) and limiting the guidance of the gaming ball to the second movement path (R2) and a second guidance state capable of guiding the gaming ball to the second movement path (R2) and limiting the guidance of the gaming ball to the first movement path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L25', the switching means switches between a first guidance state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the first movement path and the guidance of the gaming ball to the second movement path is restricted, and a second guidance state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the second movement path and the guidance of the gaming ball to the first movement path is restricted. In this way, the switching means switches the movement path along which the gaming ball can move, and the player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path by firing the gaming ball while checking the operation of the switching means. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing strength, which prevents a movement path against the player's will from being selected, and prevents a negative impression of the gaming machine.

[Appendix L26']
The device further includes a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first induction state and the second induction state,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L25', wherein the switching control means (51) initiates switching control of the switching means (80) when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L26', when the condition device is activated, switching control of the switching means is initiated. In this way, when the condition device is activated, switching control of the switching means is initiated, so that when switching control of the switching means is initiated, it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been activated, and it is possible to recognize that the consecutive operation device for the special device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how the game is progressing, for example, whether or not it is a situation in which the player should hit to the right, and prevents game balls from being shot out unnecessarily along the first or second movement path in an attempt to activate the consecutive operation device for the special device when the condition device is not activated, thereby reducing the disadvantage (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)) suffered by the player when the condition device is not activated.

[Appendix L27']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L26', characterized in that the switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the switching means (80) when movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2) is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L27', when the movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is started when the condition device is activated is terminated. In this way, by terminating the switching control of the switching means when the movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, it is possible to recognize that there is no need to shoot the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path when the switching control of the switching means is terminated. This prevents gaming balls from being shot unnecessarily on the first movement path or the second movement path, and reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)).

[Appendix L28']
When the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L26' or Appendix L27', characterized in that the switching control means (51) stops the switching means (80) in the first induction state when not executing switching control of the switching means (80).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L28', when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the switching means is stopped in the first guiding state. Here, in the first guiding state, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the first moving path, and the guidance of the gaming ball to the second moving path in which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed is limited. In this way, by stopping the switching means in the first guiding state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the gaming ball is prevented from being guided to the second moving path that delays the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory after the selection of the first moving path and the second moving path is completed or when the condition device is not in operation. This prevents the gaming ball from staying unnecessarily on the second moving path that delays the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix L29']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1' to L28', further comprising a limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the game device continuous operation device by a gaming ball launched into the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) when the condition device is activated and movement of the gaming ball is detected along one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L29', if the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the continuous device operation device by a game ball launched on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the operation of the continuous device operation device by a game ball launched on the other moving path when the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected, the continuous device operation device is prevented from being activated by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the time when one moving path is selected and the continuous device operation device is activated. This prevents the continuous device operation device from being activated by a game ball on a moving path that is contrary to the player's will after the moving path that activates the continuous device operation device is selected, i.e., the continuous device operation device is prevented from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix L30']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
The gaming machine described in Appendix L29', characterized in that the restriction means (51) restricts the detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the specified area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path when the movement of the gaming ball on one of the movement paths is detected when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L30', if the movement of a gaming ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, if the movement of a gaming ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted, so that the restriction of the operation of the consecutive device operation device by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the activation of the consecutive device operation device can be realized by simple control.

[Appendix L31']
When the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L30' is characterized in that the limiting means (51) limits the operation of the game device continuous operation device by the game ball launched along the first movement path (R1) if the movement of the game ball along the second movement path (R2) is detected before the movement of the game ball along the first movement path (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L31', when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory by the gaming ball launched on the first moving path is restricted. Here, since the second moving path is a moving path in which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed, if a gaming ball is launched on the first moving path while the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that the consecutive operation device of the accessory will be operated by the gaming ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the gaming ball was launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the consecutive operation device of the accessory is more likely to be operated by the gaming ball launched later than when the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the operation of the continuous operation device of the device by the game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that the continuous operation device of the device will be activated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where the continuous operation device of the device will likely be activated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, the continuous operation device of the device will be prevented from being activated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., the continuous operation device of the device will be prevented from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix L32']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L29' to L31', further comprising a restriction release means (51) for releasing the restriction on the operation of the game device continuous operation by the game ball launched into the other moving path when a predetermined condition is met, when the restriction means (51) restricts the operation of the game device continuous operation by the game ball launched into the other moving path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L32', when the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel by the game ball launched to the other moving path is restricted, the restriction on the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel by the game ball launched to the other moving path is lifted when a predetermined condition is met. Therefore, the moving path that activates the continuous operation device of the reel can be changed later when a predetermined condition is met, improving the convenience of selecting the moving path.

[Appendix L33']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L32', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

[Appendix L34']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L33', characterized in that the specified condition is that the movement of a specified number of gaming balls is detected on the other moving path before the role continuous operating device is operated.

In the gaming machines according to appendix L33' and appendix L34', the movement path that operates the consecutive device operation device can be changed later by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as the detection of the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path before the consecutive device operation device is activated (the launch of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path). This allows the player to change the movement path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a movement path or change their mind after selecting a movement path, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement path.

[Appendix L35']
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices L1' to L34', further comprising an allowance means (51) for allowing operation of the game device continuous operation device by a gaming ball launched into the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) when the movement of the gaming ball is detected along one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L35', if the movement of a game ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the consecutive device operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is permitted. In this way, if the movement of a game ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the consecutive device operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is permitted, so that after one moving path is selected, the moving path that activates the consecutive device operation device can be changed by launching a game ball on the other moving path. This allows the player to change the moving path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a moving path or change their mind after selecting a moving path, improving convenience in selecting a moving path.

[Appendix L36']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L35', characterized in that the specified areas (G1, G2) include a first specified area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second specified area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L36', a predetermined area that triggers the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is provided on each of the first and second moving paths. Even if a gaming ball is first launched on one moving path, the predetermined area for activating the consecutive operation device of the reel can be changed by later launching the gaming ball on the other moving path, as long as the gaming ball has not passed through the predetermined area provided on one moving path. For example, if the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated when a gaming ball is launched on one moving path is longer than the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated when a gaming ball is launched on the other moving path, it is possible to shorten the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated by later launching the gaming ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix L37']
The accessory continuous operation device is operated when the game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is operated,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L36', characterized in that the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) include a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and a second predetermined area detection means (Gs2) that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the second predetermined area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L37', the continuous operation device of the reel is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means provided on the first moving path, or the second predetermined area detection means provided on the second moving path. In this way, the continuous operation device of the reel is activated when the gaming ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, so that with a simple configuration and control, even after the gaming ball has been launched on one moving path, the continuous operation device of the reel can be activated by the launch of a gaming ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix L38']
In a waiting period from when the condition device is operated until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated, when the movement of the game ball in one of the moving paths is detected, a limiting means (51) is further provided for limiting the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory by the game ball launched in the other moving path,
The allowing means (51) allows the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by the game ball launched to the other moving path by the limiting means (51) for a certain period of time when the movement of the game ball on the one moving path is detected during the preparation time,
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices L35' to L37', characterized in that the limiting means (51) limits the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel by a gaming ball launched along the other movement path when no movement of the gaming ball along the other movement path is detected within the certain time period after the allowing means (51) begins to limit the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L38', if the movement of a gaming ball on one moving path is detected during the standby period, the operation of the continuous accessory operation device by the gaming ball launched on the other moving path is permitted for a certain period of time, and if the movement of a gaming ball on the other moving path is not detected before the certain period of time has elapsed, the operation of the continuous accessory operation device by the gaming ball launched on the other moving path is restricted. That is, the moving path on which the continuous accessory operation device is operated can be changed for a certain period of time, and the change of the moving path is restricted after the certain period of time has elapsed. As a result, while it is possible to change the moving path if the player wishes to change the moving path by selecting a moving path against the player's will before the certain period of time has elapsed, after the certain period of time has elapsed, the moving path that activates the continuous accessory operation device is prevented from being changed against the player's will, making it possible to more appropriately reflect the player's will.

[Appendix L39']
A bonus granting means (51) for granting a bonus when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time period set between the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
a fulfillment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to fulfill the specific condition at the specific time;
A specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices L1' to L38', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix L39', the specific period is forcibly ended when a predetermined condition is met. In other words, it is possible to shorten the specific period by ending the specific period even before it has elapsed. This makes it possible, for example, to operate the continuous reel operation device before the specific period has elapsed, and since the continuous reel operation device can be operated at various times, the entertainment value of the game is increased.

[Appendix L40']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L39', wherein the specified condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L40', the player can satisfy a predetermined condition during a specific period. In this way, since the player can satisfy a predetermined condition during a specific period, the player can end the specific period at his/her will. This allows the player to decide the timing for operating the continuous role-operating device even after the start of the specific period, which increases the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix L41']
the establishment opportunity providing means (51) starts the specific period when movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected during the waiting period,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L40', characterized in that the specified condition is that a gaming ball is detected on a moving path different from one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) between the start of the specific period and the end of the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L41', the specific period set in the waiting period is initiated by the detection of the movement of a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, and the specific period is forcibly terminated if a gaming ball is detected on the other movement path before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, the specific period set in the waiting period is initiated by the detection of the movement of a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, and the specific period is forcibly terminated if a gaming ball is detected on the other movement path before the specific period has elapsed, so that after the specific period has been initiated by the launch of a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, the specific period can be easily terminated by simply launching a gaming ball on the other movement path.

[Appendix L42']
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
The game machine further includes a special game generating means (41) for generating a special game based on a game ball entering the predetermined area (G1, G2) in a predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1' to L41', characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the specified area (G1, G2), the special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a specified judgment process, and limits the generation of the special game based on the gaming ball entering the specified area (G1, G2) when a specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L42', when a predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second predetermined area is restricted. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second predetermined area is restricted, so that a special game is generated by a gaming ball entering a desired predetermined area out of the first or second predetermined area, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a gaming ball entering an undesired predetermined area.

[Appendix L43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L42', characterized in that the predetermined condition includes the judgment result by the judgment means (41) being a judgment result of executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L43', the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the predetermined area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other predetermined area that is different from one of the first and second predetermined areas. Therefore, a special game is generated by a game ball entering the other predetermined area that is the intended one of the first and second predetermined areas, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a game ball entering one of the intended predetermined areas.

[Appendix L44']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L43', characterized in that the specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L44', the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that a special game is prevented from being generated by a game ball entering the other predetermined area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix L45']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L44', characterized in that the specified condition includes, after a notification game in which the determination result by the determination means (41) is notified that the determination result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L45', when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game due to the game ball passing through a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game due to the game ball passing through a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted, thereby preventing the occurrence of a special game by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the occurrence of a special game. This prevents the occurrence of a special game by a game ball on a moving path against the player's will after the moving path that generates the special game is selected, that is, the occurrence of a special game at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix L46']
The one movement path is the second movement path (R2),
The gaming machine described in Appendix L45', wherein the other movement path is the first movement path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L46', when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by the gaming ball launched on the first moving path is restricted. Here, since the second moving path is a moving path in which the fall of the gaming ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of a special game is delayed, if a gaming ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of a special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that a special game will be generated by a gaming ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the gaming ball has been launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the gaming ball launched later than when the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being generated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix L47']
The special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2), restricts the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2) when a first predetermined condition is established, and releases the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is established.A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L42' to L46'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L47', when the second predetermined condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first or second predetermined area is lifted. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first or second predetermined area is lifted, making it possible to change to the occurrence of a special game based on one predetermined area after the occurrence of a special game based on one predetermined area is selected.

[Appendix L48']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L47', wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L48', the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, because the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, the player can change the predetermined area in which the special game occurs at his/her own will. This allows the player to change the movement route at his/her own will if he/she makes a mistake in selecting a movement route or changes his/her mind after selecting a movement route, thereby improving convenience with regard to the selection of a movement route.

[Appendix L49']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L47' or Appendix L48', characterized in that the first predetermined condition includes the judgment result by the judgment means (41) being a judgment result of executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L49', the first predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the predetermined area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other predetermined area that is different from one of the first and second predetermined areas. Therefore, a special game is generated by a game ball entering the other predetermined area that is the target of the first and second predetermined areas, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a game ball entering one of the predetermined areas that is not the target.

[Appendix L50']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L49', characterized in that the first specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L50', the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, thereby preventing a special game from being generated by a game ball entering the other predetermined area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix L51']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L50', characterized in that the first predetermined condition includes, after a notification game for notifying the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L51', when the first predetermined condition is a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means and the judgment result is in a state in which a special game can be generated, when the movement of the gaming ball on one moving path is detected, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path in a state in which a special game can be generated, it is possible to realize, by simple control, the restriction of the generation of a special game by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the generation of a special game.

[Appendix L52']
The gaming machine described in Appendix L51', characterized in that the second predetermined condition is that the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path between the end of the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means (41) is that the special game is to be executed, and the time when the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L52', the movement path that operates the consecutive device operation device can be changed later by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as the detection of the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path before the consecutive device operation device is activated (the launch of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path). This allows the player to change the movement path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a movement path or change their mind after selecting a movement path, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement path.

[Appendix L53']
The one predetermined region is the first predetermined region (G1),
The gaming machine described in Appendix L52', wherein the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L53', one of the predetermined areas is the first predetermined area, and the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area. Here, the second moving path on which the second predetermined area is provided is a moving path on which the flow of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed, so that if a game ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of the special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that the special game will be generated by the game ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the game ball was launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the game ball launched later than when the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

In addition, by having one of the specified areas be a first specified area and the other specified area be a second specified area, if it is desired to instantly generate a special game while the flow of the game balls is delayed on the second moving path where the generation of the special game is delayed, it is possible to instantly generate the special game by shooting the game balls onto the first moving path.

[Appendix M1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
A gaming machine comprising: a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a gaming ball can move;
A predetermined area through which the game ball moving on the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) can pass and through which the accessory continuous operating device can be operated based on the game ball passing through;
Further equipped with
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) have different times from when the game ball is launched until when the game ball passes through the predetermined area,
A bonus granting means (51) for granting a bonus when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time period set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the reel continuous operation device is activated;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M1', a bonus is awarded if a specific condition is met during a specific time period that is set as the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the reel continuous operation device is activated. In this way, a bonus is awarded if a specific condition is met during a specific time period that is set as the preparation time, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is met during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix M2']
The gaming machine according to appended claim M1', wherein the bonus awarding means (51) awards the bonus according to the number of the specific conditions that are met during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appended note M2', a bonus is awarded according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period. In this way, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period, attention can be focused not only on whether or not a specific condition is met, but also on the number of specific conditions that are met, further increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the bonus can be diversified, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix M3']
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
The game machine further includes a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second moving path (R2) for delaying the passage of the game ball launched on the second moving path (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2);
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1' or Appendix M2', wherein the specific period is initiated when the condition device is activated and a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3', when a gaming ball is detected on the second moving path where the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed by the delay means, a specific period is started during which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. In other words, since the specific period is started when the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is delayed by the second moving path, the specific time can be set long. This allows for a variety of types of specific conditions, and prevents the preparation time from being boring after the condition device is activated until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, and the excitement of the game is improved.

[Appendix M4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix M3' is characterized in that the bonus granting means (51) grants the bonus when the condition device is activated and a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path before a gaming ball is detected on the first movement path, and when the specific condition is met at the specific time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4', if a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path before a gaming ball is detected on the first movement path when the condition device is activated, a bonus is awarded if a specific condition is met at a specific time. As a result, after the first movement path is selected to activate the consecutive operation of the reel within a short time of the activation of the condition device, the activation of the consecutive operation of the reel is delayed by the gaming ball detected on the second movement path, preventing the occurrence of dislike or irritation due to the fact that the consecutive operation of the reel takes time against one's will, and making it possible to play comfortably.

[Appendix M5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M4', wherein the bonus is the presentation of at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix M6']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for which the judgment means (41) judges that the special game (jackpot game) will be executed;
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix M5', wherein the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix M7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix M6', wherein the bonus is the presentation of at least a portion of numerical information other than the one of the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix M5' to appendix M7', when a specific condition is met during a specific period, at least a portion of information that can be used to infer ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented as a bonus. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by inferring ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix N1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move;
A first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first moving path (R1);
A second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2);
a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second moving path (R2) for delaying the passage of the game ball launched on the second moving path (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2);
Equipped with
The accessory continuous operation device is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2) when the condition device is operated,
The delay means (60, 70) restricts or delays the fall of the game ball launched along the second movement path (R2) on the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N1', a delay means is provided on the second moving path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory. In this way, by providing a delay means on the second moving path to delay the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, a significant time difference can be provided between the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the first moving path and the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the second moving path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory between the case where the game ball is launched on the first moving path and the case where the game ball is launched on the second moving path. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first moving path can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second moving path can be lengthened.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first moving path, the continuous operation device for the special device can be operated in a short time by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the continuous operation device for the special device is activated (the special game starts) by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to select a moving path that allows for a short preparation time when there is a limit to the player's playing time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to a delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents the game machine from having a bad impression.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the second moving path, it becomes possible to execute various events by utilizing the preparation time between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the consecutive role device. In this way, by launching the game ball onto the second moving path, which has a longer preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing players to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by generating events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix N1', the delay means for delaying the passage of the gaming ball launched on the second moving path through the second predetermined area (delaying the operation of the device for continuously operating the role) limits or delays the falling of the gaming ball launched on the second moving path onto the gaming board. Such a delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be enjoyed easily and reliably.

[Appendix N2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1', wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the falling of the gaming ball on the gaming board (31) for a certain period of time by making the gaming ball circulate.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N2', the drop of the gaming ball on the gaming board is restricted or delayed by a delay means for circulating the gaming ball. In other words, the delay means is realized by a means for circulating the gaming ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, such as a Klue device.

[Appendix N3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1', wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N3', the drop of the gaming ball on the gaming board is restricted or delayed by the delay means configured as a rotating body. By using the delay means as a rotating body in this way, the delay means can be realized by known means that are easy to manufacture. Furthermore, by using the delay means as a rotating body, it becomes easier to control the delay time in the delay means, and it becomes possible to, for example, make the delay time in the delay means uniform.

[Appendix N4']
The rotating body control means (51) for controlling the rotation of the rotating body (70) is further provided,
The rotating body (70) has a storage section (701) capable of storing game balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix N3' is characterized in that, when the condition device is activated, the rotating body control means (51) starts rotation of the rotating body (70) from a position in which the storage section (701) is in a fixed position, and rotates the rotating body (70) at a constant speed or an approximately constant speed at least until the rotating body is rotated to a position in which the gaming ball stored in the storage section (701) is released.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N4', the rotation of the rotating body is started from a position where the storage section is in a fixed position, and the rotating body rotates at a constant or approximately constant speed at least until the rotating body is rotated to a position where the gaming ball stored in the storage section is released. In this way, the starting position of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotation of the rotating body from the start of the rotating body until the gaming ball is released is rotated at a constant or approximately constant speed, so that the time from the start of the rotating body to the release of the gaming ball from the rotating body can be easily made uniform. This makes it possible to easily make the delay time of the delay means uniform, and for example, when an event is generated while the operation of the role continuous operation device is delayed, the event can be executed as desired without being terminated midway.

[Appendix O1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move;
A second moving path (R2) along which the game ball is movable and in which the preparation time from the launch of the game ball to the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory when the condition device is operated is delayed compared to the first moving path (R1);
a bonus awarding means (51) for awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a specific time period that is set during the preparation time;
a condition-establishing opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to establish the specific condition at the specific time when the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R2) when the condition device is activated;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O1', when the condition device is activated and the gaming ball is launched onto the second moving path in which the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive role device is delayed, an opportunity to establish a specific condition at a specific time is provided. This makes it possible to utilize the preparation time of the second moving path, which takes longer, to generate various events as a period in which a specific condition is satisfied by the establishment opportunity providing means, and the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest to the player, can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix O2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix O1', characterized in that the opportunity-to-achieve providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical indicator (e.g., points) that can be correlated to a number, in correlation with the number of times the specific condition is achieved.

[Appendix O3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix O2', wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed in a display means and provides the numerical indicator through a numerical indicator acquisition presentation that enables the numerical indicator to be acquired.

In the gaming machines according to appendix O2' and appendix O3', the number of times a specific condition is met is provided in correlation with a numerical indicator acquired by an opportunity given as a numerical indicator acquisition effect or the like. By correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical indicator in this way, the content of the opportunity for a specific condition to be met can be diversified, and for example, the opportunity can be implemented as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. This makes it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Appendix O4']
The game machine further includes an operating means (20, 21) operated by a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix O3', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O4', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is an presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operating means. In other words, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a player-participation type presentation such as a player-participation type game presentation. In this way, the progress and results of the numerical indicator acquisition presentation (the numerical indicator acquired) are determined by the player's operation, which increases interest in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation.

[Appendix O5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix O3', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators that can be acquired are predetermined.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O5', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which the obtainable numerical indicators are selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a scenario-managed presentation such as a scenario-managed game presentation. This ensures that even players who do not actively participate in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation such as a game presentation are given a numerical indicator corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to give a bonus according to the numerical indicator even to players who are not interested in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix O6']
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices O3' to O5', wherein the game-winning opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation for the numerical indicator when the numerical indicator acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O6', the numerical indicator is compensated if the numerical indicator acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed. In this way, by compensating for the numerical indicator if the specific time ends before the specific time is reached, the disadvantage suffered by the player when the specific time in which a specific condition can be satisfied is shorter than the theoretical time is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix O7']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1' to O6', further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) for delaying the passage of a gaming ball launched on the second movement path (R2) through the second specified area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O7', a delay means is provided on the second moving path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory. In this way, by providing a delay means on the second moving path to delay the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, a significant time difference can be provided between the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the first moving path and the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the second moving path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory between the case where the game ball is launched on the first moving path and the case where the game ball is launched on the second moving path. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first moving path can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second moving path can be lengthened.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first moving path, the continuous operation device for the special device can be operated in a short time by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the continuous operation device for the special device is activated (the special game starts) by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to select a moving path that allows for a short preparation time when there is a limit to the player's playing time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to a delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents the game machine from having a bad impression.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the second moving path, it becomes possible to execute various events by utilizing the preparation time between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the consecutive role device. In this way, by launching the game ball onto the second moving path, which has a longer preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing players to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by generating events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix P1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a game ball can move, the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) having mutually different times from when the game ball is launched until when the role continuous operating device is operated when the condition device is operated;
a switching means (80) for switching between a first guidance state capable of guiding the game ball to the first moving path (R1) and limiting the guidance of the game ball to the second moving path (R2) and a second guidance state capable of guiding the game ball to the second moving path (R2) and limiting the guidance of the game ball to the first moving path (R1);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P1', the switching means switches between a first guidance state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the first movement path and the guidance of the gaming ball to the second movement path is restricted, and a second guidance state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the second movement path and the guidance of the gaming ball to the first movement path is restricted. In this way, the switching means switches the movement path along which the gaming ball can move, and the player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path by firing the gaming ball while checking the operation of the switching means. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing strength, which prevents a movement path against the player's will from being selected, and prevents a negative impression of the gaming machine.

[Appendix P2']
The device further includes a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first induction state and the second induction state,
The gaming machine according to appendix P1', wherein the switching control means (51) initiates switching control of the switching means (80) when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P2', when the condition device is activated, switching control of the switching means is initiated. In this way, by starting switching control of the switching means when the condition device is activated, it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been activated when switching control of the switching means is initiated, and it is possible to recognize that the consecutive operation device of the special device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how the game is progressing, for example, whether or not it is a situation in which the player should hit to the right, and prevents game balls from being shot out unnecessarily to the first or second movement path in an attempt to activate the consecutive operation device of the special device when the condition device is not activated, thereby reducing the disadvantage (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)) suffered by the player when the condition device is not activated.

[Appendix P3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix P2', characterized in that the switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the switching means (80) when movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2) is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P3', when the movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is initiated when the condition device is activated is terminated. In this way, by terminating the switching control of the switching means when the movement of the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, it is possible to recognize that there is no need to shoot the gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path when the switching control of the switching means is terminated. This prevents gaming balls from being shot unnecessarily on the first movement path or the second movement path, and reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)).

[Appendix P4']
When the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix P2' or Appendix P3', characterized in that the switching control means (51) stops the switching means (80) in the first induction state when not executing switching control of the switching means (80).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P4', when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the switching means is stopped in the first guiding state. Here, in the first guiding state, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the first moving path, and the guidance of the gaming ball to the second moving path in which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed is limited. In this way, by stopping the switching means in the first guiding state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the gaming ball is prevented from being guided to the second moving path that delays the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory after the selection of the first moving path and the second moving path is completed or when the condition device is not in operation. This prevents the gaming ball from staying unnecessarily on the second moving path that delays the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix Q1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a game ball can move, the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) having mutually different times from when the game ball is launched until when the role continuous operating device is operated when the condition device is operated;
a limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the device for continuously operating the game device by the game ball launched to the other path different from the one of the first path (R1) and the second path (R2) when the condition device is activated and the movement of the game ball is detected to be on one of the first path (R1) and the second path (R2);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Q1', if the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the continuous operation device of the special feature by the game ball launched on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the operation of the continuous operation device of the special feature by the game ball launched on the other moving path when the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected, the continuous operation device of the special feature is prevented from being activated by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the time when one moving path is selected and the continuous operation device of the special feature is activated. This prevents the continuous operation device of the special feature from being activated by a game ball on a moving path against the player's will after the moving path that activates the continuous operation device is selected, i.e., the continuous operation device of the special feature is prevented from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix Q2']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2),
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1', characterized in that when the condition device is activated and movement of the gaming ball is detected on one of the movement paths, the restriction means (51) restricts detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the specified area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Q2', if the movement of a gaming ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, if the movement of a gaming ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving path is restricted, so that the restriction of the operation of the continuous device operation device by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the activation of the continuous device operation device can be realized by simple control.

[Appendix Q3']
When the game ball is launched along the second moving path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q2' is characterized in that the limiting means (51) limits the operation of the game ball's continuous operation device by the game ball launched along the first movement path (R1) if the movement of the game ball along the second movement path (R2) is detected before the movement of the game ball along the first movement path (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q3', when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory by the gaming ball launched on the first moving path is restricted. Here, since the second moving path is a moving path in which the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed, if a gaming ball is launched on the first moving path while the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that the consecutive operation device of the accessory will be activated by the gaming ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the gaming ball was launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the consecutive operation device of the accessory is more likely to be activated by the gaming ball launched later than when the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the operation of the continuous operation device of the device by the game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that the continuous operation device of the device will be activated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where the continuous operation device of the device will likely be activated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, the continuous operation device of the device will be prevented from being activated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., the continuous operation device of the device will be prevented from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix Q4']
A gaming machine as described in any one of Appendices Q1' to Q3', further comprising a restriction release means (51) for releasing the restriction on the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel by the gaming ball launched into the other moving path when a predetermined condition is met, when the restriction means (51) restricts the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel by the gaming ball launched into the other moving path.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Q4', when the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel by the game ball launched to the other moving path is restricted, the restriction on the operation of the continuous operation device of the reel by the game ball launched to the other moving path is lifted when a specified condition is met. Therefore, it becomes possible to later change the moving path that activates the continuous operation device of the reel when a specified condition is met, improving the convenience of selecting the moving path.

[Appendix Q5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q4', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

[Appendix Q6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q5', wherein the predetermined condition is that the movement of a predetermined number of gaming balls is detected on the other moving path before the role continuous operating device is operated.

In the gaming machines according to appendix Q5' and appendix Q6', the movement path that operates the consecutive device operation device can be changed later by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as the detection of the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path before the consecutive device operation device is activated (the launch of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path). This allows the player to change the movement path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a movement path or change their mind after selecting a movement path, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement path.

[Appendix R1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a game ball can move, the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) having mutually different times from when the game ball is launched until when the role continuous operating device is operated when the condition device is operated;
an allowance means (51) for allowing the operation of the role continuous operation device by a game ball launched to the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) when the movement of the game ball is detected on one of the moving paths of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) when the condition device is operated;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R1', if the movement of a game ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the consecutive device operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is permitted. In this way, if the movement of a game ball on one of the moving paths is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the consecutive device operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is permitted, so that after one moving path is selected, the moving path that activates the consecutive device operation device can be changed by launching a game ball on the other moving path. This allows the player to change the moving path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a moving path or change their mind after selecting a moving path, improving convenience in selecting a moving path.

[Appendix R2']
The consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated in response to the passing of the game ball through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1', characterized in that the specified areas (G1, G2) include a first specified area (G1) provided on the first movement path (R1) and a second specified area (G2) provided on the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R2', a predetermined area that triggers the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel is provided on each of the first and second moving paths. Even if a gaming ball is first launched on one moving path, the predetermined area for activating the consecutive operation device of the reel can be changed by later launching the gaming ball on the other moving path, as long as the gaming ball has not passed through the predetermined area provided on one moving path. For example, if the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated when a gaming ball is launched on one moving path is longer than the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated when a gaming ball is launched on the other moving path, it is possible to shorten the time until the consecutive operation device of the reel is activated by later launching the gaming ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix R3']
The accessory continuous operation device is operated when the game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is operated,
The gaming machine described in Appendix R2', characterized in that the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) include a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and a second predetermined area detection means (Gs2) that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the second predetermined area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R3', the continuous operation device of the reel is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means provided on the first moving path, or the second predetermined area detection means provided on the second moving path. In this way, the continuous operation device of the reel is activated when the gaming ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, so that with a simple configuration and control, even after the gaming ball has been launched on one moving path, the continuous operation device of the reel can be activated by the launch of a gaming ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix R4']
In a waiting period from when the condition device is operated until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is operated, when the movement of the game ball in one of the moving paths is detected, a limiting means (51) is further provided for limiting the operation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory by the game ball launched in the other moving path,
The allowing means (51) allows the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by the game ball launched to the other moving path by the limiting means (51) for a certain period of time when the movement of the game ball on the one moving path is detected during the preparation time,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix R1' to Appendix R3', characterized in that the limiting means (51) limits the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel by a gaming ball launched along the other movement path when no movement of the gaming ball along the other movement path is detected within the certain time period after the allowing means (51) begins to limit the operation of the consecutive operation device of the reel.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R4', if the movement of a game ball on one moving path is detected during the standby period, the operation of the continuous accessory operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is permitted for a certain period of time, and if the movement of a game ball on the other moving path is not detected before the certain period of time has elapsed, the operation of the continuous accessory operation device by the game ball launched on the other moving path is restricted. That is, the moving path on which the continuous accessory operation device is activated can be changed for a certain period of time, and the change of the moving path is restricted after the certain period of time has elapsed. As a result, while it is possible to change the moving path if the player wishes to change it by selecting a moving path against the player's will before the certain period of time has elapsed, after the certain period of time has elapsed, the moving path that activates the continuous accessory operation device is prevented from being changed against the player's will, making it possible to more appropriately reflect the player's will.

[Appendix R5']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1' to R4', further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) for delaying the passage of a gaming ball launched on the second movement path (R2) through the second specified area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R5', a delay means is provided on the second moving path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory. In this way, by providing a delay means on the second moving path to delay the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, a significant time difference can be provided between the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the first moving path and the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the second moving path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory between the case where the game ball is launched on the first moving path and the case where the game ball is launched on the second moving path. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first moving path can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second moving path can be lengthened.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first moving path, the continuous operation device for the special device can be operated in a short time by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the continuous operation device for the special device is activated (the special game starts) by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to select a moving path that allows for a short preparation time when there is a limit to the player's playing time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to a delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents the game machine from having a bad impression.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the second moving path, it becomes possible to execute various events by utilizing the preparation time between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the consecutive role device. In this way, by launching the game ball onto the second moving path, which has a longer preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing players to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by generating events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix S1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player who has operated the consecutive game device based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A condition device which is operated on the condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation of the condition device is a necessary condition for the operation of the reel continuous operation device;
a first moving path (R1) and a second moving path (R2) along which a game ball can move, the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) having mutually different times from when the game ball is launched until when the role continuous operating device is operated when the condition device is operated;
A bonus granting means (51) for granting a bonus when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time period set between the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
a fulfillment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to fulfill the specific condition at the specific time;
A specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S1', the specific period is forcibly ended when a predetermined condition is met. In other words, it is possible to shorten the specific period by ending the specific period even before it has elapsed. This makes it possible, for example, to operate the continuous reel operation device before the specific period has elapsed, and since the continuous reel operation device can be operated at various times, the entertainment value of the game is increased.

[Appendix S2']
The gaming machine according to appended claim S1', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by a player during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix S2', the player can satisfy a predetermined condition during a specific period. In this way, since the player can satisfy a predetermined condition during a specific period, the player can end the specific period at his/her will. This allows the player to decide the timing to operate the continuous role-operating device even after the start of the specific period, which increases the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix S3']
the establishment opportunity providing means (51) starts the specific period when movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected during the waiting period,
The gaming machine described in Appendix S2', characterized in that the specified condition is that a gaming ball is detected on a moving path different from one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) between the start of the specific period and the end of the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S3', the specific period set in the waiting period is started by detecting the movement of a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, and the specific period is forcibly terminated if a gaming ball is detected on the other movement path before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, the specific period set in the waiting period is started by detecting the movement of a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, and the specific period is forcibly terminated if a gaming ball is detected on the other movement path before the specific period has elapsed, so that after the specific period has been started by launching a gaming ball on one of the movement paths, the specific period can be easily terminated by simply launching a gaming ball on the other movement path.

[Appendix S4']
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices S1' to S3' further comprises a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second moving path (R2) for delaying the activation of the game device continuous operation device by a game ball launched on the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note S4', a delay means is provided on the second moving path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory. In this way, by providing a delay means on the second moving path to delay the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated, a significant time difference can be provided between the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the first moving path and the time until the consecutive operation device of the accessory is activated by the game ball launched on the second moving path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the consecutive operation device of the accessory between the case where the game ball is launched on the first moving path and the case where the game ball is launched on the second moving path. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first moving path can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second moving path can be lengthened.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first moving path, the continuous operation device for the special device can be operated in a short time by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path. This makes it possible to avoid wasting time until the continuous operation device for the special device is activated (the special game starts) by the launch of the game ball onto the first moving path, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to select a moving path that allows for a short preparation time when there is a limit to the player's play time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to a delayed start of the opening and closing execution mode. This prevents the game machine from having a bad impression.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the second moving path, it becomes possible to execute various events by utilizing the preparation time between the activation of the condition device and the activation of the consecutive role device. In this way, by launching the game ball onto the second moving path, which has a longer preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, allowing players to enjoy the preparation time, which tends to be boring and of low interest, by generating events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix S5']
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes S1' to S4', wherein the bonus awarding means (51) awards a bonus according to the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied during the specific time period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S5', a bonus is awarded according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period. In this way, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period, attention can be focused not only on whether specific conditions are met, but also on the number of specific conditions that are met, further increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, by awarding a bonus according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the bonus can be diversified, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix S6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix S5', wherein the opportunity-to-achieve providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical indicator (e.g., points) that can be correlated to a number, in correlation with the number of times the specific condition is achieved.

[Appendix S7']
The gaming machine described in appendix S6', wherein the winning opportunity providing means (51) is executed in a display means and provides the numerical indicator through a numerical indicator acquisition presentation that enables the numerical indicator to be acquired.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note S6' and Supplementary Note S7', the number of times a specific condition is met is provided in correlation with a numerical indicator acquired by an opportunity given as a numerical indicator acquisition effect or the like. By correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical indicator in this way, the content of the opportunity for a specific condition to be met can be diversified, and for example, the opportunity can be implemented as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. This makes it possible to further increase the interest of the game.

[Appendix S8']
The game machine further includes an operating means (20, 21) operated by a player,
The gaming machine described in appended claim S7', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S8', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is an presentation in which different results are obtained depending on the operation of the player on the operating means. In other words, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a player-participation type presentation such as a player-participation type game presentation. In this way, the progress and results of the numerical indicator acquisition presentation (the numerical indicator acquired) are determined by the player's operation, which increases interest in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation.

[Appendix S9']
The gaming machine described in appended note S7', wherein the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators that can be acquired are determined in advance.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S9', the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is a presentation in which the obtainable numerical indicators are selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical indicator acquisition presentation is executed as a scenario-managed presentation such as a scenario-managed game presentation. This ensures that even players who do not actively participate in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation such as a game presentation are given a numerical indicator corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to give a bonus according to the numerical indicator even to players who are not interested in the numerical indicator acquisition presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix S10']
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix S7' to Appendix S9', characterized in that the game-winning opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation for the numerical indicator when the numerical indicator acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S10', the numerical index is compensated if the numerical index acquisition presentation ends before the specific time has elapsed. In this way, by compensating for the numerical index if the specific time ends before the specific time is reached, the disadvantage suffered by the player when the specific time in which a specific condition can be satisfied is shorter than the theoretical time is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix T1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the gaming ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

[Appendix T2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1' is characterized in that the specified gaming state is a state in which notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game has been completed by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T2', the predetermined gaming state is a state in which the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game has ended through the notification game. That is, when the condition device required for executing a special game in which the role-continuous operating device is operated is operated, if a game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, a special game is generated by the special game generating means. Therefore, when the condition device is operated, a special game can be executed by shooting a game ball into either the first movement path or the second movement path, and the occurrence of unnecessary special games can be restricted.

[Appendix T3']
The gaming machine described in appendix T2', wherein the predetermined gaming state is a state before the execution of the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T3', the predetermined gaming state is the state before the execution of the special game is started. In other words, the predetermined gaming state is the state before the continuous operation device of the role is operated before the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area in a state in which the condition device is operated. This prevents a new special game from occurring after the occurrence of a special game.

[Appendix T4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1' to T3', wherein the predetermined determination process is a process of determining whether or not the special game can be generated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T4', the predetermined judgment process when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area is a judgment process as to whether or not a special game can be generated. This allows a special game to be generated when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area and the state is such that a special game can be generated, and prevents unnecessary generation of a special game when the state is not such that a special game can be generated.

[Appendix T5']
The game device further includes a limiting means (51) for limiting the generation of the special game by the special game generating means (41) based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), which is provided on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2), when the movement of a game ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected in a state in which the special game can be generated by the special game generating means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix T4', characterized in that the specified judgment process is a judgment process of whether or not the occurrence of the special game by the special game generation means (41) based on the game balls entering the first ball entry area (12) and the second ball entry area (G2) is restricted by the restriction means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T5', the predetermined judgment process when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area is a judgment process of whether or not the generation of a special game by the special game generation means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first and second entry areas in a state in which a special game can be generated is restricted. That is, when the movement of a gaming ball on one moving path is detected in a state in which a special game can be generated, the generation of a special game by a gaming ball launched on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the generation of a special game by a gaming ball launched on the other moving path when the movement of a gaming ball on one moving path is detected in a state in which a special game can be generated, the generation of a special game by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path is prevented from occurring between the selection of one moving path and the generation of a special game by the passage of a gaming ball into the entry area provided on one moving path. This prevents a special game from being generated by a game ball moving along a path contrary to the player's will after the path that will cause the special game to occur has been selected, i.e., prevents the special game from being generated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix T6']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1' to T5', further comprising a movement limiting means (48, 481) for limiting the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T6', the movement restriction means restricts the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first and second movement paths. In this way, the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first and second movement paths is restricted, thereby preventing the gaming ball launched onto the first movement path from changing its movement path to the second movement path midway along the first movement path, and conversely, preventing the gaming ball launched onto the second movement path from changing its movement path to the first movement path midway along the second movement path. This makes it possible to generate a special game by the passage of the gaming ball into the ball entry area provided on the movement path along which the gaming ball is first launched, and thus allows the intended gameplay to be appropriately imparted.

[Appendix T7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T6', wherein the movement restricting means (48, 481) defines the space between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2).

[Appendix T8']
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) define a movement path of a game ball launched into a right area of a game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix T6' or Appendix T7', characterized in that the movement limiting means (48, 481) limits the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) of the gaming ball launched into the right area of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes T7' and T8', the movement restriction means defines the gap between the first movement path and the second movement path. In this way, since the movement restriction means defines the gap between the first movement path and the second movement path, the configuration that defines the first movement path and the second movement path itself can restrict the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first movement path and the second movement path.

[Appendix T9']
A display means (341) for executing a predetermined performance;
a presentation end means (51) for ending the predetermined presentation when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined presentation is executed on the display means (341);
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1' to T8', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix T9', when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. In this way, when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. For example, a gaming ball launched on the first moving path can immediately pass through the first entry area, so that the predetermined performance can immediately end, whereas a gaming ball launched on the second moving path cannot immediately end the predetermined performance because its passage through the second entry area is delayed. Therefore, the player can select the first or second moving path depending on whether or not he/she wants to check the predetermined performance, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix T10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T9' is characterized in that the specified presentation is executed based on the completion of a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the special game is to be executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T10', the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that a special game will be played. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that a special game will be played, so that the effect in the special game can be executed appropriately without interfering with the effect executed in the notification game.

[Appendix T11']
The gaming machine according to appended claim T10', wherein the effect ending means (51) ends the predetermined effect based on the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T11', the predetermined effect is ended when a special game is executed. In this way, by ending the predetermined effect when a special game is executed, the effect in the special game can be executed appropriately without the predetermined effect interfering with the effect executed in the special game.

[Appendix T12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T10' or Appendix T11', characterized in that the specified presentation includes a presentation that is started when a gaming ball is detected on the second moving path (R2) when the notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game is completed by a notification game that notifies the player of the judgment result.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T12', the predetermined performance includes a performance that is started when a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path after the notification that a special game will be played has ended. In this way, by including a performance that is started when a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path after the notification that a special game will be played has ended, the predetermined performance is executed while the flow of the gaming ball on the second movement path is delayed. This allows the execution time of the predetermined performance to be set long, making it possible to execute a variety of predetermined performances and increase the player's interest in the predetermined performance, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix T13']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T9' to T12', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix T14']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for which the judgment means (41) judges that the special game (jackpot game) will be executed;
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix T13', wherein the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix T15']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T14', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix T13' to appendix T15', a predetermined presentation is executed in which at least a portion of information that can be used to infer ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by inferring ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix T16']
a presentation end means (51) for ending the predetermined presentation when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined presentation is being executed on the display means (341);
a performance re-execution means (51) for re-executing the predetermined performance based on the establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined performance is ended by the performance ending means (51);
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T9' to T15', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix T16', the predetermined performance is replayed, providing many opportunities to see the predetermined performance. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix T17']
The gaming machine according to appendix T16', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance is ended by the performance ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T17', the specified condition is that the predetermined performance ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives. In other words, if the predetermined performance ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance is re-executed. In this way, by re-executing the predetermined performance if it ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives, even if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway, it is possible to execute the predetermined performance to the end as compensation. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix T18']
The predetermined performance is executed during a specific period set from the end of a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the special game is to be executed to the time when the game ball passes through the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2);
The gaming machine according to appendix T16' or appendix T17', wherein the effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when the special game occurs when the predetermined condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note T18', the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period set from the end of the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game by the notification game to the time when the game ball passes through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, and the predetermined performance is re-executed when the special game occurs. In this way, the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period and the predetermined performance is re-executed when the special game occurs, so that the predetermined performance can be executed in the special game. In other words, when the predetermined performance is interrupted midway due to the game ball passing through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined performance in the special game that is generated by the game ball passing through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. As a result, when the predetermined performance is terminated, it becomes possible to immediately re-execute the predetermined performance after the end of the predetermined performance, so that the time during which the predetermined performance is interrupted can be shortened, and even if the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated midway, the predetermined performance is executed without any discomfort, just as if the predetermined performance was executed continuously to the end.

[Appendix T19']
The special games include a plurality of special games each having a different advantage to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix T18', wherein the effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when a specific special game among the plurality of special games occurs when the predetermined condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T19', when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game occurs among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game occurs among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player, so that the predetermined effect is re-executed as a bonus for executing the specific special game.

[Appendix T20']
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot) which is shifted to a first determination state (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the determination means (41) determines with a first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a second special game (probable jackpot) which is shifted to a second determination state (high probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the determination means (41) determines with a second probability higher than the first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine described in Appendix T19', wherein the specific special game is the first special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T20', the special game includes a first special game in which the special game is transitioned to a first game state after the special game ends, and a second special game in which the special game is transitioned to a second game state that is more likely to be determined to be transitioned to a special game state than the first game state after the special game ends, and when the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, the predetermined effect is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. In other words, when the first special game, which is less favorable than the second game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated is re-executed as compensation.

[Appendix T21']
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot) which is shifted to a first determination state (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the determination means (41) determines with a first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a second special game (probable jackpot) which is shifted to a second determination state (high probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the determination means (41) determines with a second probability higher than the first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine described in Appendix T19', wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T21', the special game includes a first special game in which the special game is transitioned to a first game state after the special game ends, and a second special game in which the special game is transitioned to a second game state that is more likely to be determined to be transitioned to a special game state than the first game state after the special game ends, and when the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, the predetermined effect is re-executed on condition that it is the first special game. In other words, when the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated is re-executed. This provides the privilege of re-executing the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated in the advantageous second special game, further improving the advantage of the second special game.

[Appendix T22']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T16' to T21', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix T23']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for which the judgment means (41) judges that the special game (jackpot game) will be executed;
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix T22', wherein the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix T24']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T23', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix T22' to appendix T24', a predetermined presentation is executed in which at least a portion of information from which ball-out performance can be guessed, such as a numerical value corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented. This allows the player to enjoy the game by guessing the ball-out performance, such as a numerical value corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, and increases the interest of the game. In addition, because the predetermined presentation is information from which ball-out performance can be guessed, the predetermined presentation is re-executed after the end of the predetermined presentation, providing more opportunities to guess the ball-out performance, and making it possible to enjoy the game even more.

[Appendix T25']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1' to T24', further comprising a movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of receiving a gaming ball into the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T25', the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path by a movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area. In this way, since the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path by a movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area, it is possible to move the gaming ball into the second moving path with a simple configuration, and generate a special game by the gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path.

[Appendix T26']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T25' is characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) is switchable between a first state in which the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path (R2) and a second state in which the acceptance of the gaming ball into the second moving path (R2) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T26', the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the second moving path can receive a gaming ball, and a second state in which the second moving path is restricted from receiving a gaming ball. In this way, the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the second moving path can receive a gaming ball, and a second state in which the second moving path is restricted from receiving a gaming ball, so that in the first state, a special game can be generated by a gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path, while in the second state, a special game is prevented from being generated unnecessarily by a gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path.

[Appendix T27']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T26' is characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T27', the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state, so that a gaming ball launched in a state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the first moving path is prevented from being accepted into the second moving path against the player's will, and conversely, a gaming ball launched in a state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second moving path is prevented from being accepted into the first moving path against the player's will.

[Appendix T28']
The movable receiving member (80) further includes a switching control means (51) for controlling switching between the first state and the second state,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix T25' to Appendix T27', characterized in that the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the movable receiving member (80) when the notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game is completed by a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note T28', when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game ends by the notification game, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. In this way, when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game ends by the notification game, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started, so that it is possible to recognize that a special game can be generated when the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how the game progresses, for example, whether or not it is a situation where a right hit should be made, and prevents game balls from being wasted on the first movement path or the second movement path in an attempt to generate a special game in a state where a special game cannot be generated, thereby reducing the disadvantage (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)) suffered by the player in a state where a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix T29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T28', characterized in that the switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the movable receiving member (80) when movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T29', when the movement of a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. In this way, by terminating the switching control of the movable receiving member when the movement of a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, it is possible to recognize that there is no need to shoot a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path when the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. This prevents gaming balls from being shot unnecessarily on the first movement path or the second movement path, and reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)).

[Appendix T30']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1' to T29', further comprising a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T30', when a predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is restricted. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is restricted, whereby a special game is generated by a gaming ball entering a desired entry zone out of the first or second entry zone, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a gaming ball entering an undesired entry zone.

[Appendix T31']
The gaming machine according to appendix T30', wherein the predetermined condition includes a result of the determination by the determination means (41) being a result of the determination to execute the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T31', the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the ball entry area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other ball entry area that is different from one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is the intended one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is not the intended one.

[Appendix T32']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T31', characterized in that the specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T32', the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, thereby preventing a special game from being generated by a game ball entering the other ball entry area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix T33']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T32', characterized in that the specified condition includes, after a notification game for notifying the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T33', when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game caused by the game ball passing through the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game caused by the game ball passing through the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted, thereby preventing the occurrence of a special game by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the occurrence of a special game. This prevents the occurrence of a special game by a game ball on a moving path that is contrary to the player's will after the moving path that generates the special game is selected, that is, prevents the occurrence of a special game at a time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will.

[Appendix T34']
The one movement path is the second movement path (R2),
The gaming machine described in Appendix T33', wherein the other moving path is the first moving path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note T34', when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by the gaming ball launched on the first moving path is restricted. Here, since the second moving path is a moving path in which the fall of the gaming ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of a special game is delayed, if a gaming ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of a special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that a special game will be generated by a gaming ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the gaming ball has been launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the gaming ball launched later than when the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being generated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix T35']
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices T30' to T34', further comprising a restriction release means for releasing the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T35', when a specific condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is lifted. In this way, when a specific condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is lifted, making it possible to change to the occurrence of a special game based on one entry zone after the occurrence of the special game based on the other entry zone has been selected.

[Appendix T36']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T35', wherein the specific condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T36', the specific condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, because the specific condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, the player can change the ball entry area that generates the special game at his/her own will. This allows the player to change the movement route at his/her own will if he/she makes a mistake in selecting a movement route or changes his/her mind after selecting a movement route, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement route.

[Appendix T37']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T35' or Appendix T36', characterized in that the predetermined condition includes a judgment result by the judgment means (41) being a judgment result of executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T37', the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the ball entry area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other ball entry area that is different from one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is the intended one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is not the intended one.

[Appendix T38']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T37', characterized in that the specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T38', the predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that a special game is prevented from being generated by a game ball entering the other ball entry area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix T39']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T38', characterized in that the specified condition includes, after a notification game for notifying the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T39', when a predetermined condition is met by a notification game in which the result of the determination by the determination means indicates that a special game can be generated, and the movement of a gaming ball on one of the moving paths is detected, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving path in a state in which a special game can be generated, it is possible to realize, by simple control, the restriction of the generation of a special game by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the generation of a special game.

[Appendix T40']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T39', characterized in that the specific condition is that a movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path between the end of a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game and the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T40', the movement path that generates the special game (activates the continuous device for special devices) can be changed later by the establishment of a specific condition that can be established by the player, such as the detection of the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path (the launch of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path) before the special game occurs (the continuous device for special devices is activated). This allows the player to change the movement path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a movement path or change their mind after selecting a movement path, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement path.

[Appendix T41']
The one entry area is the first entry area (G1),
The gaming machine described in Appendix T40', wherein the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note T41', one of the ball entry areas is the first ball entry area, and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area. Here, the second moving path on which the second ball entry area is provided is a moving path on which the flow of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed. Therefore, if a game ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of the special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that the special game will be generated by the game ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the game ball was launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the game ball launched later than when the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

In addition, by having one entry area be the first entry area and the other entry area be the second entry area, if you want to instantly generate a special game while the flow of the game ball is delayed on the second moving path where the generation of the special game is delayed, it is possible to instantly generate the special game by shooting the game ball onto the first moving path.

[Appendix T42']
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices T1' to T41', characterized in that a player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T42', the player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path. In this way, by allowing the player to select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path, the player can select the length of time until the special game is executed. As a result, the player's will is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, allowing the player to play without feeling stressed.

[Appendix T43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T42' is characterized in that a player can select whether the gaming ball will move along the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T43', the player can select whether the gaming ball will move along the first or second moving path by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball. In this way, the player can select either the first or second moving path depending on the launch strength of the gaming ball, which makes it possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed.

[Appendix T44']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T42' is characterized in that it further comprises a movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of switching between a first state in which a gaming ball can be received into the second movement path (R2) and a second state in which a gaming ball can be received into the first movement path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T44', the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the gaming ball can be received on the second moving path and a second state in which the gaming ball can be received on the first moving path. In this way, by switching between the first state in which the gaming ball can be received on the second moving path and the second state in which the gaming ball can be received on the first moving path by the movable receiving member, the first moving path and the second moving path can be selected by launching the gaming ball while checking the attitude of the movable receiving member, so that it becomes possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed.

[Appendix T45']
The gaming machine described in Appendix T44', characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of gaming balls to the first moving path (R1) in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls to the second moving path (R2) in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T45', the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the second moving path in the second state. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the second moving path in the second state, thereby preventing a gaming ball launched in a state where the gaming ball can be accepted into the first moving path from being accepted into the second moving path against the player's will, and conversely, preventing a gaming ball launched in a state where the gaming ball can be accepted into the second moving path from being accepted into the first moving path against the player's will.

[Appendix U1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
A movement limiting means (48, 481) for limiting the mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix U1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the gaming ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix U1', the movement restriction means restricts the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first and second movement paths. In this way, the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first and second movement paths is restricted, thereby preventing the gaming ball launched onto the first movement path from changing its movement path to the second movement path midway along the first movement path, and conversely, preventing the gaming ball launched onto the second movement path from changing its movement path to the first movement path midway along the second movement path. This makes it possible to generate a special game by the passage of the gaming ball into the ball entry area provided on the movement path along which the gaming ball is first launched, and thus allows the intended gameplay to be appropriately imparted.

[Appendix U2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix U1', wherein the movement restricting means (48, 481) defines the space between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2).

[Appendix U3']
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) define a movement path of a game ball launched into a right area of a game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix U1', characterized in that the movement limiting means (48, 481) limits the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) of the gaming ball launched into the right area of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machines according to appendix U2' and appendix U3', the movement restriction means defines the gap between the first movement path and the second movement path. In this way, the movement restriction means defines the gap between the first movement path and the second movement path, and therefore the configuration that defines the first movement path and the second movement path itself can restrict the mutual movement of the gaming ball between the first movement path and the second movement path.

[Appendix V1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
A display means (341) for executing a predetermined performance;
a presentation end means (51) for ending the predetermined presentation when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined presentation is executed on the display means (341);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the entrance area (G1, G2),
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the ball entry area (G1, G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix V1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the gaming ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a gameplay in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix V1', when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. In this way, when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. For example, a gaming ball launched on the first moving path can immediately pass through the first entry area, so that the predetermined performance can immediately end, whereas a gaming ball launched on the second moving path cannot immediately end the predetermined performance because it is delayed in passing through the second entry area. Therefore, the player can select the first or second moving path depending on whether or not he/she wants to check the predetermined performance, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix V2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix V1' is characterized in that the specified presentation is executed based on the completion of a notification game that notifies the player of the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the special game is to be executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix V2', the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that a special game will be played. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that a special game will be played, so that the effect in the special game can be executed appropriately without the predetermined effect interfering with the effect executed in the notification game.

[Appendix V3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix V2', wherein the effect ending means (51) ends the predetermined effect when the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix V3', the predetermined effect is ended when a special game is executed. In this way, by ending the predetermined effect when a special game is executed, the effect in the special game can be executed appropriately without the predetermined effect interfering with the effect executed in the special game.

[Appendix V4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix V2' or Appendix V3' is characterized in that the specified presentation includes a presentation that is initiated when a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path (R2) when the notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game is completed by a notification game that notifies the player of the judgment result.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix V4', the predetermined performance includes a performance that is started when a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path after the notification that a special game will be played has ended. In this way, by including a performance that is started when a gaming ball is detected on the second movement path after the notification that a special game will be played has ended, the predetermined performance is executed while the flow of the gaming ball on the second movement path is delayed. This allows the execution time of the predetermined performance to be set long, making it possible to execute a variety of predetermined performances and increase the player's interest in the predetermined performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix V5']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix V1' to Appendix V4', characterized in that the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix V6']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for which the judgment means (41) judges that the special game (jackpot game) will be executed;
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix V5', wherein the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix V7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix V6', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of numerical information other than the one of the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix V5' to appendix V7', a predetermined presentation is executed in which at least a portion of information that can be used to infer ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by inferring ball-out performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix W1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
A display means (341) for executing a predetermined performance;
a presentation end means (51) for ending the predetermined presentation when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined presentation is being executed on the display means (341);
a performance re-execution means (51) for re-executing the predetermined performance based on the establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined performance is ended by the performance ending means (51);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the entrance area (G1, G2),
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the ball entry area (G1, G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix W1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the occurrence of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix W1', when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. In this way, when a predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance ends when a gaming ball enters the first or second entry area. For example, a gaming ball launched on the first moving path can immediately pass through the first entry area, so that the predetermined performance can immediately end, whereas a gaming ball launched on the second moving path cannot immediately end the predetermined performance because its passage through the second entry area is delayed. Therefore, the player can select the first or second moving path depending on whether or not he/she wants to check the predetermined performance, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix W1', the predetermined performance is replayed, providing many opportunities to see the predetermined performance. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix W2']
The gaming machine described in appendix W1', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined effect is ended by the effect ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined effect arrives.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W2', the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives. In other words, if the predetermined performance ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance is re-executed. In this way, by re-executing the predetermined performance if it ends before the timing for the end of the predetermined performance arrives, even if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway, it is possible to execute the predetermined performance to the end as compensation. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix W3']
The predetermined performance is executed during a specific period set from the end of a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the special game is to be executed to the time when the game ball passes through the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2);
The gaming machine according to claim 1' or 2', wherein the effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when the special game occurs when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W3', the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period set from the end of the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game by the notification game to the time when the game ball passes through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, and the predetermined performance is re-executed when the special game occurs. In this way, the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period and the predetermined performance is re-executed when the special game occurs, so that the predetermined performance can be executed in the special game. In other words, when the predetermined performance is interrupted midway due to the game ball passing through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined performance in the special game that is generated by the game ball passing through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. As a result, when the predetermined performance is terminated, it becomes possible to immediately re-execute the predetermined performance after the end of the predetermined performance, so that the time during which the predetermined performance is interrupted can be shortened, and even if the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated midway, the predetermined performance is executed without any discomfort, just as if the predetermined performance was executed continuously to the end.

[Appendix W4']
The special games include a plurality of special games each having a different advantage to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix W3', wherein the effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when a specific special game among the plurality of special games occurs when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W4', when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game occurs among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player. In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game occurs among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player, so that the predetermined effect is re-executed as a bonus for executing the specific special game.

[Appendix W5']
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot) which is shifted to a first judgment state (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the judgment means (41) judges with a first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and a second special game (probable jackpot) which is shifted to a second judgment state (high probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the judgment means (41) judges with a second probability higher than the first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition,
The gaming machine described in Appendix W4', wherein the specific special game is the first special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W5', the special game includes a first special game in which the special game is transitioned to a first game state after the special game ends, and a second special game in which the special game is transitioned to a second game state that is more likely to be determined to be transitioned to a special game state than the first game state after the special game ends, and when the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, the predetermined effect is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. In other words, when the first special game, which is less favorable than the second game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated is re-executed as compensation.

[Appendix W6']
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot) which is shifted to a first judgment state (low probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the judgment means (41) judges with a first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and a second special game (probable jackpot) which is shifted to a second judgment state (high probability mode) after the special game is ended, in which the judgment means (41) judges with a second probability higher than the first probability whether or not the special game (jackpot game) is to be executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition,
The gaming machine described in Appendix W4', wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W6', the special game includes a first special game in which the special game is transitioned to a first game state after the special game ends, and a second special game in which the special game is transitioned to a second game state that is more likely to be determined to be transitioned to a special game state than the first game state after the special game ends, and when the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, the predetermined effect is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. In other words, when the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated is re-executed. This provides the privilege of re-executing the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated in the advantageous second special game, further improving the advantage of the second special game.

[Appendix W7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices W1' to W6', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of performance information that is an index showing ball output performance.

[Appendix W8']
a storage means (41) for storing a plurality of pieces of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (jackpot probabilities) for which the judgment means (41) judges that the special game (jackpot game) will be executed;
a selection means (41) for selecting one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed by the determination means (41) from the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41);
Further equipped with
the determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game in accordance with the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the one piece of numerical information selected by the selecting means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix W7', wherein the performance information is information that can identify or infer the one piece of numerical information.

[Appendix W9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix W8', wherein the predetermined presentation includes a presentation that presents at least a portion of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix W7' to appendix W9', a predetermined presentation is executed in which at least a portion of information from which ball-out performance can be guessed, such as a numerical value corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, is presented. This allows the player to enjoy the game by guessing the ball-out performance, such as a numerical value corresponding to the probability of a favorable judgment, and increases the interest of the game. In addition, because the predetermined presentation is information from which ball-out performance can be guessed, the predetermined presentation is re-executed after it has ended, providing more opportunities to guess the ball-out performance, and allowing the player to enjoy the game even more.

[Appendix X1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
A movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of receiving game balls to the second moving path (R2);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined judgment process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix X1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix X1', the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path by a movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area. In this way, since the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path by a movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area, it is possible to move the gaming ball into the second moving path with a simple configuration, and generate a special game by the gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path.

[Appendix X2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix X1' is characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) is switchable between a first state in which the gaming ball can be received into the second moving path (R2) and a second state in which the acceptance of the gaming ball into the second moving path (R2) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix X2', the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the second moving path can receive a gaming ball, and a second state in which the second moving path is restricted from receiving a gaming ball. In this way, the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the second moving path can receive a gaming ball, and a second state in which the second moving path is restricted from receiving a gaming ball, so that in the first state, a special game can be generated by a gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path, while in the second state, a special game is prevented from being inadvertently generated by a gaming ball entering the second ball entry area on the second moving path.

[Appendix X3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix X2' is characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix X3', the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and is capable of accepting gaming balls into the first moving path (R1) in the second state, so that a gaming ball launched in a state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the first moving path is prevented from being accepted into the second moving path against the will of the player, and conversely, a gaming ball launched in a state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second moving path is prevented from being accepted into the first moving path against the will of the player.

[Appendix X4']
The movable receiving member (80) further includes a switching control means (51) for controlling switching between the first state and the second state,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix X1' to Appendix X3', characterized in that the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the movable receiving member (80) when the notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game is terminated by a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix X4', when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game ends due to the notification game, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. In this way, when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game ends due to the notification game, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started, so that it is possible to recognize that a special game can be generated when the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how the game progresses, for example, whether or not it is a situation where a right hit should be made, and prevents game balls from being wasted on the first movement path or the second movement path in an attempt to generate a special game in a state where a special game cannot be generated, thereby reducing the disadvantage (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)) suffered by the player in a state where a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix X5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix X4', characterized in that the switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the movable receiving member (80) when movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) is detected.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix X5', when the movement of a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. In this way, by terminating the switching control of the movable receiving member when the movement of a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, it is possible to recognize that there is no need to shoot a gaming ball on the first movement path or the second movement path when the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. This prevents gaming balls from being shot unnecessarily on the first movement path or the second movement path, and reduces the disadvantage suffered by the player (a decrease in the base (ball payout rate)).

[Appendix Y1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
the special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2);
A gaming machine characterized by further comprising a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a predetermined condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Y1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the gaming ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix Y1', the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is restricted when a predetermined condition is met. In this way, by restricting the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone when a predetermined condition is met, a special game is generated when a gaming ball enters a desired entry zone out of the first or second entry zone, and a special game is prevented from being generated when a gaming ball enters an entry zone other than the desired entry zone.

[Appendix Y2']
The gaming machine described in appendix Y1', wherein the predetermined condition includes a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) being a result of the judgment to execute the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Y2', the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the ball entry area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other ball entry area that is different from one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by a game ball entering the other ball entry area that is the intended one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a game ball entering one of the ball entry areas that is not the intended one.

[Appendix Y3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Y2', characterized in that the specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appended note Y3', the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the predetermined condition includes the end of notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, thereby preventing a special game from being generated by a game ball entering the other ball entry area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix Y4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Y3', characterized in that the specified condition includes, after a notification game in which the determination result by the determination means (41) is notified that the determination result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to appended note Y4', when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game caused by the game ball passing through the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, when the notification that the judgment result is to execute a special game is finished by the notification game, if the movement of the game ball on one moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other moving path, the occurrence of a special game caused by the game ball passing through the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted, thereby preventing the occurrence of a special game by a game ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the occurrence of a special game. This prevents the occurrence of a special game by a game ball on a moving path that is contrary to the player's will after the moving path that generates the special game is selected, that is, prevents the occurrence of a special game at a time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will.

[Appendix Y5']
The one movement path is the second movement path (R2),
The gaming machine described in Appendix Y4', wherein the other movement path is the first movement path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note Y5', when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by the gaming ball launched on the first moving path is restricted. Here, since the second moving path is a moving path in which the fall of the gaming ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of a special game is delayed, if a gaming ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of a special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that a special game will be generated by a gaming ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the gaming ball has been launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the gaming ball launched later than when the movement of the gaming ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being generated at an unintended time (timing).

[Appendix Z1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
the special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2);
A limiting means for limiting the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a first predetermined condition is satisfied;
a restriction release means for releasing the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is established;
The gaming machine further comprises:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix Z1', when the first predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is restricted. In this way, when the first predetermined condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a gaming ball entering the first or second entry zone is restricted, so that a special game is generated by a gaming ball entering a desired entry zone out of the first and second entry zones, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a gaming ball entering an undesired entry zone.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix Z1', when the second predetermined condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first or second entry zone is lifted. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is met, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first or second entry zone is lifted, making it possible to change to the occurrence of a special game based on one entry zone after the occurrence of the special game based on the other entry zone has been selected.

[Appendix Z2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z1', wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z2', the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, because the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, the player can change the entry area that generates the special game at his/her own will. This allows the player to change the movement route at his/her own will if he/she makes a mistake in selecting a movement route or changes his/her mind after selecting a movement route, thereby improving convenience with regard to the selection of a movement route.

[Appendix Z3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z1' or Appendix Z2', characterized in that the first predetermined condition includes a judgment result by the judgment means (41) being a judgment result of executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z3', the first predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes that the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result to execute a special game, so that the ball entry area in which the special game is executed is limited to the other ball entry area that is different from one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is the intended one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from being generated by a ball entering the other ball entry area that is not the intended one.

[Appendix Z4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z3', characterized in that the first specified condition includes the end of notification that the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game by a notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z4', the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, thereby preventing a special game from being generated by a game ball entering the other ball entry area in a state in which a special game cannot be generated.

[Appendix Z5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z4', characterized in that the first specified condition includes, after a notification game in which the determination result by the determination means (41) is notified that the determination result is to execute the special game, the movement of the gaming ball on one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2) is detected before the movement of the gaming ball on the other moving path different from the one of the first moving path (R1) and the second moving path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z5', when the first predetermined condition is a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means and the judgment result is in a state where a special game can be generated, when the movement of a gaming ball on one moving path is detected, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, by restricting the detection of the passage of the gaming ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving path in a state where a special game can be generated, it is possible to realize, by simple control, the restriction of the generation of a special game by a gaming ball moving on the other moving path between the selection of one moving path and the generation of a special game.

[Appendix Z6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z5', characterized in that the second specified condition is that the movement of a specified number of game balls is detected on the other movement path between the end of the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means (41) is that the special game is to be executed, and the time when the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z6', the movement path that operates the consecutive device operation device can be changed later by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as the detection of the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path before the consecutive device operation device is activated (the launch of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement path). This allows the player to change the movement path according to their own will if they make a mistake in selecting a movement path or change their mind after selecting a movement path, thereby improving convenience in selecting a movement path.

[Appendix Z7']
The one entry area is the first entry area (G1),
The gaming machine described in Appendix Z6', characterized in that the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix Z7', one of the ball entry areas is the first ball entry area, and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area. Here, the second moving path on which the second ball entry area is provided is a moving path on which the flow of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed, so that if a game ball is launched on the first moving path while the occurrence of the special game is delayed on the second moving path, there is a concern that the special game will be generated by the game ball launched later on the first moving path, even though the game ball was launched on the second moving path first. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected, the special game is more likely to be generated by the game ball launched later than when the movement of the game ball on the first moving path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the second moving path is detected. Therefore, when the movement of a game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of a game ball on the first movement path is detected, the occurrence of a special game by a game ball launched on the first movement path is restricted, thereby reducing the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched earlier than a game ball launched later. In this way, by responding to cases where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball launched on an unintended movement path, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by a game ball on a movement path against the player's will, i.e., to prevent a special game from being activated at an unintended time (timing).

In addition, by having one entry area be the first entry area and the other entry area be the second entry area, if you want to instantly generate a special game while the flow of the game ball is delayed on the second moving path where the generation of the special game is delayed, it is possible to instantly generate the special game by shooting the game ball onto the first moving path.

[Appendix AA1']
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery);
A first ball entry area (G1) is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
A second ball entry area (G2) is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball;
a special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined game state;
A game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow-down of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) has an entrance section (601, 485) for receiving game balls, a rolling section (603, 702) for rolling the game balls for a predetermined period of time, and a release section (602, 701) for releasing the game balls one by one toward the second entrance area (G2),
the special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2);
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix AA1', the flow of the gaming ball launched into the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball flow delay means. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the second moving path to enter the second ball entry area is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball moving along the first moving path to enter the first ball entry area. This allows for a game in which the game progresses differently when the gaming ball is launched along the first moving path and when the gaming ball is launched along the second moving path. For example, a special game can be instantly generated by launching a gaming ball along the first moving path, while the generation of the special game can be delayed by launching a gaming ball along the second moving path, and various events can be executed while the generation of the special game is delayed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix AA1', the player can select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path. In this way, by allowing the player to select whether to move the gaming ball along the first movement path or the second movement path, the player can select the length of time until the special game is executed. As a result, the player's will is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, allowing the player to play without feeling stressed.

[Appendix AA2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix AA1' is characterized in that a player can select whether the gaming ball will move along the first moving path (R1) or the second moving path (R2) by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix AA2', the player can select whether the gaming ball will move along the first or second moving path by adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball. In this way, the player can select either the first or second moving path depending on the launch strength of the gaming ball, which makes it possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed.

[Appendix AA3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix AA1' is characterized in that it further comprises a movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of switching between a first state in which a gaming ball can be received into the second movement path (R2) and a second state in which a gaming ball can be received into the first movement path (R1).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix AA3', the movable receiving member can be switched between a first state in which the gaming ball can be received on the second moving path and a second state in which the gaming ball can be received on the first moving path. In this way, by switching between the first state in which the gaming ball can be received on the second moving path and the second state in which the gaming ball can be received on the first moving path by the movable receiving member, the first moving path and the second moving path can be selected by launching the gaming ball while checking the attitude of the movable receiving member, so that it becomes possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed.

[Appendix AA4']
The gaming machine described in Appendix AA3', characterized in that the movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of gaming balls to the first moving path (R1) in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls to the second moving path (R2) in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix AA4', the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the second moving path in the second state. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the first moving path in the first state, and restricts the acceptance of gaming balls into the second moving path in the second state, thereby preventing a gaming ball launched in a state where the gaming ball can be accepted into the first moving path from being accepted into the second moving path against the player's will, and conversely, preventing a gaming ball launched in a state where the gaming ball can be accepted into the second moving path from being accepted into the first moving path against the player's will.

[Appendix A1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
a display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (e.g., a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game ball to a state in which it is impossible to enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, wherein the gaming value is an expected value of balls to be dispensed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the gaming value is the expected value of balls to be dispensed. In this way, by setting the gaming value as the expected value of balls to be dispensed, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the player can obtain a large number of balls by the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

[Appendix A3]
The predetermined lottery is a lottery (second special drawing lottery) as to whether or not to switch the state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance (316Ba) to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance (316Ba) by the switching means (319B),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, characterized in that the specified lottery result is the result of switching by the switching means (319B) from a state in which a gaming ball cannot enter the second ball entrance (316Ba) to a state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entrance (316Ba) (2R normal jackpot or small jackpot).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, when the result of a predetermined lottery on whether or not to switch by the switching means from a state in which gaming balls cannot enter the second ball entrance to a state in which gaming balls can enter the second ball entrance is a result of switching by the switching means from a state in which gaming balls cannot enter the second ball entrance to a state in which gaming balls can enter the second ball entrance, a variable display for a predetermined period is performed. In other words, when a variable display for a predetermined period is performed, it becomes possible for gaming balls to enter the second ball entrance, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined lottery result, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which the player can obtain high gaming value.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, wherein the distribution means (63) is made of resin.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the distribution means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means from resin, it is possible to improve durability and processability (moldability), and also to reduce manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A4, wherein the distribution means (63) comprises an introduction section into which gaming balls are introduced, a first guide section (631) that guides the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section to the front side of the gaming board (31), and a second guide section (632, 633) that guides the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section to the back side of the gaming board (31).

[Appendix A6]
The first induction portion (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A5, wherein the second induction section (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the gaming machines according to appendix A5 and appendix A6, the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means are guided to the front or back side of the gaming board. In this way, by guiding the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means to the front or back side of the gaming board, it is possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value when the gaming balls are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. That is, the gaming value of the gaming balls distributed to the second flow path is 0 because they are guided to the back side of the gaming board, and the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path are guided to the front side of the gaming board and can enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port, so that their gaming value exceeds 0.

[Appendix B1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
a display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (e.g., a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a means (41) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when game balls enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance (316Ba);
Equipped with
The number of winning balls resulting from game balls entering the second ball entrance (316Ba) is smaller than the number of winning balls resulting from game balls entering the first ball entrance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game balls to a state in which they cannot enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the number of prize balls awarded by game balls entering the second ball entrance is less than the number of prize balls awarded by game balls entering the first ball entrance. In this way, the number of prize balls awarded by game balls entering the second ball entrance is less than the number of prize balls awarded by game balls entering the first ball entrance, so that a significant difference in game value can be created between game balls entering the second ball entrance and game balls entering the first ball entrance. As a result, the player can obtain a higher game value by balls entering the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area during the variable display set in the second period.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that, when the distribution ratio between the first flow path (631, etc.) and the second flow path (632, 633, etc.) is 1:N, the number of winning balls resulting from game balls entering the first ball entrance exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of winning balls resulting from game balls entering the second ball entrance is N+1 balls or less.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the distribution ratio with the second flow path is 1:N, the number of prize balls resulting from game balls entering the first ball entrance exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of prize balls resulting from game balls entering the second ball entrance is N+1 balls or less. In this way, when the distribution ratio with the second flow path is 1:N, the number of prize balls resulting from game balls entering the first ball entrance exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of prize balls resulting from game balls entering the second ball entrance is N+1 balls or less. This makes it possible to increase the number of game balls (held balls) of the player by game balls entering the first ball entrance, while suppressing an increase in the number of game balls (held balls) of the player by game balls entering the second ball entrance.

[Appendix C1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
a display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (e.g., a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the distribution means (63) is a non-movable object fixed to the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game balls to a state in which they cannot enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the distribution means is a non-movable object that is fixed to the gaming board. In this way, by providing the distribution means as a non-movable object, it is possible to ensure the consistency of the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the gaming board, and it is also possible to take measures against attacking shots using timing shots in which the game ball is shot out at the right timing for distribution by the distribution means.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, wherein the distribution means (63) is made of resin.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the distribution means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means from resin, it is possible to improve durability and processability (moldability), and also to reduce manufacturing costs.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the distribution means (63) comprises an introduction section into which gaming balls are introduced, a first guiding section (631) that guides the gaming balls that enter through the introduction section to the front side of the gaming board (31), and a second guiding section (632, 633) that guides the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section to the back side of the gaming board (31).

[Appendix C4]
The first induction portion (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3, wherein the second induction section (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the gaming machines according to appendix C3 and appendix C4, the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means are guided to the front or back side of the gaming board. In this way, by guiding the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means to the front or back side of the gaming board, it is possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value when the gaming balls are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. That is, the gaming value of the gaming balls distributed to the second flow path is 0 because they are guided to the back side of the gaming board, and the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path are guided to the front side of the gaming board and can enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port, so that their gaming value exceeds 0.

[Appendix D1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
A display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the distribution means (63) is made of resin.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game balls to a state in which they cannot enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the distribution means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means from resin, it is possible to improve durability and processability (moldability), and it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that the distribution means (63) comprises an introduction section into which gaming balls are introduced, a first guiding section (631) that guides the gaming balls that enter through the introduction section to the front side of the gaming board (31), and second guiding sections (632, 633) that guide the gaming balls introduced through the introduction section to the back side of the gaming board (31).

[Appendix D3]
The first induction portion (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2, wherein the second induction section (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2 or Appendix D3, the gaming ball introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means is guided to the front side or the back side of the gaming board. In this way, by guiding the gaming ball introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means to the front side or the back side of the gaming board, it is possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value when the gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. That is, the gaming ball distributed to the second flow path is guided to the back side of the gaming board, so that the gaming value becomes 0, and the gaming ball distributed to the first flow path is guided to the front side of the gaming board, so that the gaming ball can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, so that the gaming value exceeds 0.

[Appendix E1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
a fourth ball entry area (314) for carrying out a specific lottery having a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the fourth ball entry area (314);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
a display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (e.g., a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game ball to a state in which it is impossible to enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

In addition, the gaming machine according to Appendix E1 is provided with a fourth ball entry area for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when a gaming ball enters. In this way, by providing a fourth ball entry area for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when a gaming ball enters, it is possible to provide a player with different gaming value when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry area where the predetermined lottery is conducted and when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry area where the specific lottery is conducted. This allows a player to select whether to launch a gaming ball into the first ball entry area on the gaming board where the gaming ball is likely to enter, or to launch a gaming ball into the fourth ball entry area on the gaming board where the gaming ball is likely to enter, depending on a predetermined condition. As a result, under a predetermined condition in which the first period with a short variable display time is set, by launching the game ball into an area on the game board where the game ball is likely to enter the fourth ball entry area, it becomes possible to obtain game value by the game ball entering the first ball entry area on the game board when game value cannot be obtained by the game ball entering the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area. In other words, the player can obtain maximum game value by appropriately selecting the game ball launch area on the game board according to the predetermined conditions. In addition, by providing the first ball entry area and allowing the player to appropriately select the game ball launch area on the game board according to the predetermined conditions, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining unexpected game value by the game ball entering the first ball entry area when the first period is set as the variable display time, that is, to prevent the so-called strategy shot from being executed.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (314) can be entered by a gaming ball shot into an area of the gaming board (31) other than the first ball entry area (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, the fourth ball entry area can receive a ball that is shot into an area of the gaming board different from the first ball entry area. Because the fourth ball entry area can receive a ball that is shot into an area of the gaming board different from the first ball entry area, it is possible to easily and appropriately launch a ball into an area of the gaming board where the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry area, and to easily and appropriately launch a ball into an area of the gaming board where the ball is likely to enter the fourth ball entry area. This allows a player to more easily and appropriately obtain the maximum gaming value that can be obtained by appropriately selecting the ball launch area on the gaming board according to the specified conditions, and prevents the player from trying to find a strategy.

[Appendix E3]
The fourth ball entry area (314) is a ball entry area into which a game ball shot into one of the left and right areas of the game board (31) (e.g., the left area) can enter, and a game ball shot into the other area (e.g., the right area) different from the one of the left and right areas of the game board (31) cannot enter,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2, characterized in that the first ball entry area (315) is a ball entry area into which a gaming ball shot into the other area (e.g., the right area) can enter, but a gaming ball shot into the one area (e.g., the left area) cannot enter.

In the gaming machine of Appendix E3, the fourth ball entry area is a area where game balls shot into one of the left and right areas of the gaming board can enter, but cannot enter the other of the left and right areas, and the first ball entry area is a area where game balls shot into the other area can enter, but cannot enter the one area. In this way, the fourth ball entry area allows balls to be entered into one of the left and right areas of the game board, but not into the other of the left and right areas, and the first ball entry area allows balls to be entered into the other area, but not into the one area. By selecting the left and right areas of the game board to enter the game board, it is possible to easily and appropriately use the first ball entry area to gain game value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry area and the fourth ball entry area to gain game value. This allows the player to easily and appropriately obtain the maximum game value that can be obtained by appropriately selecting the ball entry area on the game board according to the specified conditions, and appropriately prevents the player from trying to find a strategy.

[Appendix E4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that the specific lottery conducted upon the entry of a gaming ball into the fourth entry area (314) is more advantageous than the predetermined lottery conducted upon the entry of a gaming ball into the first entry area (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the specific lottery conducted by the entry of a gaming ball into the fourth entry area is more favorable than the predetermined lottery conducted by the entry of a gaming ball into the first entry area. In this way, the specific lottery conducted by the entry of a gaming ball into the fourth entry area is more favorable than the predetermined lottery conducted by the entry of a gaming ball into the first entry area. This makes it possible to promote the launch of gaming balls into areas on the gaming board where the gaming ball can enter the fourth entry area when the specified condition is met for which the first period is set as the variable display time, and further appropriately suppresses the launch of gaming balls into areas on the gaming board where the gaming ball can enter the first entry area.

[Appendix F1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the area;
A distribution means (63) is provided below the first ball entry area and can distribute game balls to a first flow path (631, etc.) and a second flow path (632, 633, etc.) having a lower game value (e.g., expected ball payout value) than the first flow path (631, etc.);
A second ball entry area (69) is provided below the distribution means (63) and has a first ball entry port through which the game balls can enter;
a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided with a second ball entry port (316Ba) through which game balls can enter, and a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port (316Ba) and a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port, the third ball entry area (316B, 319B) being provided adjacent to or spaced apart from the second ball entry area (69) at least in the left-right direction below the distribution means (63);
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second flow paths (632, 633, etc.) than to the first flow paths (631, etc.),
the switching means (319B) is provided with a rolling means for switching to a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry port when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result, and rolling the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
The first ball entry area (314) has no restriction on the entry of game balls by ordinary electric role members, and game balls can enter the first ball entry area (314) without support by the ordinary electric role members.
a variable display means (363) for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period of time when a result of the predetermined lottery performed by the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance area (315) is a predetermined lottery result;
a display time setting means (41) for setting a first period (e.g., 1 second) and a second period (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period as a variable display time in the variable display means (363) according to a predetermined condition (e.g., a probability variable game state or a normal game state);
a means for disabling entry of game balls into the second ball entry port by the switching means (319B) when the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41); and a means (41) for enabling game balls distributed to the first flow path (631, etc.) by the distribution means (63) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the distribution means distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower game value than the first flow path, and distributes game balls to the second flow path at a higher ratio than the first flow path. In this embodiment, the first period and the second period longer than the first period are set according to a predetermined condition as the variable display time in the variable display means, and when the second period is set as the variable display time, the switching means sets the game balls to a state in which they cannot enter the second ball entrance, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the first flow path, which has a higher game value and a lower distribution ratio, can enter the first ball entrance of the second ball entrance area, so that it is possible to increase the number of game balls when the variable display time is set to the second period. In other words, it is possible to provide new gameplay in which a player can obtain high game value by having a game ball enter the first ball entry opening of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, there is no restriction on the entry of game balls into the first ball entry area by the normal electric accessory member, and game balls can enter without support from the normal electric accessory member. In this way, there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric accessory member, and game balls can enter without support from the normal electric accessory member, so that the entry restriction state of game balls into the first ball entry area is eliminated. This makes it possible to constantly enter game balls into the first ball entry area, so that it is possible to shorten the blank period during which no variable display is performed when game balls are being shot out continuously. Therefore, by setting the second period as the variable display time, it is possible to increase the proportion of times the second period is set in a situation in which game balls are being shot out continuously when a predetermined condition is met under which game balls can enter the second ball entry area. As a result, the player can appropriately acquire the game value by having game balls enter the second ball entry area by setting the second period.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1 is characterized in that it has a fourth ball entry area (314) for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when a gaming ball enters the area.

The gaming machine according to appendix F2 is provided with a fourth ball entry area for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when the gaming ball enters. In this way, by providing a fourth ball entry area for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery when the gaming ball enters, it is possible to provide the player with different gaming value when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry area where the predetermined lottery is conducted and when the gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry area where the specific lottery is conducted. This allows the player to select whether to launch the gaming ball into the first ball entry area on the gaming board where the gaming ball is likely to enter, or the fourth ball entry area on the gaming board where the gaming ball is likely to enter, depending on the predetermined conditions. As a result, under a predetermined condition in which the first period with a short variable display time is set, by launching the game ball into an area on the game board where the game ball is likely to enter the fourth ball entry area, it becomes possible to obtain game value by the game ball entering the first ball entry area on the game board when game value cannot be obtained by the game ball entering the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area. In other words, the player can obtain maximum game value by appropriately selecting the game ball launch area on the game board according to the predetermined conditions. In addition, by providing the first ball entry area and allowing the player to appropriately select the game ball launch area on the game board according to the predetermined conditions, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining unexpected game value by the game ball entering the first ball entry area when the first period is set as the variable display time, that is, to prevent the player from seeking a so-called strategy shot.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric device components into the fourth ball entry area (314), and game balls can enter the area without support from the normal electric device components.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the fourth ball entry area is not restricted by the normal electric accessory member, and the ball can enter without support from the normal electric accessory member. In this way, the fourth ball entry area is not restricted by the normal electric accessory member, and the ball can enter without support from the normal electric accessory member, so that the ball can be constantly entered into the fourth ball entry area, and it is possible to shorten the blank period during which no variable display is performed when balls are continuously shot out. Therefore, the player can more appropriately obtain the gaming value by the ball entering the fourth ball entry area. As a result, the ball can be promoted to be shot out into the area of the game board where the ball can enter the fourth ball entry area, and the ball can be more appropriately prevented from being shot out into the area of the game board where the ball can enter the first ball entry area.

[Appendix G1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the profit to a player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note G1, the operating member, in a non-operating state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the non-operating state or the operating state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when a predetermined operating condition is met, the operating member is put into an operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, which has a higher or middle level of benefit given to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not met, the operating member is put into a non-operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower level of benefit given to the player. In this way, when the operating member is put into a non-operating state, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is put into an operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, so that it is possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inoperating state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and prevents players from playing in a strategy game.

[Appendix G2]
At least a portion of the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78) is formed on one of the front side and the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, characterized in that at least a portion of the third flow path (76) is formed on the other side of the front side and the back side of the gaming board (31) that is different from the one side.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, at least a portion of the first flow path and the second flow path is formed on one of the front side and the back side of the gaming board, and at least a portion of the third flow path is formed on the other side of the gaming board that is different from the one of the front side and the back side. That is, at least a portion of either the first flow path and the second flow path or the third flow path is formed on the back side of the gaming board. In this way, by forming at least a portion of either the first flow path and the second flow path or the third flow path on the back side of the gaming board, the space on the back side of the gaming board can be effectively used to form the three flow paths. As a result, the space on the back side of the gaming board is effectively used to form the three flow paths, and the space required on the front side of the gaming board can be reduced, which improves the design freedom for the front side of the gaming board and makes it possible to further secure the space for the pattern display section.

[Appendix G3]
At least a portion of the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78) is formed on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2, wherein at least a portion of the third flow path (76) is formed on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, at least a portion of the first flow path and the second flow path is formed on the front side of the gaming board, and at least a portion of the third flow path is formed on the rear side of the gaming board. That is, at least a portion of the first flow path and the second flow path, which provide a higher benefit to the player than the third flow path, are provided on the front side of the gaming board, and the third flow path, which provides the lowest benefit to the player, is formed on the rear side of the gaming board. This makes it easier to visually grasp the first and second flow paths, which provide a higher benefit to the player and are of greater interest to the player, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Appendix H1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
Equipped with
The profit for the player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than in the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than in the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78);
A gaming machine characterized in that the third ball entry area (943, 944) is set so that the payout of game balls for one game ball entering the third ball entry area is one ball or less.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H1, the operating member, in a non-operated state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in a non-operated state or an activated state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the first or second flow path, which provides a higher or middle level of benefit to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is deactivated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the third flow path, which provides a lower level of benefit to the player. In this way, when the operating member is deactivated, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is activated, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, making it possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in the deactivated state or the activated state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents the player from receiving an unfair profit or from playing in a strategy game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the payout of game balls for one game ball entering the third ball entry area where game balls flowing down the third flow path can enter is set to one ball or less. In this way, by setting the payout of game balls for one game ball entering the third ball entry area where game balls flowing down the third flow path can enter to one ball or less, the expected value of balls to be paid out for game balls that reach the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperative state is one ball or less (the expected difference in balls is zero balls or less). Therefore, even if a game ball is shot toward the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperative state, that is, even if a game ball is shot toward the operating member when the specified operating condition of the operating member is not established, there is no increase in game balls, and there is no benefit to the player, and it is rather disadvantageous to the player. This means that when the operating member is in a non-operated state, the player cannot receive the benefit of the game ball flowing down the first and second flow paths (the benefit of the game ball entering the first and second entry areas), so measures are taken to prevent so-called attacking shots from being made.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, wherein the third ball entry area (943, 944) includes a ball entry port (944) from which no gaming ball is paid out in response to an entry of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the third ball entry area includes a ball entry port from which no game balls are paid out in response to an entry of a game ball. In this way, by including a ball entry port from which no game balls are paid out in response to an entry of a game ball in the third ball entry area, it becomes possible to easily and appropriately set the expected ball payout value for a game ball that reaches the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperative state to 1 ball or less (the expected difference in balls is 0 balls or less), and it becomes possible to make the expected ball payout value (expected difference in balls) more disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to further reduce the desire to shoot game balls toward the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperative state, and therefore to further reduce the desire of the player to seek a strategy.

[Appendix I1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
Equipped with
The profit for the player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than in the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than in the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operating member (84) is in a specified operating state, the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the second flow path (78) is set to be higher than that of the first flow path (77).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the operating member, in a non-operated state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in a non-operated state or an activated state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the above-mentioned tenth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when a predetermined operating condition is met, the operating member is put into an operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, which has a higher or middle level of benefit given to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not met, the operating member is put into a non-operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower level of benefit given to the player. In this way, when the operating member is put into a non-operating state, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is put into an operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, so that it is possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inoperating state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents the player from receiving an unfair profit or from playing in a strategy game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path is set higher than that of the first flow path. Also, the benefits to the player are set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. Therefore, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path is set higher than that of the first flow path, so that the player is not given an excessive benefit from game balls flowing down the first flow path, and an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player can be suppressed. In this way, by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by increasing the number of balls held by the player when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, without excessively encouraging the player's gambling spirit.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that, when the operating member (84) is in the specified operating state, it causes a gaming ball that reaches the operating member (84) to flow down either the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the gaming ball that reaches the operating member is made to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path. In this way, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the gaming ball that is shot into a predetermined area of the gaming board and reaches the operating member is made to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path. This makes it possible to give the player the advantage of a gaming ball flowing down either the first flow path or the second flow path without giving the player a disadvantage of a gaming ball flowing down the third flow path when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, and to increase the number of balls the player has.

[Appendix J1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
Equipped with
The profit for the player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than in the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than in the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78);
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a specified gaming state, a gaming ball that has reached the operating member (84) can only enter the third ball entry area (943, 944).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note J1, the operating member, in a non-operated state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in a non-operated state or an activated state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the first or second flow path, which provides a higher or middle level of benefit to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is deactivated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the third flow path, which provides a lower level of benefit to the player. In this way, when the operating member is deactivated, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is activated, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, making it possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in the deactivated state or the activated state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents the player from receiving an unfair profit or from playing in a strategy game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, in a specified gaming state, a gaming ball that reaches the operating member can only enter the third ball entry area. In this way, in a specified gaming state, a gaming ball that reaches the operating member can only enter the third ball entry area. When a gaming ball is shot toward the operating member in a specified gaming state and reaches the operating member, the player is not given the profit that would be given if the gaming ball flows down the first and second flow paths, but is always given the lowest profit that would be given if the gaming ball flows down the third flow path. Therefore, the player is appropriately prevented from shooting a gaming ball toward the operating member in a specified gaming state, i.e., from attempting a strategy shot.

[Appendix J2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, wherein the operating member (84) is in the inoperative state in the specified gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the actuating member is deactivated in a specified gaming state. In this way, by deactivating the actuating member in a specified gaming state, gaming balls that are shot toward the actuating member in the specified gaming state and reach the actuating member can be reliably made to flow down the first flow path. This makes it possible to simply and appropriately prevent gaming balls that reach the actuating member in the specified gaming state from flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path.

[Appendix J3]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) that awards a predetermined benefit is executed with a predetermined probability;
the predetermined probability includes a first probability (low probability mode) and a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, characterized in that the specified gaming state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) at the first probability (low probability mode).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, the predetermined gaming state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to transition to a special gaming state at a first probability lower than the second probability. In this way, by the predetermined gaming state being a state in which it is determined whether or not to transition to a special gaming state at a first probability lower than the second probability, the player is appropriately prevented from shooting a gaming ball toward the operating member, i.e., from attempting a strategy shot, in order to obtain an unfair advantage in a state in which the probability of transitioning to the special gaming state is low and is disadvantageous to the player.

[Appendix K1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A dispersion area (74) provided above the operating member (84) for dispersing and flowing down the game balls in multiple directions;
a straightening area (75) for causing the game balls that have flowed down the dispersion area (74) to flow down one by one toward the operating member (84);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the profit to a player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, the operating member, in a non-operated state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in a non-operated state or an activated state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, when a predetermined operating condition is met, the operating member is put into an operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, which has a higher or middle level of benefit given to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not met, the operating member is put into a non-operating state, so that the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower level of benefit given to the player. In this way, when the operating member is put into a non-operating state, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is put into an operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, so that it is possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inoperating state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents the player from receiving an unfair profit or from playing in a strategy game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to appended note K1 is provided with a dispersion area that is provided above the operating member and disperses the gaming balls in multiple directions and causes them to flow down, and a straightening area that causes the gaming balls that flow down the dispersion area to flow down one by one toward the operating member. In this way, by providing a dispersion area that is provided above the operating member and disperses the gaming balls in multiple directions and causes them to flow down, and a straightening area that causes the gaming balls that flow down the dispersion area to flow down one by one toward the operating member, the gaming balls that are shot out into the dispersion area are dispersed in multiple directions and flow down in the dispersion area, and are straightened in the straightening area before flowing down one by one toward the operating member at irregular timings. Therefore, the gaming balls that are shot out into the dispersion area are supplied to the operating member one by one at irregular timings, and flow down one of the first to third flow paths that provide different benefits to the player depending on the non-operating state and operating state of the operating member. This makes it difficult to time the launch of the game ball so that it is guided into the first flow path, which provides a higher profit to the player, and prevents players from engaging in strategic shots that would allow them to obtain unfair profits.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine described in appendix K1, wherein the dispersion area (74) is formed by nails driven into the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the dispersion area is formed by nails driven into the gaming board. In this way, the dispersion area is formed by nails driven into the gaming board, so that the dispersion area can be easily formed when driving other nails into the gaming board.

[Appendix K3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the straightening area (75) is formed by nails driven into the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the straightening area is formed by nails driven into the gaming board. In this way, the straightening area is formed by nails driven into the gaming board, so that the straightening area can be easily formed when driving other nails into the gaming board.

[Appendix L1]
a first flow path (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first advantage;
a second flow path (78) through which the game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second advantage;
a third flow path (76) through which the game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
an operating member (84) that, in a non-operating state, causes game balls to flow down the third flow path (76), and that is in an operating state in which the game balls flow down the first flow path (77) or the second flow path (78) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) that awards a predetermined benefit is executed;
Equipped with
The profit for the player is set highest in the first flow path (77), lower in the second flow path (78) than in the first flow path (77), and lower in the third flow path (76) than in the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78);
The predetermined operating condition includes at least a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L1, the operating member, in a non-operated state, causes the game ball to flow down the third flow path, and when the operating member is activated based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, causes the game ball to flow down the first flow path or the second flow path. The benefits to the player are set in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player depending on whether the operating member is in a non-operated state or an activated state. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down the flow path with a different benefit given to the player by the operating member, which is a movable object, rather than a non-movable object (fixed object) such as the Kroon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to set the space provided on the gaming board to arrange the operating member smaller than when a non-movable object such as the Kroon device 63 is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction in the design freedom while also suppressing the reduction in the front view area of the pattern display unit 341.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix L1, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the first or second flow path, which provides a higher or middle level of benefit to the player, while when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is deactivated, causing the gaming ball to flow down the third flow path, which provides a lower level of benefit to the player. In this way, when the operating member is deactivated, the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, while when the operating member is activated, the gaming ball flows down the first or second flow path, making it possible to easily recognize the flow path through which the gaming ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in the deactivated state or the activated state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix L1, when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the operating member is deactivated, and the gaming ball flows down the third flow path, which has a lower profit given to the player, so that when the predetermined operating conditions are not met, the gaming ball is completely prevented from accidentally flowing down the first or second flow path, which has a higher profit given to the player. This prevents the player from receiving an unfair profit or from playing in a strategy game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix L1, the predetermined operating condition includes at least a transition to a special game state. In this way, by including at least a transition to a special game state in the predetermined operating condition, the player can be given a benefit from the operating member being in an operating state as a privilege for playing a special game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix L2]
The special game includes a first special game (normal jackpot game) which is transferred to a first transition determination state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state (jackpot game state) at a first probability after the special game is ended, and a second special game (probable jackpot game) which is transferred to a second transition determination state (high probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game (jackpot game) at a second probability higher than the first probability after the special game is ended,
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1, characterized in that the specified operating condition includes transitioning to the second transition determination state after the second special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2, the predetermined operating condition includes transitioning to a second transition determination state in which a transition determination is made with a second probability higher than the first probability after the end of the second special game. In this way, the predetermined operating condition includes transitioning to a second transition determination state in which a transition determination is made with a second probability higher than the first probability after the end of the second special game, so that in the second transition determination state from the end of the second special game to the execution of the next special game, the operating member is in an operating state, and the game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path. This provides a new gameplay in which the profit from the game ball flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path is granted in the second transition determination state from the end of the second special game to the execution of the next special game, and this new gameplay increases the interest of the game.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 310: Decorative section 312: Outer rail 313A: General winning port 314: First winning port 315: Second winning port 316, 316C: Variable winning port 319, 319C: Opening and closing door 316A: First variable winning port 319A: First opening and closing door 316B: Second variable winning port 316Ba: Discharge port 319B: Second opening and closing door 341: Pattern display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 39: 7-segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
48: Branching unit 5: Voice and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 60: One-hole Krun device 63: Krun device 631: First through hole 632: Second through hole 633: Third through hole 69: Special winning port 70: Rotating body 701: Storage section 74: Game ball dispersion area 75: Game ball straightening area 76: Low profit flow path 77: High profit flow path 78: Medium profit flow path 80: Distribution member 84: Flow path regulating member R1: First moving path R2; Second moving path Rs1: First route detection sensor Rs2: Second route detection sensor G1: First role continuous operation gate (first role continuous operation gate)
Gs1: First role continuous operation gate sensor (first role continuous gate sensor)
G2: Second role continuous operation gate (second role continuous operation gate)
Gs2: Second role continuous operation gate sensor (second role continuous gate sensor)

Claims (1)

An information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in any one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate for transitioning to the special game state,
A storage means for storing each of the numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
A setting means for setting which of the numerical information is used in the transition determination state to perform the transition determination;
a display control means for displaying a display corresponding to any one of the transition determination states set by the setting means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means
a numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
and a means for displaying, in a specified area of the display means, a plurality of types of specific information displayed using numbers or letters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when at least a gaming ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is established,
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed in the predetermined area of the display means,
a display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
an opening and closing action game execution means for causing a special ball entry means for granting a specific benefit when a game ball enters the ball when the ball is opened to execute a predetermined opening and closing action game;
A plurality of stages are set for the number of game balls entering the specific area, each stage being a predetermined number;
the display control means is configured to execute a display corresponding to a predetermined stage among the plurality of stages according to the number of game balls entering the specific area when a game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the opening and closing action game,
a display execution means for executing a specific display effect on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied based on the execution of a predetermined game by a player;
The display means is configured to display the plurality of types of specific information in the predetermined area of the display means according to a display order set when the specific performance display is executed,
a state switching means for switching between a predetermined valid state in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is valid and a predetermined invalid state in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is invalid,
During the predetermined valid state, a plurality of game balls entering the specific area are valid.
A display corresponding to the number of valid game balls that have entered the specific area during the predetermined valid state is configured to be executed,
one of the predetermined numerical information is set from the plurality of types of numerical information, and when the display of the plurality of types of specific information is executed in a predetermined order during the specified period, specific information of a second value, which is a value larger than the first value, can be displayed later than specific information of a first value;
A gaming machine, characterized in that the form of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means and the form of the specific information displayed on the display means are different from each other.